Ans Flu

Fluids Analysis Guide
ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
ansysinfo@ansys.com
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Release 14.5
October 2012
ANSYS, Inc. is
certified to ISO
9001:2008.
Copyright and Trademark Information

2012 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.
U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents
I. CFD ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
1. Overview of FLOTRAN CFD Analyses ................................................................................................ 3
1.1. Types of FLOTRAN Analyses ......................................................................................................... 3
1.1.1. Laminar Flow Analysis ........................................................................................................ 4
1.1.2. Turbulent Flow Analysis ...................................................................................................... 4
1.1.3. Thermal Analysis ................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.4. Compressible Flow Analysis ................................................................................................ 4
1.1.5. Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow Analysis .................................................................................... 4
1.1.6. Multiple Species Transport Analysis .................................................................................... 4
1.1.7. Free Surface Analysis .......................................................................................................... 4
1.2. About GUI Paths and Command Syntax ....................................................................................... 5
2. The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis ....................................................................................................... 7
2.1. Characteristics of the FLOTRAN Elements .................................................................................... 7
2.1.1. Other Element Features ...................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Considerations and Restrictions for Using the FLOTRAN Elements ............................................... 8
2.2.1. Limitations on FLOTRAN Element Use ................................................................................. 8
2.3. Overview of a FLOTRAN Analysis ............................................................................................... 10
2.3.1. Determining the Problem Domain .................................................................................... 10
2.3.2. Determining the Flow Regime .......................................................................................... 11
2.3.3. Creating the Finite Element Mesh ..................................................................................... 11
2.3.4. Applying Boundary Conditions ......................................................................................... 12
2.3.5. Setting FLOTRAN Analysis Parameters ............................................................................... 12
2.3.6. Solving the Problem ......................................................................................................... 12
2.3.7. Examining the Results ...................................................................................................... 12
2.4. Files the FLOTRAN Elements Create ........................................................................................... 12
2.4.1. The Results File ................................................................................................................. 13
2.4.2. The Print File (Jobname.PFL) ......................................................................................... 13
2.4.3. The Nodal Residuals File ................................................................................................... 14
2.4.4. The Restart File ................................................................................................................. 14
2.4.5. The Domain File ............................................................................................................... 14
2.4.6. Restarting a FLOTRAN Analysis ......................................................................................... 15
2.5. Convergence and Stability Tools ................................................................................................ 15
2.5.1. Relaxation Factors ............................................................................................................ 15
2.5.2. Inertial Relaxation ............................................................................................................ 16
2.5.3. Modified Inertial Relaxation .............................................................................................. 16
2.5.4. Artificial Viscosity ............................................................................................................. 16
2.5.5. DOF Capping ................................................................................................................... 16
2.5.6. The Quadrature Order ...................................................................................................... 17
2.6. What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis .......................................................................... 17
2.6.1. Deciding How Many Global Iterations to Use .................................................................... 18
2.6.2. Convergence Monitors ..................................................................................................... 18
2.6.3. Stopping a FLOTRAN Analysis ........................................................................................... 20
2.6.4. Pressure Results ............................................................................................................... 20
2.7. Evaluating a FLOTRAN Analysis .................................................................................................. 20
2.8. Verifying Results ....................................................................................................................... 21
3. FLOTRAN Laminar and Turbulent Incompressible Flow ................................................................. 23
3.1. Activating the Turbulence Model ............................................................................................... 24
3.1.1. The Role of the Reynolds Number ..................................................................................... 24
3.1.2. Determining Whether an Analysis Is Turbulent .................................................................. 25
3.1.3. Turbulence Ratio and Inlet Parameters .............................................................................. 25
Release 14.5 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
iii

3.1.4. Turbulence Models ........................................................................................................... 25
3.1.4.1. Standard k-epsilon Model (default) .......................................................................... 26
3.1.4.2. Zero Equation Turbulence Model (ZeroEq) ................................................................ 28
3.1.4.3. Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG) ........................................................ 28
3.1.4.4. k-epsilon Model Due to Shih (NKE) ........................................................................... 29
3.1.4.5. Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR) ............................................................................. 29
3.1.4.6. Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL) .................................................................................. 30
3.1.4.7. k-omega Turbulence Model ..................................................................................... 31
3.1.4.8. Shear Stress Transport Model (SST) .......................................................................... 31
3.2. Meshing Requirements ............................................................................................................. 32
3.3. Flow Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................ 33
3.4. Strategies for Difficult Problems ................................................................................................ 37
3.5. Example of a Laminar and Turbulent FLOTRAN Analysis ............................................................. 38
4. FLOTRAN Thermal Analyses ............................................................................................................ 41
4.1. Meshing Requirements ............................................................................................................. 41
4.2. Property Specifications and Control .......................................................................................... 41
4.3. Thermal Loads and Boundary Conditions .................................................................................. 42
4.3.1. Applying Loads ................................................................................................................ 42
4.3.1.1. Applying Loads Using Commands ............................................................................ 43
4.3.1.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI .................................................................................. 43
4.3.1.3. Solutions ................................................................................................................. 44
4.4. Solution Strategies .................................................................................................................... 45
4.4.1. Constant Fluid Properties ................................................................................................. 45
4.4.2. Forced Convection, Temperature Dependent Properties .................................................... 45
4.4.3. Free Convection, Temperature Dependent Properties ........................................................ 45
4.4.4. Conjugate Heat Transfer ................................................................................................... 46
4.5. Heat Balance ............................................................................................................................. 48
4.6. Surface-to-Surface Radiation Analysis Using the Radiosity Method ............................................ 49
4.6.1. Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 49
4.6.2. Heat Balances .................................................................................................................. 49
4.7. Examples of a Laminar, Thermal, Steady-State FLOTRAN Analysis ................................................ 49
4.7.1. The Example Described .................................................................................................... 50
4.7.2. Doing the Buoyancy Driven Flow Analysis (GUI Method) ................................................... 51
4.7.3. Doing the Buoyancy Driven Flow Analysis (Command Method) ......................................... 58
4.8. Example of Radiation Analysis Using FLOTRAN (Command Method) ........................................... 59
5. FLOTRAN Transient Analyses .......................................................................................................... 61
5.1. Time Integration Method .......................................................................................................... 61
5.2. Time Step Specification and Convergence ................................................................................. 62
5.3. Terminating and Getting Output from a Transient Analysis ......................................................... 63
5.4. Applying Transient Boundary Conditions ................................................................................... 64
6. Volume of Fluid (VOF) Analyses ...................................................................................................... 65
6.1. VFRC Loads ............................................................................................................................... 66
6.1.1. Initial VFRC Loads ............................................................................................................. 66
6.1.2. Boundary VFRC Loads ...................................................................................................... 66
6.2. Input Settings ........................................................................................................................... 67
6.2.1. Ambient Conditions ......................................................................................................... 67
6.2.2. VFRC Tolerances ............................................................................................................... 68
6.2.3. VOF Time Steps ................................................................................................................ 68
6.3. Postprocessing ......................................................................................................................... 69
6.4. VOF Analysis of a Dam ............................................................................................................... 70
6.4.1. The Problem Described .................................................................................................... 70
6.4.2. Building and Solving the Model (Command Method) ........................................................ 70
iv

6.5. VOF Analysis of Open Channel with an Obstruction ................................................................... 71
6.6. VOF Analysis of an Oscillating Droplet ....................................................................................... 74
6.6.2. Results ............................................................................................................................. 75
6.6.4. Where to Find Other Examples .......................................................................................... 77
7. Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) Formulation for Moving Domains ........................................ 79
7.1. Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................ 81
7.2. Mesh Updating ......................................................................................................................... 83
7.3. Remeshing ............................................................................................................................... 84
7.4. Postprocessing ......................................................................................................................... 86
7.5. ALE Analysis of a Simplified Torsional Mirror .............................................................................. 87
7.5.2. Boundary Conditions ....................................................................................................... 87
7.5.3. Forces and Moments ........................................................................................................ 88
7.6. ALE/VOF Analysis of a Vessel with a Moving Wall ........................................................................ 94
7.6.2. Results ............................................................................................................................. 95
7.7. ALE Analysis of a Moving Cylinder ............................................................................................. 97
7.7.2. Results ............................................................................................................................. 98
8. FLOTRAN Compressible Analyses ................................................................................................. 103
8.1. Property Calculations .............................................................................................................. 103
8.2. Boundary Conditions .............................................................................................................. 104
8.3. Structured vs. Unstructured Mesh ............................................................................................ 105
8.4. Solution Strategies .................................................................................................................. 105
8.4.1. Inertial Relaxation .......................................................................................................... 106
8.5. Example of a Compressible Flow Analysis ................................................................................ 106
8.5.1. The Example Described .................................................................................................. 106
8.5.1.1. Fluid Properties ..................................................................................................... 106
8.5.1.2. Approach and Assumptions ................................................................................... 107
8.6. Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (GUI Method) ................................................. 107
8.7. Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (Command Method) ....................................... 114
9. Specifying Fluid Properties for FLOTRAN ..................................................................................... 117
9.1. Fluid Property Types ................................................................................................................ 117
9.1.1. Property Types for Specific Heat ...................................................................................... 118
9.1.2. Property Types for Density and Thermal Conductivity ...................................................... 119
9.1.3. Property Types for Viscosity ............................................................................................ 119
9.1.4. Property Types for Surface Tension Coefficient ................................................................ 119
9.1.5. Property Types for Wall Static Contact Angle ................................................................... 119
9.1.6. General Guidelines for Setting Property Types ................................................................. 119
9.1.6.1. Using a Fluid Property Table ................................................................................... 120
9.1.6.2. Specifying Property Types ...................................................................................... 121
9.1.7. Density .......................................................................................................................... 122
9.1.8. Viscosity ......................................................................................................................... 123
9.1.9. Specific Heat .................................................................................................................. 124
9.1.10. Thermal Conductivity ................................................................................................... 125

9.1.11. Surface Tension Coefficient ........................................................................................... 125
9.1.12. Wall Static Contact Angle .............................................................................................. 126
9.2. Initializing and Varying Properties ........................................................................................... 126
9.2.1. Activating Variable Properties ......................................................................................... 127
9.3. Modifying the Fluid Property Database .................................................................................... 127
9.4. Using Reference Properties ..................................................................................................... 129
9.5. Using the ANSYS Non-Newtonian Flow Capabilities ................................................................. 130
9.5.1. Activating the Power Law Model ..................................................................................... 130
9.5.2. Activating the Carreau Model ......................................................................................... 131
9.5.3. Activating the Bingham Model ....................................................................................... 131
9.6. Using User-Programmable Subroutines ................................................................................... 132
10. FLOTRAN Special Features .......................................................................................................... 133
10.1. Coordinate Systems .............................................................................................................. 133
10.2. Rotating Frames of Reference ................................................................................................ 135
10.3. Swirl ..................................................................................................................................... 136
10.4. Distributed Resistance/Source ............................................................................................... 136
11. FLOTRAN CFD Solvers and the Matrix Equation ......................................................................... 139
11.1. Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm ............................................................................................... 140
11.2. Semi-Direct Solvers ............................................................................................................... 140
11.2.1. Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) Solver ...................................... 141
11.2.2. Preconditioned BiCGStab (PBCGM) Solver ..................................................................... 143
11.3. Sparse Direct Method ............................................................................................................ 144
12. Coupling Algorithms ................................................................................................................... 145
12.1. Algorithm Settings ................................................................................................................ 145
12.1.1. Advection Scheme ....................................................................................................... 145
12.1.2. Solver ........................................................................................................................... 146
12.1.3. Relaxation Factors ........................................................................................................ 146
12.2. Performance ......................................................................................................................... 146
13. Multiple Species Transport ......................................................................................................... 149
13.1. Mixture Types ....................................................................................................................... 149
13.1.1. Dilute Mixture Analysis ................................................................................................. 149
13.1.2. Composite Mixture Analysis .......................................................................................... 150
13.1.3. Composite Gas Analysis ................................................................................................ 150
13.2. Doing a Multiple Species Analysis .......................................................................................... 151
13.2.1. Establish the Species .................................................................................................... 151
13.2.2. Choose an Algebraic Species ........................................................................................ 151
13.2.3. Adjust Output Format ................................................................................................... 151
13.2.4. Set Properties ............................................................................................................... 152
13.2.5. Specify Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................ 153
13.2.6. Set Relaxation and Solution Parameters ........................................................................ 153
13.3. Doing a Heat Exchanger Analysis Using Two Species .............................................................. 153
13.4. Example Analysis Mixing Three Gases .................................................................................... 156
14. Advection Discretization Options ............................................................................................... 161
14.1. Using SUPG and COLG ........................................................................................................... 161
14.2. Strategies for Difficult Solutions ............................................................................................. 162
II. Acoustics ............................................................................................................................................. 163
1. Acoustics ....................................................................................................................................... 165
1.1. Types of Acoustic Analysis ....................................................................................................... 165
1.2. Solving Acoustics Problems .................................................................................................... 165
1.3. Building the Model ................................................................................................................. 166
1.3.1. Harmonic Acoustic Analysis Guidelines ........................................................................... 166
1.3.1.1. FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID220, and FLUID221 ............................................................ 166
vi

1.3.1.2. FLUID129 and FLUID130 ........................................................................................ 167
1.4. Meshing the Model ................................................................................................................. 168
1.4.1. Step 1: Mesh the Interior Fluid Domain ............................................................................ 169
1.4.2. Step 2: Generate the Infinite Acoustic Elements ............................................................... 169
1.4.3. Step 3: Specify the Fluid-Structure Interface .................................................................... 170
1.5. Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution ............................................................................ 171
1.5.1. Step 1: Enter the SOLUTION Processor ............................................................................. 171
1.5.2. Step 2: Define the Analysis Type ...................................................................................... 171
1.5.3. Step 3: Define Analysis Options ....................................................................................... 171
1.5.4. Step 4: Apply Loads on the Model ................................................................................... 172
1.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using the GUI ................................................................................ 173
1.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using Commands .......................................................................... 173
1.5.4.3. Load Types ............................................................................................................ 174
1.5.5. Step 5: Specify Load Step Options ................................................................................... 175
1.5.5.1. Dynamics Options ................................................................................................. 175
1.5.5.2. General Options .................................................................................................... 175
1.5.5.3. Output Controls ..................................................................................................... 175
1.5.6. Step 6: Back Up Your Database ........................................................................................ 176
1.5.7. Step 7: Apply Additional Load Steps (Optional) ................................................................ 176
1.5.8. Step 8: Finish the Solution ............................................................................................... 176
1.6. Reviewing Results ................................................................................................................... 176
1.7. Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) ............................................................................................... 176
1.8. Sample Applications ............................................................................................................... 177
1.8.1. Example 1: Fluid-Structure Coupled Acoustic Analysis (Command Method) ..................... 177
1.8.2. Example 2: Room Acoustic Analysis (Command Method) ................................................. 179
1.8.3. Example 2: Radiation From Two Waveguides ................................................................... 181
III. Thin Film ............................................................................................................................................. 183
1. Thin Film Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 185
1.1. Elements for Modeling Thin Films ............................................................................................ 185
1.2. Squeeze Film Analysis ............................................................................................................. 185
1.2.1. Static Analysis Overview ................................................................................................. 187
1.2.2. Harmonic Analysis Overview .......................................................................................... 187
1.2.3. Transient Response Analysis Overview ............................................................................ 188
1.2.4. Flow Regime Considerations ........................................................................................... 188
1.2.5. Modeling and Meshing Considerations ........................................................................... 189
1.2.6. Analysis Settings and Options ......................................................................................... 189
1.2.7. Loads and Solution ......................................................................................................... 190
1.2.8. Review Results ............................................................................................................... 190
1.2.9. Sample Harmonic Analysis .............................................................................................. 191
1.2.10. Simplified Transient Analysis ......................................................................................... 194
1.2.11. Complex Transient Analysis ........................................................................................... 196
1.3. Modal Projection Method for Squeeze Film Analysis ................................................................ 201
1.3.1. Modal Projection Method Overview ................................................................................ 201
1.3.2. Steps in Computing the Damping Parameter Using the Modal Projection Technique ....... 202
1.3.2.1. Modeling and Meshing .......................................................................................... 203
1.3.2.2. Perform Modal Analysis ......................................................................................... 203
1.3.2.3. Extracting Eigenvectors ......................................................................................... 203
1.3.2.4. Performing a Harmonic Analysis and Extracting Damping Parameters ..................... 203
1.3.3. Example Problem Using the Modal Projection Method .................................................... 204
1.3.4. Damping Extraction for Large Signal Cases ..................................................................... 208
1.4. Slide Film Damping ................................................................................................................. 209
1.4.1. Slide Film Damping Example .......................................................................................... 211
vii

Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 217
viii
List of Figures
2.1. Convergence Monitors Displayed by the GST Feature ............................................................................ 19
3.1. Internal Flow ......................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2. External Flow ........................................................................................................................................ 23
3.3. Structured Mesh ................................................................................................................................... 32
3.4. Unstructured Mesh ............................................................................................................................... 32
4.1. Diagram of the Square Cavity ................................................................................................................ 50
4.2. Plot of the Temperature Solution ........................................................................................................... 55
4.3. Plot of Streamline Contours ................................................................................................................... 55
4.4. Plot of Velocity Vectors .......................................................................................................................... 56
4.5. Plot of Flow Trace .................................................................................................................................. 57
6.1. Instantaneous Pressure Distributions at 0.001 ms .................................................................................. 75
6.2. Instantaneous Pressure Distributions at 0.012 ms .................................................................................. 76
7.1.Torsional Mirror at t = 0 Seconds ............................................................................................................ 79
7.2. Torsional Mirror at t = 2.5 Seconds ......................................................................................................... 80
7.3. Torsional Mirror at t = 7.5 Seconds ......................................................................................................... 80
7.4. Boundary Conditions for Moving Walls .................................................................................................. 81
7.5. Torsional Mirror Problem Description .................................................................................................... 87
7.6. Torsional Mirror Problem - Boundary Conditions .................................................................................... 88
7.7. Square Vessel with a Moving Wall .......................................................................................................... 94
7.8. Left Wall Displacement and Velocity ...................................................................................................... 95
7.9. Moving Cylinder ................................................................................................................................... 97
7.10. Elements at 0 Seconds ........................................................................................................................ 98
7.11. Elements at 22 Seconds ....................................................................................................................... 98
7.12. Elements at 44 Seconds ....................................................................................................................... 98
8.1. Three Types of Meshing ....................................................................................................................... 105
10.1. Direction of Positive Swirl Velocity VZ for Axisymmetric Models .......................................................... 134
10.2. Rotating Flow Problem ...................................................................................................................... 135
10.3. Problem Schematic with Rotating Coordinate .................................................................................... 136
11.1. Typical Debug Files ........................................................................................................................... 141
13.1. Environment for a Typical Heat Exchanger Analysis ............................................................................ 154
1.1. Example of a 2-D Acoustic Model (Fluid Within a Structure) .................................................................. 167
1.2. Example of Absorption Element Application ........................................................................................ 168
1.3. Submerged Cylindrical Shell ................................................................................................................ 168
1.4. Mesh the Fluid Domain ....................................................................................................................... 169
1.5. Add the Absorption Element on the Boundary ..................................................................................... 170
1.6. Specify Fluid-Structure Interface .......................................................................................................... 171
1.1. Moving Plate above a Fixed Wall .......................................................................................................... 186
1.2. Perforated Plate Structure ................................................................................................................... 186
1.3. Pressure Distribution on a Plate at a Low Driving Frequency ................................................................. 187
1.4. Damping and Squeeze Stiffness Coefficients vs. Frequency .................................................................. 187
1.5. Coupling of Nodes at the Hole Periphery with the Center Node of a FLUID138 Element ........................ 189
1.6. Pressure Distribution (Real Component) .............................................................................................. 192
1.7. Pressure Distribution (Imaginary Component) ..................................................................................... 192
1.8. Applied Voltage .................................................................................................................................. 197
1.9. Displacement Time History .................................................................................................................. 197
1.10. Pressure Time History ........................................................................................................................ 198
1.11. Modal Projection Technique for Damping Characterization ................................................................ 202
1.12. Damping and Squeeze Stiffness Parameters for a Rectangular Plate ................................................... 202
1.13. Fluidic Cross-Talk between Transverse and Rotational Motion ............................................................ 204
1.14. Time-Transient Response from Voltage Pulse ..................................................................................... 208
ix

1.15. Slide Film Damping at Low and High Frequencies .............................................................................. 210
1.16. Viscous Slide Film Element FLUID139 ................................................................................................. 211
1.17. Comb Drive Resonator ...................................................................................................................... 212
1.18. Displacement of Central Mass ............................................................................................................ 212
1.19. Real and Imaginary Current ............................................................................................................... 213
List of Tables
2.1. 2-D Solid Elements .................................................................................................................................. 7
3.1. Boundary Conditions at Intersections .................................................................................................... 35
4.1. Command Family and GUI Path Used to Apply Loads ............................................................................. 42
4.2. Load Commands for a FLOTRAN Thermal Analysis .................................................................................. 43
5.1. Specifying Values for Time Steps ............................................................................................................ 62
5.2. Saving Analysis Results for Processing ................................................................................................... 63
7.1. Interface Boundary Conditions .............................................................................................................. 82
7.2. Element Qualities .................................................................................................................................. 85
7.3. Remeshing Limitations ......................................................................................................................... 86
7.4. Quality Requirements ........................................................................................................................... 97
9.1. Units for Thermal Quantities ................................................................................................................ 118
9.2. Energy Units for Incompressible Analyses with Viscous Heating ........................................................... 118
9.3. Units for the AIR Property Type ............................................................................................................ 119
9.4. Property types for Value ................................................................................................................... 121
9.5. Property Database Format .................................................................................................................. 129
10.1. Coordinate System Specification ....................................................................................................... 134
12.1. Advection Scheme Defaults ............................................................................................................... 145
12.2. SIMPLEF and SIMPLEN Performance Results ....................................................................................... 146
1.1. Loads Applicable in an Acoustic Analysis ............................................................................................. 172
1.2. Commands for Applying Loads in Acoustic Analysis ............................................................................. 173
1.3. Load Step Options for a Harmonic Acoustic Analysis ............................................................................ 175
1.1.Thin Film Fluid Elements ...................................................................................................................... 185
1.2. Load Options for Thin Film Fluid Elements ........................................................................................... 190
1.3. Beam Model Results Considering Perforated Holes .............................................................................. 191
1.4. Modal Damping Parameters for First Two Eigenfrequencies ................................................................. 205
xi
xii
Part I: CFD
Chapter 1: Overview of FLOTRAN CFD Analyses

The ANSYS FLOTRAN derived product and the FLOTRAN CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics) option
to the other ANSYS products offer you comprehensive tools for analyzing 2-D and 3-D fluid flow fields.
Using either product and the FLOTRAN CFD elements FLUID141 and FLUID142, you can achieve solutions
for the following:
Lift and drag on an airfoil
The flow in supersonic nozzles
Complex, 3-D flow patterns in a pipe bend
In addition, you can use the features of ANSYS and ANSYS FLOTRAN to perform tasks including:
Calculating the gas pressure and temperature distributions in an engine exhaust manifold
Studying the thermal stratification and breakup in piping systems
Using flow mixing studies to evaluate potential for thermal shock
Doing natural convection analyses to evaluate the thermal performance of chips in electronic enclosures
Conducting heat exchanger studies involving different fluids separated by solid regions
The following FLOTRAN CFD analysis topics are available:
1.1.Types of FLOTRAN Analyses
1.2. About GUI Paths and Command Syntax
1.1. Types of FLOTRAN Analyses

You can perform these types of FLOTRAN analyses:
Laminar or turbulent
Thermal or adiabatic
Free surface
Compressible or incompressible
Newtonian or Non-Newtonian
Multiple species transport
These types of analyses are not mutually exclusive. For example, a laminar analysis can be thermal or
adiabatic. A turbulent analysis can be compressible or incompressible.
To solve any analysis involving the flow of fluid, use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,FLOW,TRUE
Overview of FLOTRAN CFD Analyses

GUI: Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Solution Options
1.1.1. Laminar Flow Analysis

In these analyses, the velocity field is very ordered and smooth, as it is in highly viscous, slow-moving
flows. The flow of some oils also can be laminar.
1.1.2. Turbulent Flow Analysis

Turbulent flow analyses deal with problems where velocities are high enough and the viscosity is low
enough to cause turbulent fluctuations. The two-equation turbulence model in ANSYS enables you to
account for the effect of the turbulent velocity fluctuations on the mean flow.
Laminar and turbulent flows are considered to be incompressible if density is constant or if the fluid
expends little energy in compressing the flow. The temperature equation for incompressible flow neglects
kinetic energy changes and viscous dissipation.
1.1.3. Thermal Analysis

Often, the solution for the temperature distribution throughout the flow field is of interest. If fluid
properties do not vary with temperature, you can converge the flow field without solving the temperature equation. In a conjugate heat transfer problem, the temperature equation is solved in a domain
with both fluid and non-fluid (that is, solid material) regions. In a natural convection problem, the flow
results mainly or solely from density gradients brought about by temperature variations. Most natural
convection problems, unlike forced convection problems, have no externally applied flow sources.
1.1.4. Compressible Flow Analysis

For high velocity gas flows, changes in density due to strong pressure gradients significantly influence
the nature of the flow field. ANSYS uses a different solution algorithm for compressible flow.
1.1.5. Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow Analysis

A linear relationship between the stress and rate-of-strain cannot describe many fluid flows adequately.
For such non-Newtonian flows, the ANSYS program provides three viscosity models and a user-programmable subroutine.
1.1.6. Multiple Species Transport Analysis

This type of analysis is useful in studying the dispersion of dilute contaminants or pollutants in the bulk
fluid flow. In addition, you can use multiple species transport analysis for heat exchanger studies where
two or more fluids (separated by walls) may be involved.
1.1.7. Free Surface Analysis

Free surface analyses deal with problems involving a unconstrained gas-liquid surface. You can use this
type of analysis to solve two dimensional planar and axisymmetric problems such as flow over a dam
and tank sloshing.
About GUI Paths and Command Syntax
1.2. About GUI Paths and Command Syntax

Throughout this document, you will see references to ANSYS commands and their equivalent GUI paths.
Such references use only the command name, because you do not always need to specify all of a
command's arguments, and specific combinations of command arguments perform different functions.
For complete syntax descriptions of ANSYS commands, consult the Command Reference.
The GUI paths shown are as complete as possible. In many cases, choosing the GUI path as shown will
perform the function you want. In other cases, choosing the GUI path given in this document takes you
to a menu or dialog box; from there, you must choose additional options that are appropriate for the
specific task being performed.
For the thermal related analyses described in this guide, specify the material you will be simulating
using an intuitive material model interface. This interface uses a hierarchical tree structure of material
categories, which is intended to assist you in choosing the appropriate model for your analysis. See
Material Model Interface in the Basic Analysis Guide for details on the material model interface.
Chapter 2: The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

Before running a FLOTRAN analysis, you need to understand the behavior of the FLOTRAN elements,
the steps to running a FLOTRAN analysis, the tools available, and how to evaluate an analysis.
The following FLOTRAN analysis topics are available:
2.1. Characteristics of the FLOTRAN Elements
2.2. Considerations and Restrictions for Using the FLOTRAN Elements
2.3. Overview of a FLOTRAN Analysis
2.4. Files the FLOTRAN Elements Create
2.5. Convergence and Stability Tools
2.6. What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis
2.7. Evaluating a FLOTRAN Analysis
2.8. Verifying Results
2.1. Characteristics of the FLOTRAN Elements

The ANSYS FLOTRAN elements, FLUID141 and FLUID142, solve for 2-D and 3-D flow, pressure, and
temperature distributions in a single phase viscous fluid. For these elements, the ANSYS program calculates velocity components, pressure, and temperature from the conservation of three properties: mass,
momentum, and energy.
Table 2.1: 2-D Solid Elements
Element
Dimens.
Shape or Characteristic
DOFs
FLUID141
2-D
Quadrilateral, four nodes or triangle,

three nodes
Fluid velocity, pressure, temperature,

turbulent kinetic energy, turbulent
energy dissipation, multiple species
mass fractions for up to six fluids
FLUID142
3-D
Hexahedral, eight nodes or tetrahedral, four nodes or wedge, six nodes

or pyramid, five nodes; tetrahedral
and hexahedral elements can be
combined by pyramids
Fluid velocity, pressure, temperature,

turbulent kinetic energy, turbulent
energy dissipation, multiple species
mass fractions for up to six fluids
2.1.1. Other Element Features

Other features of the FLOTRAN elements include:
A two-equation turbulence model for simulating turbulent flows.
Derived results, such as Mach number, pressure coefficient, total pressure, shear stress, y plus at walls,
and stream function for fluid analyses and heat flux and heat transfer (film) coefficient for thermal
analyses.
The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

Fluid boundary conditions, including velocities, pressures, and the turbulence quantities kinetic energy
and kinetic energy dissipation rate. You may supply specific values of the turbulence quantities at
the inlet, but the FLOTRAN default boundary conditions suffice if the entrance is not close to the regions of primary interest.
Thermal boundary conditions, including temperature, heat flux, volumetric heat sources, and heat
transfer (film) coefficient.
You can solve problems in Cartesian, cylindrical, polar, and axisymmetric coordinate systems. If a problem
is axisymmetric, activating a swirl option allows you to calculate a velocity component normal to the
axisymmetric plane.
2.2. Considerations and Restrictions for Using the FLOTRAN Elements

The FLOTRAN elements have some limitations:
You cannot change the problem domain during a single analysis.
Certain features of the ANSYS program do not work with the FLOTRAN elements.
You cannot use certain commands or menu paths with the FLOTRAN elements.
If you use the ANSYS GUI, only the features and options called for in the FLOTRAN SetUp portion of
the menus and dialog boxes will appear.
2.2.1. Limitations on FLOTRAN Element Use

When you are using the FLOTRAN elements, you should avoid using certain ANSYS features and commands, or if you do choose to use them, be aware that they have slightly different uses with the FLOTRAN
elements. This does not mean that every command not listed here will work with FLOTRAN elements. ANSYS
informs you if you try to issue a command that is invalid.
When using the FLOTRAN elements, keep the following points in mind:
FLOTRAN elements cannot be combined with other elements except when using the ANSYS Multifield solver.
The nodal coordinate system must be identical to the global coordinate system.
The /CLEAR command does not destroy an existing FLOTRAN results file (Jobname.RFL), thus preventing you from inadvertently destroying a results file that took much time and effort to create.
Existing Jobname.RFL file names will become Jobname.RFO file names if the number of nodes
in the model has changed since the Jobname.RFL file creation. You should remove unwanted results
files at the system level.
In FLOTRAN, the CP command enforces periodic boundary conditions by coupling all degrees of
freedom between two nodes. You should not use the CP command to couple more than two nodes
or to couple a subset of the degrees of freedom. You should only use this command to couple all
degrees of freedom of one node on a periodic boundary face to one other node on another periodic
boundary face.
You cannot couple nodes on the same element, and you may have difficulty coupling nodes on
adjacent elements.
Considerations and Restrictions for Using the FLOTRAN Elements

The ADAPT macro does not work with FLOTRAN.
You cannot use the ANTYPE command to invoke a transient analysis with the FLOTRAN element.
(See FLOTRAN Transient Analyses (p. 61).)
FLOTRAN analyses do not support automatic time stepping. For more information, see FLOTRAN
Transient Analyses (p. 61).
If you specify nodal heat generation loads via commands BFCUM, BFDELE, or BFUNIF, ANSYS uses
load values specified with the BFE command instead.
The commands CE, CECMOD, CEDELE, and CEINTF do not work with FLOTRAN.
The CNVTOL command does not set convergence tolerances with FLOTRAN as it does for other
analyses. For information about FLOTRAN convergence, see Deciding How Many Global Iterations to
Use (p. 18).
The symmetry and antisymmetry conditions that the DSYM command specifies are not appropriate
for FLOTRAN. FLOTRAN Laminar and Turbulent Incompressible Flow (p. 23) explains how to specify
flow symmetry boundary conditions for FLOTRAN.
FLOTRAN does not support angular acceleration vectors for rotating coordinate systems.
In a FLOTRAN analysis, the command FLDATA4,TIME (rather than the DELTIM command) specifies
a time step for a load step.
For FLOTRAN, you cannot use the DESOL command or the PRESOL command to modify HEAT, FLOW,
or FLUX nodal results.
FLOTRAN does not permit extrapolation of integration point results to nodes (via the ERESX command).
FLOTRAN does not allow you to generate elements through reflections. Although not recommended,
FLOTRAN will execute properly if you generate reflected elements using a different element type and
you subsequently switch to the FLOTRAN element type.
In FLOTRAN analyses, you cannot ramp loads via the KBC command. The FLOTRAN command
FLDATA4,TIME,BC, however, is analogous to the ANSYS command KBC, except that the default for
FLOTRAN is a step change.
Load case operations, such as those performed by the LCCALC, LCDEF, LCFACT, and LCFILE commands, are not allowed in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Do not use the LSWRITE or LSSOLVE command in a FLOTRAN analysis. Use the SOLVE command
to start a FLOTRAN solution.
The convergence tool invoked with the NCNV command does not apply to the FLOTRAN segregated
solver.
Do not use the NEQIT command, which defines the number of equilibrium iterations for a nonlinear
solution, in a FLOTRAN analysis.
FLOTRAN requires the nodal and global Cartesian coordinate systems to be the same. Therefore, you
cannot use the rotational fields on the N, NMODIF, and NROTAT commands.

In a FLOTRAN analysis, the commands FLDATA2,ITER, FLDATA4,TIME, and FLDATA4A,STEP control
items written to the results files (Jobname.RFL and Jobname.PFL
FLOTRAN does not permit user programmable elements, such as those specified via the NSVR command.
In a FLOTRAN analysis, the commands FLDATA2,ITER and FLDATA4,TIME control items written to
the database.
The PRNLD command does not apply to FLOTRAN, because it does not store boundary conditions
as printable element nodal loads.
Node reaction solutions, such as those produced by the PRRSOL command, are not available for
FLOTRAN.
The TIME command, which associates boundary conditions with a particular time value, does not
apply to FLOTRAN.
FLOTRAN analyses use the FLDATA1,SOLU command instead of the TIMINT command to specify
transient load steps.
FLOTRAN analyses use the FLDATA4,TIME command instead of the TRNOPT command to specify
transient analysis options.
The RESCONTROL command does not apply to FLOTRAN. Some of the functionality of RESCONTROL
is provided with the FLDATA32,REST command.
For FLOTRAN, you cannot use the DK command to define DOF constraints at keypoints.
2.3. Overview of a FLOTRAN Analysis

A typical FLOTRAN analysis consists of several main steps:
2.3.1. Determining the Problem Domain
2.3.2. Determining the Flow Regime
2.3.3. Creating the Finite Element Mesh
2.3.4. Applying Boundary Conditions
2.3.5. Setting FLOTRAN Analysis Parameters
2.3.6. Solving the Problem
2.3.7. Examining the Results
2.3.1. Determining the Problem Domain

You need to determine the proper domain for each problem you analyze. Locate the boundaries of the
problem where conditions are known. If you do not know precise conditions and must make assumptions
about them, do not locate boundaries too close to the regions of greatest interest or near regions that
have steep gradients in the solution variables.
Sometimes, you may not realize that steep gradients occur too near the outlet or in some other region
until you see the analysis results. Should this happen, you can re-analyze the problem with a different
problem domain.
For specific recommendations on determining problem domain, see the sections discussing the various
flow phenomena.
10
Overview of a FLOTRAN Analysis
2.3.2. Determining the Flow Regime

You need to estimate the character of the flow. The character is a function of the fluid properties,
geometry, and the approximate magnitude of the velocity field.
Fluid flow problems that FLOTRAN solves will include gases and liquids, the properties of which can
vary significantly with temperature. The flow of gases is restricted to ideal gases. You must determine
whether the effect of temperature on fluid density, viscosity, and thermal conductivity is important. In
many cases, you can get adequate results with constant properties.
To assess whether you need the FLOTRAN turbulence model, use an estimate of the Reynolds number,
which measures the relative strengths of the inertial and viscous forces. (See FLOTRAN Laminar and
Turbulent Incompressible Flow (p. 23) for more information.)
To determine whether you need to use the compressible option, estimate the Mach number. (See
FLOTRAN Compressible Analyses (p. 103)) The Mach number at any point in the flow field is the ratio of
the fluid speed and the speed of sound. At Mach numbers above approximately 0.3, consider using the
compressible solution algorithm. At Mach numbers above approximately 0.7, you can expect significant
differences between incompressible and compressible results. You may want to compare results from
each algorithm for a representative problem.
2.3.3. Creating the Finite Element Mesh

You will need to make assumptions about where the gradients are expected to be the highest, and you
must adjust the mesh accordingly. For example, if you are using the turbulence model, then the region
near the walls must have a much denser mesh than would be needed for a laminar problem. If it is too
coarse, the original mesh may not capture significant effects brought about through steep gradients
in the solution. Conversely, elements may have very large aspect ratios with the long sides along directions with very low gradients.
For the most accurate results, use mapped meshing. It more effectively maintains a consistent mesh
pattern along the boundary. You can do this by issuing the command MSHKEY,1 (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> entity> Mapped).
In some cases, you may wish to use hexahedral elements to capture detail in high-gradient regions and
tetrahedral elements in less critical regions. As described in Creating Transitional Pyramid Elements in
the Modeling and Meshing Guide you can instruct ANSYS to automatically create pyramid elements at
the interface.
For flow analysis, especially turbulent, you should not use pyramid elements in the region near the
walls because it may lead to inaccuracies in the solution.
Wedge elements can be useful when a complex area can be easily meshed with triangles that are then
extruded. For a quick solution, you can use wedge elements in the region near the walls. However, for
accurate results, you should use hexahedral elements in those regions.
Wedge elements are considered to be degenerate hexahedral elements. When using the ANSYS MeshTool
(Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool) to sweep triangles into wedges, you must select
Hex elements.
11
2.3.4. Applying Boundary Conditions

You can apply boundary conditions before or after you mesh the domain. Consider every model
boundary. If a condition is not specified for a dependent variable, a zero gradient of that value normal
to the surface is assumed.
You can change boundary conditions between restarts. If you need to change a boundary condition or
accidentally omit it, you do not need to restart your analysis unless the change causes instabilities in
the analysis solution.
2.3.5. Setting FLOTRAN Analysis Parameters

In order to use options such as the turbulence model or solution of the temperature equation, you
must activate them. Specific items to be set, such as fluid properties, are a function of the type of flow
problem at hand. Other sections in this document recommend parameter settings for various types of
flow.
2.3.6. Solving the Problem

You can monitor solution convergence and stability of the analysis by observing the rate of change of
the solution and the behavior of relevant dependent variables. These variables include velocity, pressure,
temperature, and (if necessary) turbulence quantities such as kinetic energy (degree of freedom ENKE),
kinetic energy dissipation rate (ENDS), and effective viscosity (EVIS).
An analysis typically requires multiple restarts.
2.3.7. Examining the Results

You can postprocess output quantities and examine the results in the output files. Use your engineering
judgment when examining the results to evaluate the plausibility and consistency of the overall analysis
approach, how specific properties are used, and the conditions imposed.
Note
Results tracking via the NLHIST command is not available with FLOTRAN analyses.
2.4. Files the FLOTRAN Elements Create

You perform most fluid flow analyses in ANSYS by stopping the analysis job and then restarting it
multiple times. Often, analysts change parameters such as relaxation factors or turn options (such as
solution of the temperature equation) on or off between restarts. Each time you continue a job, the
ANSYS program appends data to all of the files that its FLOTRAN element creates.
The following list explains all files that a FLOTRAN element creates. A discussion of the residual file appears at the end of this section.
The results file, Jobname.RFL, contains nodal results.
The print file, Jobname.PFL, contains input convergence monitors, and inlet/outlet summaries.
The wall file, Jobname.RSW, contains wall shear stress and Y-plus information.
12
Files the FLOTRAN Elements Create

The residual file, Jobname.RDF, contains the nodal residuals.
The debug file, Jobname.DBG, contains information about algebraic solver performance.
The results backup file, Jobname.RFO, contains a copy of the results file data.
The restart file, Jobname.CFD, contains FLOTRAN data structures.
The domain file, (jobname.pv_0000n) for use by ICEM CFD's PV3 postprocessing visualization tool.
2.4.1. The Results File

The results of a FLOTRAN analysis are not stored in the ANSYS database automatically. At the end of
every solution, the ANSYS program adds a set of results to the results file, Jobname.RFL. You have
some control over the content of the results file and how often ANSYS updates it. The defaults given
in the description of the FLDATA5,OUTP command in the Command Reference reflect FLOTRAN's determination of what the results file should store based on the options you choose.
The ANSYS program is flexible about how many sets of results you can store for a steady-state FLOTRAN
analysis. Keeping sets of results from earlier executions has advantages: you can compare changes that
occurred between sets of results, and you can continue an analysis from its earlier stages using different
options or relaxation parameters.
The ANSYS program stores a set of results when you begin an analysis (before the first iteration), then
stores results again when one of the termination criteria is reached. Between those events, you can
append the results to the Jobname.RFL file. Storing intermediate sets of results enables you to continue the analysis from an earlier stage with different options and features activated, for example to
enhance stability.
We recommend that you use ANSYS' overwrite frequency option because it allows you to periodically
store and update a temporary set of results. Using this option ensures that a useful set of results will
exist should you need to restart an analysis after a power failure or other system interruption. The next
regularly scheduled output of results overwrites the temporary results set. You can accomplish the same
thing by instructing ANSYS to append data to the results file more often; however, this method inflates
the size of the results file.
To set the overwrite frequency, use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA2,ITER,OVER,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Execution Ctrl
To set the append frequency, use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA2,ITER,APPE,Value
2.4.2. The Print File (Jobname.PFL)

The Jobname.PFL file contains a complete record of all FLOTRAN input parameters, including properties
and solution options. This information is recorded each time a SOLVE is issued so as to provide a complete
account of the analysis history. In addition, all convergence monitors are recorded for all active values.
A results summary, showing maximum and minimum values of each property and degree of freedom,
is provided at a user-determined frequency. Average values are also recorded. The mass flow boundaries
are identified and a mass balance is calculated. Finally, all heat transfer information is summarized for
all heat transfer and heat sources.
13
2.4.3. The Nodal Residuals File

The nodal residuals file, Jobname.RDF, shows you how well the current solution is converged. At every
stage in the solution procedure, the flow, property, and temperature fields are used to calculate coefficient
matrices and forcing functions for each DOF. If a solution is converged completely, these matrices and
forcing functions will produce the same velocity field used to generate them and the residuals of the
matrix equation will be very small. You must request at least one global iteration to obtain a nodal residual file.
If a solution oscillates, however, the magnitude of the residuals shows where the maximum errors are.
(The main diagonal entries of the matrix normalize the residuals.) This normalization enables you to
compare directly the value of the DOF and the value of its residual.
To calculate residuals for every active degree of freedom and output them to the residuals file, do either
of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA5,OUTP,RESI,TRUE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN SetUp> Additional Out> Residual File
To read the residuals file, either issue the FLREAD command (Main Menu> General Postproc> FLOTRAN
2.1A). The residuals are postprocessed with the label associated with the DOF (for instance, TEMP or
PRES for the temperature or pressure residuals).
2.4.4. The Restart File

By default, FLOTRAN calculates data structures at the beginning of a restart of an analysis. These calculations may take considerable time for large models. To avoid recalculation, you can opt to have FLOTRAN
store the data structures in the Jobname.CFD file. FLOTRAN creates this file from information in the
ANSYS database (but the file is not required for restarts).
To write to or read from the Jobname.CFD file, use either of the following methods before the restart:
Command(s): FLDATA32,REST,RFIL,T
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Restart Options> CFD Restart File
You can toggle the RFIL state on (TRUE) or off (FALSE). If is on, ANSYS reads the restart file when FLOTRAN
begins to execute. If no restart file exists, one will be created.
If you are restarting an analysis with updated boundary conditions, you must overwrite an existing
.CFD file in order to use the new conditions. To overwrite the file, use either of the following methods:
Command(s): FLDATA32,REST,WFIL,T
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Restart Options> CFD Restart File
This will cause FLOTRAN to create a new restart file during the next load step, and automatically sets
the RFIL state to False. After the restart that has created the new file completes, issue the
FLDATA32,REST,RFIL,TRUE command so that subsequent restarts use the new Jobname.CFD restart
file.
2.4.5. The Domain File

Domain files are used by ICEM CFD's PV3 postprocessor visualization tool. In addition to nodal results
these files contain information to define the finite element model, including node locations, element
topology, element connectivity, and family information concerning predefined ANSYS components.
They also contain load step, substep, cumulative iteration, and time point values.
14
Convergence and Stability Tools
2.4.6. Restarting a FLOTRAN Analysis

You can restart the FLOTRAN analysis from any set of results in the Jobname.RFL file or from a different
.RFL file. You can base the restart on the set number (Label = NSET), the global iteration number
(Label = ITER), the load step/subset numbers (Label = LSTP), or the transient analysis time (Label
= TIME). You determine the restart criteria by doing either of the following:
Issue the command FLDATA32,REST,Label,Value. Specify one of the labels listed above in place
of Label. The Value argument causes values associated with the other criteria to be zeroed. Once
invoked, the behavior is turned off in the database by setting all the criteria to zero. If you are restarting
from a different results file, you also need to specify the filename, extension, and directory of that
file.
Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Restart Options> Restart/Iteration (or Restart/Load step, Restart/Set, etc.)
If you specify invalid criteria, ANSYS notifies you and (if the program is operating in batch mode) terminates the analysis.
When you restart an analysis, ANSYS copies the original results file to the file Jobname.RSO and places
the restart point, all previous results sets, and all subsequent results sets in the new Jobname.RFL
file. If the Value input on the FLDATA32,REST command is negative, creation of the Jobname.RSO
file is blocked. FLOTRAN uses the absolute value of the number specified for Value.
If a results file name is entered in the Fname field of the FLDATA32,REST command, FLOTRAN interpolates those results onto the current mesh in the database, regardless of whether or not the mesh has
changed. This causes the convergence monitors to start again from zero. This restart is different than
a restart without a file name specification. However, the results quickly converge to the original solution.
2.5. Convergence and Stability Tools

2.5.1. Relaxation Factors
The ANSYS program offers several tools to help with convergence and solution stability. The Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference explains how they are implemented.
The relaxation factor is the fraction of the change between the old solution and the newly calculated
solution that is added to the old solution, giving the results for the new global iteration. The relaxation
factors for every component must be between 0.0 (resulting in no update to the degree of freedom or
property) and 1.0 inclusive. You set relaxation factors via either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA25,RELX,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> DOF Relaxation
Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Prop Relaxation
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> DOF Relaxation
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Prop Relaxation
Note
See the description of the FLDATA25,RELX command in the Command Reference for lists of
degree of freedom and property component names.
15
2.5.2. Inertial Relaxation

Inertial relaxation of the equation set for a DOF provides diagonal dominance to make a solution stable.
Hypothetically, when a solution is converged in the absence of round off-error, the inertial relaxation
applied does not affect the value of the answer. However, in real situations, some round off-error always
occurs, so the inertial relaxation may affect your solution.
You can apply inertial relaxation to the momentum equations (MOME), turbulence equations (TURB),
the pressure equation (PRES), and the temperature equation (TEMP). To do so, use either of these
methods:
Command(s): FLDATA26,STAB,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Stability Parms
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Stability Parms
The inertial relaxation factor is in the denominator of the term added, so smaller values have a greater
effect. Typical useful values range between 1.0 (mild) and 1.0 x 10-7 (severe).
2.5.3. Modified Inertial Relaxation

Modified inertial relaxation adds a local positive value to the diagonal term to guarantee a positive diagonal.
You can apply modified inertial relaxation to the momentum equations (MOME), turbulence equations
(TURB), and the temperature equation (TEMP). To do so, use either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA34,MIR,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> MIR Stabilization
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> MIR Stabilization
A larger modified inertial relaxation factor gives a more robust scheme, but it may yield a slower convergence. The recommended range is 0.1 to 1.0.
You should consider inertial relaxation and modified inertial relaxation to be mutually exclusive.
2.5.4. Artificial Viscosity

Artificial viscosity smooths the velocity solution in regions of steep gradients. It has proven useful in
aiding convergence of compressible problems and in smoothing velocity solutions in incompressible
problems with distributed resistances. For incompressible analyses, you should keep the artificial viscosity
within an order of magnitude of the effective viscosity.
To apply artificial viscosity, use either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA26,STAB,VISC,Value
2.5.5. DOF Capping

DOF capping allows you to prevent variables from going out of boundaries you specify. You can limit
the velocities, pressure, and temperature degrees of freedom (VY, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP). To do this, use
either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA31,CAPP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Results Capping
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Results Capping
16
What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis

Velocity capping eliminates the effects of velocity spikes on properties, which may occur in the early
stages of convergence. Capping is especially suited to compressible analyses, where velocity spikes can
cause kinetic energy terms great enough to produce negative static temperatures. When a degree of
freedom is capped, ANSYS prints a message along with the convergence monitor printout.
The pressure value calculated by the solution of the pressure equation is capped, not the relaxed value.
Therefore, if you introduce pressure capping upon restarting an analysis, pressure values may still be
outside the caps.
Capping applies to relative values of pressure and absolute values of temperature.
You should cap the total temperature when performing compressible thermal analyses. It will help ensure
negative properties do not enter the calculations.
Caution
When velocities are capped, conservation of mass may not be enforced.
2.5.6. The Quadrature Order

You have control over the quadrature order. In axisymmetric problems, the quadrature order automatically is set to 2 upon solution. This is because quadrature orders of 2 produce more accurate results
for problems with irregularly shaped elements. The quadrature order is also automatically set to 2 upon
solution for 3-D problems using cylindrical coordinates.
If you notice anomalous results near a region of skewed hexahedral elements, reset the quadrature order
to 2. There might be a problem with the results when the included angles of the hexahedra exceed
120 degrees.
You can change the quadrature order for momentum diffusion or source, pressure diffusion or source,
thermal diffusion or source, turbulent diffusion or source, using either of the following:
Command(s):
FLDATA30,QUAD,Label,Value
(Label is the element integral to change quadrature for, and Value is the number of integration
points).
GUI:
Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Mod Res/Quad Ord> CFD Quad Orders
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Mod Res/Quad Ord> CFD Quad Orders
For more information on quadrature order, refer to the description of the FLDATA30,QUAD command
in the Command Reference.
2.6. What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis

This section describes what happens in a FLOTRAN analysis and how to evaluate how the analysis is
proceeding.
17
2.6.1. Deciding How Many Global Iterations to Use

A FLOTRAN analysis is nonlinear and uses a sequential solution, so the first thing you must do is decide
how many global iterations should be executed. A global iteration is the solution, in sequence, of all
relevant governing equations followed by any fluid property updates that are needed.
In a transient simulation, a time step loop exists around the global iteration loop.
During a global iteration, the ANSYS Multiphysics program or ANSYS FLOTRAN obtains approximate
solutions to the momentum equation and uses them as forcing functions to solve a pressure equation
based on conservation of mass. ANSYS uses the resulting pressures to update the velocities so that the
velocity field conserves mass. If you request it, the ANSYS program solves the temperature equation
and updates temperature dependent properties.
Finally, if you have activated the turbulence model, the equations are solved and the program uses the
turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation rate to calculate the effective viscosity and thermal conductivity.
Effective viscosity and thermal conductivity replace, respectively, the laminar viscosity and thermal
conductivity to model the effect of turbulence on the mean flow.
To specify how many global iterations a FLOTRAN analysis should execute, use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA2,ITER,EXEC,Value (Value is the number of iterations.)
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Execution Ctrl
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Execution Ctrl
2.6.2. Convergence Monitors

As a FLOTRAN simulation proceeds, Mechanical APDL calculates convergence monitors for each degree
of freedom every global iteration. Convergence monitors are computed for velocities (VY, VY, VZ),
pressure (PRES), temperature (TEMP), turbulent kinetic energy (ENKE), kinetic energy dissipation rate
(ENDS), and any active species transport equations (SP01-SP06).
The convergence monitors are a normalized measure of the solution's rate of change from iteration to
iteration. Denoting by the general field variable, , any DOF, the convergence monitor is defined as
follows:
k
k 1
i i
= i=1
k
i
i=1
The convergence monitor represents the sum of changes of the variable calculated from the results
between the current kth iteration and the previous (k-1)th iteration, divided by the sum of the current
values. The summation is performed over all n nodes, using the absolute values of the differences.
Available in both batch and interactive sessions, the Graphical Solution Tracking (GST) feature displays
the computed convergence monitors while the solution is in process. Be default, GST is ON for interactive
sessions and OFF for batch runs. To turn GST on or off, use either of the following:
Command(s): /GST
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Output Ctrls> Grph Solu Track
Figure 2.1: Convergence Monitors Displayed by the GST Feature (p. 19) shows two typical GST displays:
18
What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis

Figure 2.1: Convergence Monitors Displayed by the GST Feature
(a) Steady-state simulation, (b) Transient simulation

In Figure 2.1: Convergence Monitors Displayed by the GST Feature (p. 19) (b), a plot of a transient
FLOTRAN solution, each "spike" on the plot indicates the beginning of a new time step.
After perhaps some initial fluctuations, convergence monitors will decrease as the analysis approaches
convergence. How small the numbers become depends on several factors, such as:
Complexity of the geometry
Adequacy of the finite element mesh in regions with steep gradients
The severity of the turbulence levels, indicated by the flow Reynolds number
Development of the flow near outlet boundaries
Points to remember when using graphical solution tracking include:
The GST feature is available for FLOTRAN analyses and also for structural, thermal, and electromagnetic analyses containing nonlinearities. For information about using GST to track convergence in
non-FLOTRAN analyses, see the Thermal Analysis Guide, the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide, and the Structural Analysis Guide.
GST can display up to ten curves at the same time. (Your model can include more than ten DOFs,
but only the first ten will be displayed.)
19

When the GST begins its plotting, ANSYS displays a dialog box with a STOP button. You can stop the
solution at any time by clicking on this button. To restart it, issue SOLVE or choose Main Menu>
Solution> Run FLOTRAN.
The time label which is positioned above the graph reveals the time at the last iteration.
2.6.3. Stopping a FLOTRAN Analysis

You can choose a target value for terminating a FLOTRAN analysis, based on the convergence monitors
for each degree of freedom falling below a certain value. To specify these values, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA3,TERM,Label,Value
See the Command Reference for the default values. Termination checks do not include inactive degrees
of freedom or degrees of freedom set to a negative value.
The analysis must satisfy convergence criteria for all active degrees of freedom, or complete the specified
number of global iterations requested. FLOTRAN terminates on the first condition satisfied. For information
on terminating transient analyses, see FLOTRAN Transient Analyses (p. 61).
To stop a FLOTRAN batch or background job in progress, place a file named Jobname.ABT in the
subdirectory from which the ANSYS job has been executed. The first line of this file should contain the
word "terminate," and should be left-justified. On Windows systems, you should also add a blank line
at the end of the Jobname.ABT file. FLOTRAN looks for the Jobname.ABT file during every global
iteration. If it finds the file and reads the word "terminate," it will finish that global iteration and terminate
normally, writing the results to the Jobname.RFL file and extending the Jobname.PFL file.
2.6.4. Pressure Results

For locked tetrahedral elements (those at a corner where two walls meet) there is a slight pressure anomaly. ANSYS takes those elements out of the solution domain because all the nodes have boundary
conditions. The solution is correct in the domain. Use hexahedral elements to avoid this pressure anomaly.
2.7. Evaluating a FLOTRAN Analysis

The two basic questions an analyst must answer are:
1. When is the analysis completed?
2. Has it been done correctly?
These questions are interrelated, since convergence may not be achieved it you have not set up and
executed the analysis correctly.
If you have set the input parameters and boundary conditions correctly, the analysis is complete when
the convergence monitors for all variables stop decreasing and the average, maximum, and minimum
values of the solution variables no longer increase or decrease. There is no guarantee, however, that
you will achieve a single exact answer because nature does not guarantee that a single exact answer
exists. Oscillatory problems (for example, vortex shedding behind a cylinder) may not yield stationary
results from a steady-state or a transient solution algorithm. You may wish to continue executing the
analysis to verify whether a solution has a stable or a fluctuating nature.
20
Verifying Results
The ANSYS program stores the average, minimum, and maximum values of the solution variables in
the file Jobname.PFL. This file also records the FLOTRAN input plus the convergence monitors which
have been calculated. The results summary includes all the DOF, as well as laminar and effective properties. You determine how often ANSYS issues the results summary by using one of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA5,OUTP,SUMF,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Additional Out> RFL Out Derived
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Additional Out> RFL Out Derived
The Value argument is the number of global iterations that pass before ANSYS issues the next results
summary.
You may also want to map your results onto a path through your model. See Mapping Results onto a
Path in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information on reviewing results along a path.
2.8. Verifying Results

You, the analyst, are responsible for verifying results. If your FLOTRAN analysis produces unexpected
results, take the actions listed below. You can accomplish many of these actions at the beginning of
the analysis. ANSYS creates a Jobname.PFL file and checks inputs even if the number of iterations
executed is zero.
1. Check the mass balance printed as part of the results summary. Internal checks will determine if
any mass flow can potentially cross a model boundary. Boundary conditions admitting mass flow
are:
Specified velocity boundaries
Specified pressure boundaries
Unspecified boundaries (These can result if you inadvertently omit a boundary condition.)
The ANSYS program tabulates the number of inlets/outlets, which should correspond to expectations.
2. Check boundary conditions within ANSYS to ensure that they are accurate.
3. Check that you specified the properties correctly and that they can vary with temperature and
pressure if necessary. The results summary in the Jobname.PFL file is a convenient place to check
this.
4. Check that the length units used to build the model are consistent with those used in specifying
properties.
5. In some cases, you need to verify that equations associated with the options chosen are solved
correctly (for instance, the pressure equation in compressible flow).
6. If the unexpected result of your analysis is divergence, the finite element mesh may not have sufficient
resolution, or significant gradients may exist near outlets. To resolve this, you may need to use
convergence aids such as relaxation. Later sections in this document discuss various relaxation
techniques.
7. If you get a diverged solution for a particular variable, you can re-initialize that variable to a single
value and continue. To do so, use one of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA29,MODV
21

GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Mod Res/Quad Ord> Modify Results
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Mod Res/Quad Ord> Modify Results
22
Chapter 3: FLOTRAN Laminar and Turbulent Incompressible Flow

A laminar or turbulent flow analysis calculates the flow and pressure distribution in a 2-D or 3-D geometry.
Flow problems require you to specify density and viscosity. Problems may be internal or external in
nature. For internal flows, wall or symmetry planes bound the flow (for example, flow in a pipe), except
for the inlet and outlet boundaries. (Figure 3.1: Internal Flow (p. 23) shows an example). The boundaries
of external problems generally are either far-field velocity or pressure boundary conditions. The flow
surrounding an airfoil is an external flow (See Figure 3.2: External Flow (p. 23)).
Figure 3.1: Internal Flow
Wall
Wall
Figure 3.2: External Flow
Free Stre m Conditions
Free Stre m Conditions

The distinction between incompressible and compressible flow lies in both the equation of state and
the solution algorithm.
In an incompressible flow, density variations can drive the flow only through gravitational acceleration.
Temperature changes cause variations of density.
23
FLOTRAN Laminar and Turbulent Incompressible Flow

In a compressible flow, the density changes caused by pressure variations significantly affect the momentum and temperature equations.
In any event, the incompressible algorithm can measure flow of an ideal gas, complete with small
density changes due to pressure. See FLOTRAN Compressible Analyses (p. 103) for more information.
The following FLOTRAN laminar and turbulent incompressible flow topics are available:
3.1. Activating the Turbulence Model
3.2. Meshing Requirements
3.3. Flow Boundary Conditions
3.4. Strategies for Difficult Problems
3.5. Example of a Laminar and Turbulent FLOTRAN Analysis
3.1. Activating the Turbulence Model

The distinction between laminar and turbulent flow lies in the ratio of the inertial transport to the viscous
transport. As this ratio increases, instabilities develop and velocity fluctuations begin to occur. A turbulent
model accounts for the effect of these fluctuations on the mean flow by using an increased viscosity,
the effective viscosity, in the governing equations. The effective viscosity is the sum of the laminar viscosity (which is a property of the fluid) and turbulent viscosity (which is calculated from a turbulence
model).
e = + t
Generally, the more turbulent the flow field, the higher the effective viscosity.
3.1.1. The Role of the Reynolds Number

The dimensionless Reynolds number measures the ratio of inertial and viscous forces to help determine
whether or not the turbulence model should be activated. The Reynolds number is defined in terms of
the properties of the fluid, a characteristic velocity, and a characteristic dimension:
The density (mass/length3) and absolute viscosity (mass/length-time) are properties of the fluid.
For internal flow problems, the characteristic dimension is the hydraulic diameter, defined as:
h
For example, the hydraulic diameter of a pipe is simply the diameter. As a general guideline for internal
flow problems such as flow in pipes, the turbulence model should usually be activated if the Reynolds
number is in excess of about 2300.
For an external flow problem, such as the flow over an airfoil, the characteristic length is a parameter
such as the length of the airfoil (wing cross section for a 2-D analysis).
For flow over a flat plate, the dimension is the length along the plate from the leading edge, with the
transition to turbulence occurring at a Reynolds number of approximately 500,000.
For more information, see Turbulence in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
24
Activating the Turbulence Model
3.1.2. Determining Whether an Analysis Is Turbulent

Determining if an analysis is laminar or turbulent is your responsibility. What happens if turbulence is
not activated when it should be, or vice versa? What are the indications and the consequences?
If turbulence is needed but not activated, the analysis probably will diverge. If this occurs, the momentum
and pressure convergence parameters will approach 1.0 and the values of velocities and pressure will
become very large. You should start over with the turbulence model activated.
In some cases, convergence occurs even without the turbulence model. This can happen if no geometrical features such as bends disturb the flow. Physically, some flows retain laminar characteristics unless
they are slightly disturbed in some fashion.
Conversely, although the turbulence models are not low Reynolds number models and do not "automatically" resort to laminar behavior at low Reynolds numbers, in such cases the turbulence models
predict low values of effective viscosity. If the final average effective viscosity is less than five times
greater than the laminar value, you should rerun the case without the turbulence model and evaluate
the differences.
You can postprocess the effective viscosity with the label EVIS. It is also tabulated in the results summary
output provided in the Jobname.PFL file. Therefore, you can observe the average behavior of effective
viscosity as the solution proceeds. You also can postprocess it to see its variation throughout the flow
field.
3.1.3. Turbulence Ratio and Inlet Parameters

Be aware that when an analysis begins, the effective viscosity initializes as a multiple of the laminar
value. This initialization occurs whether a turbulence model is or is not active. The default value of this
multiple (also called the turbulence ratio) is 1000; a reasonable value for most turbulent analyses. The
algorithm calculates lower or higher values as conditions dictate. However, the accuracy of the initial
estimate affects how long the program takes to compute the final value.
To set the turbulence ratio, use either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,RATI,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence> Turbulence Param
The two-equation turbulence models require boundary conditions for the turbulent kinetic energy
(ENKE) and turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate (ENDS) at an inlet. If known values are available at
the inlet, you can specify ENKE and ENDS, Otherwise, you must specify an inlet intensity (ININ), which
is the ratio of the fluctuating velocity to the inlet velocity, and an inlet scale factor (INSF), which is the
ratio of a length scale inlet region to the hydraulic diameter of the inlet. ININ and INSF default to 0.01.
To set the inlet intensity and inlet scale factor, you use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,ININ,Value FLDATA24,TURB,INSF,Value
3.1.4. Turbulence Models

FLOTRAN offers several turbulence models:
3.1.4.1. Standard k-epsilon Model (default)
3.1.4.2. Zero Equation Turbulence Model (ZeroEq)
3.1.4.3. Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG)
3.1.4.4. k-epsilon Model Due to Shih (NKE)
25

3.1.4.5. Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR)
3.1.4.6. Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL)
3.1.4.7. k-omega Turbulence Model
3.1.4.8. Shear Stress Transport Model (SST)
Turbulence modeling is activated by either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB,T
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Solution Options
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> Solution Options
To select a model, you use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Turbulence> Turbulence Model
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> Turbulence> Turbulence Model
Normally, the Standard k- Model is the first model to apply. It usually provides a realistic picture of the
flow. It is fine for the analysis of turbulent flow in pipes and channels. However, it over predicts the
amount of turbulence in a number of situations. For example, the flow in a converging nozzle undergoes
significant normal strain and the Standard k- Model over predicts the amount of turbulence. The resulting kinetic energy is over predicted, and the resulting effective viscosity prevents simulation of shock
waves in some cases.
In general, the RNG, NKE, GIR, and SZL turbulence models produce significantly more realistic and reliable
results in regions of large strain. This is particularly important for cases where the flow is strongly accelerated or decelerated (e.g. a converging nozzle) or where there is significant separation or recirculation
(e.g. a duct that goes through a 180 degree change of direction). Other situations where the Standard
k- Model encounters difficulties include flows with stagnation points.
The RNG, NKE, GIR, and SZL turbulence models control the excess turbulence by applying adjustments
to C and the source term of the dissipation equation. The adjustments are made in accordance with
the local rate of strain.
The k- turbulence model has the advantage near the walls to accurately predict the turbulence length
scale in the presence of an adverse pressure gradient. The k- model is much more sensitive to the
free-stream turbulence levels than the k- model. The Shear Stress Transport model (SST) combines the
k- model near the wall and the k- model away from the wall to overcome the deficiencies of both
models.
See the Command Reference and Turbulence in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information on the models.
3.1.4.1. Standard k-epsilon Model (default)

The Standard k- Model, the Zero Equation Turbulence Model, and the k- Model are the simplest
models. The other models are all extensions of the Standard k- Model and the k- Model. The Standard
k- Model is the default model.
To select the Standard k- Model, you use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,MODL,1
C, C1, C2, SCTK, and SCTD are Standard k- Model constants that are defined as follows:
26

C - Value is the k- turbulence model constant
t =
which is used in the update of the turbulent viscosity.

C1 - Value is the k- turbulence model C1 constant. It is the multiplier of the shear rate generation
term of the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate equation.
C2 - Value is the k- turbulence model C2 constant. It is the multiplier of the dissipation source term
in the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate equation.
SCTK - Value is the Schmidt number for the turbulent kinetic energy. The diffusion term in the turbulent
kinetic energy equation is divided by this factor.
SCTD - Value is the Schmidt number for the kinetic energy dissipation rate. The diffusion term in the
dissipation rate equation is divided by this factor.
To set the Standard k- Model constants C, C1, C2, SCTK, and SCTD, you use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,Label,Value
The following five wall parameters control turbulence wall modeling. The wall parameters apply for all
turbulence models except the Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
KAPP - Value is the law of the wall constant. It is the slope of the plot of normalized shear velocity
(u+) versus the nondimensionalized distance from the wall (y+). See Near-Wall Treatment in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details.
EWLL - Value is the law of the wall constant. It is related to the y intercept value for a plot of normalized
shear velocity (u+) versus the nondimensionalized distance from the wall (y+). See Near-Wall Treatment
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details.
WALL - Value is the choice of wall conductivity model. The default model is the Van Driest model
(Value = VAND), used most often for high Prandtl number fluids. The second choice is the Spalding
model (Value = SPAL), applicable to low Prandtl number fluids. The third choice is the Equilibrium
model (Value = EQLB). The equilibrium model is also automatically invoked for the wall viscosity by
this command.
VAND - Value is the constant A in the Van Driest wall conductivity model, as described in Equation 7.61
and Near-Wall Treatment in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
TRAN - Value is the magnitude of y+ marking the outer boundary of the laminar sublayer. Used only
for the Equilibrium Wall model.
To set the wall parameters KAPP, EWILL, WALL, VAND and TRAN, you use either of the following:
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Turbulence> Wall Parameters
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> Turbulence> Wall Parameters
27

The following three buoyancy terms control buoyancy modeling. The buoyancy terms apply for all turbulence models except the Zero Equation Turbulence Model.
BUC3 - Value is the k- buoyancy model constant. A value of zero means that there is no contribution
to the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate equation. The default value of one is appropriate for
stable thermally stratified flows. A value of zero is appropriate for unstable thermally stratified flows.
BUC4 - Value is the k- multiplier applied to the buoyancy term of the turbulent kinetic energy equation.
A value of 1.0 is appropriate for the calculation of stable thermally stratified flows. The default value is
zero.
BETA - Value is , the coefficient of thermal expansion
This term is used in the buoyancy terms of the k- model.

To set the buoyancy terms BUC3, BUC4, and BETA, you use either of the following:
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Turbulence> Buoyancy Terms
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> Turbulence> Buoyancy Terms
See Standard k-epsilon Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.
3.1.4.2. Zero Equation Turbulence Model (ZeroEq)

The Zero Equation Turbulence Model (ZeroEq) is the simplest and fastest turbulence model. It applies
to problems with fairly simple geometry and flow characteristics. The model does not give accurate
results if there is significant separation or recirculation.
To select the Zero Equation Turbulence Model, you use either of the following:
The Zero Equation Turbulence Model contains an automatic calculation of the length scale or you can
specify the length scale. Generally, the turbulence ratio can be set to 2.0 when you are using the Zero
Equation Turbulence Model.
See Zero Equation Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for more
information.
3.1.4.3. Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG)

The Re-Normalized Group Turbulence Model (RNG) is effective where the geometry has a strong curvature
(e.g., a duct that goes through a 180 degree change in direction. If you have tried the SZL Model and
the results are unsatisfactory, it is generally recommended that you try the RNG Model.
To select the RNG Model, you use either of the following:
28

To set the constants for the RNG Model, you use either the FLDATA24A,RNGT command or the foregoing
GUI.
The RNG Model is an extension of the Standard k- Model. Seven constants are assigned values. The
C, C1, C2, SCTK, and SCTD constants are assigned values that are separate from the Standard k- Model.
The following two constants are added:
BETA -Value is the RNG model constant,
ETAI -Value is the asymptotic value of the strain rate parameter eta.
Inlet parameters and wall parameters are the same as the Standard k- Model.
See RNG Turbulence Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.
3.1.4.4. k-epsilon Model Due to Shih (NKE)

The k- Model due to Shih (NKE) features a variable C term which helps to reduce the excess normal
strain terms in the Standard k- Model. The NKE model also employs a different dissipation source term
than the Standard k- Model.
The NKE and GIR models are recommended for rotating flows.
To select the NKE Model, you use either of the following:
To set the constants for the NKE Model, you use either the FLDATA24B,NKET command or the foregoing
GUI.
The NKE Model is an extension of the Standard k- Model. Four constants are assigned values. The C2,
SCTK, and SCTD constants are assigned values that are separate from the Standard k- Model. The following constant is added:
C1MX - Value is the maximum allowed value of the C1 constant in the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation
rate equation.
See NKE Turbulence Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.
3.1.4.5. Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR)

The Nonlinear Model of Girimaji (GIR) is suggested for cases with secondary vortices in the flow. The
GIR and NKE models are recommended for rotating flows.
To select the GIR Model, you use either of the following:
29

To set the constants for the GIR Model, you use either the FLDATA24C,GIRT command or the foregoing
GUI.
The GIR Model is an extension of the Standard k- Model. Seven constants are assigned values. The
SCTK, and SCTD constants are assigned values that are separate from the Standard k- Model. The following five constants are added:
G0 - Value is the
G1
G2
G3
G4
Value
Value
Value
Value
is
is
is
is
C10 constant.

constant.
the
the C2 constant.
the C3 constant.
the C4 constant.
See GIR Turbulence Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.
3.1.4.6. Shih, Zhu, Lumley Model (SZL)

The SZL Model is simpler than the NKE and GIR models. It produces the lowest level of turbulence. The
SZL model is numerically efficient, but in some cases the resulting low effective viscosity has an adverse
effect on stability. Generally, if the SZL model does not give satisfactory results, it is recommended that
you try the RNG model.
If conditions of large strain exist in the flow field, you may want to try the SZL Model after trying the
RNG, NKE or GIR models. If the SZL Model gives significantly different results, it is recommended that
you refine the mesh in the regions where the turbulence field is strongly altered.
To select the SZL Model, you use either of the following:
To set the constants for the SZL Model, you use either the FLDATA24D,SZLT command or the foregoing
GUI.
The SZL Model is an extension of the Standard k- Model. Five constants are assigned values. The SCTK,
and SCTD constants are assigned values that are separate from the Standard k- Model. The following
three constants are added:
SZL1 - Value is the numerator constant used in the calculation of C. It is the Aszl1 constant.
SZL2 - Value is the denominator constant used in the calculation of C. It is the Aszl2 constant.
SZL3 - Value is the strain rate multiplier. It is the Aszl3 constant.
See SZL Turbulence Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.
30
3.1.4.7. k-omega Turbulence Model

The k- model is one of the simplest turbulence models. It provides better modeling of the turbulent
boundary layer than the standard k- model, but is more sensitive to the free-stream turbulence levels.
To select the k- Model, you use either of the following:
To set the constants for the k- Model, use either the FLDATA24E,SKWT command or the foregoing
GUI.
The k- Model solves for the equation rather than the equation in the standard k- Model. Four
constants are assigned values. The SCTK constant is an assigned value that is separate from the Standard
k- Model. The following three constants are added:
SCTW - Value is the Schmidt number for the specific dissipation rate.
BETA - Value is the BETA factor.
GAMA - Value is the GAMMA factor.
See Standard k-omega Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.
3.1.4.8. Shear Stress Transport Model (SST)

The SST Model combines advantages of both the Standard k- Model and the k- Model. It automatically
switches to the k- Model in the near region and the Standard k- Model away from the walls.
To select the SST Model, you use either of the following:
To set the constants for the SST Model, use the FLDATA24F,SST1, FLDATA24G,SST1 and
FLDATA24H,SST2 commands, or the foregoing GUI. Similar to the k- Model, the SST Model solves for
the equation rather than the equation in the Standard k- Model. Nine constants are assigned values.
The SCTK1 and the SCTK2 constants are assigned values that are separate from the Standard k- Model.
The following seven constants are added.
CLMT - Value is the turbulent production clip factor.
SCTW1 - Value is the Schmidt number for the specific dissipation rate in the k- regime.
SCTW2 - Value is the Schmidt number for the specific dissipation rate in the k- regime.
BETA1 - Value is the BETA factor in the k- regime.
BETA2 - Value is the BETA factor in the k- regime.
GAMA1 - Value is the GAMMA factor in the k- regime.
GAMA2 - Value is the GAMMA factor in the k- regime.
31

See SST Turbulence Model in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference and the Command Reference for
more information.

The meshing requirements for turbulence are more restrictive than those for laminar flow. The most
important areas obviously are those with the higher gradients, in particular the regions near walls.
Structured meshes, as contrasted with free meshes, can provide more consistent representation at the
walls. Figure 3.3: Structured Mesh (p. 32) and Figure 3.4: Unstructured Mesh (p. 32) compare the structured
and unstructured meshes for a region near the wall.
Figure 3.3: Structured Mesh
This mesh was produced with MSHAPE,0,2D and MSHKEY,1 commands.

Figure 3.4: Unstructured Mesh
This mesh was produced with MSHAPE,1,2D and MSHKEY,0 commands.

You can evaluate the adequacy of the mesh near the walls. Applying the turbulence model near walls
involves the "Log Law of the Wall," the relationship between a nondimensionalized distance from the
wall Y+, and the log of a nondimensionalized velocity in a region near the wall. This law calculates a
near wall viscosity that is consistent with experimentally determined velocity profiles near the wall.
Values of Y+ are relevant only for wall nodes and are available for postprocessing (YPLU).
32
Flow Boundary Conditions

Optimum values of Y+ are between approximately 30 and 1000. If the pressure is decreasing in the
direction of flow, values up to 5000 are acceptable. FLOTRAN handles the case where Y+ is less than 30
for the near wall node by assuming that the near wall node is in the laminar sublayer or the overlap
region. In the former case, the near wall viscosity is simply the laminar value.
If Y+ is very small, perhaps below 1, more elements than necessary are being used to resolve the flow
distribution field. If Y+ is greater than 5000, decrease the mesh spacing near the wall.
Caution
Use enough elements to resolve the flow field in the regions of interest. You should use at
least four elements to span the cross sections of long thin channels. Use more than four
elements where thin channels connect to larger regions.
3.3. Flow Boundary Conditions

Each boundary of the problem domain requires treatment. You specify some combination of DOF (VX,
VY, VZ and PRES) at the boundary types listed below. (If suitable values are available, you can specify
turbulent kinetic energy (ENKE) and turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate (ENDS) at an inlet.) The
derivative of all dependent variables normal to the surface is zero if you apply no conditions at the
boundary surface.
To set DOF constraints at nodes, use either of the following:
Command(s): D
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> boundary condition type
You can set boundary conditions on the solid model using any of the following:
Command(s): DA and DL
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> boundary condition type>
On Areas
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> boundary condition type> On Areas
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> boundary condition type> On
Lines
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> boundary condition type> On Lines
This enables you to redo the analysis with a different mesh, without reapplying boundary conditions
on a nodal basis. These commands or GUI paths allow you to specify the condition on the endpoints
of a line or the edge of an area.
Take care to ensure that the proper conditions are applied at intersecting boundaries. You have control
over whether or not boundary conditions are applied at the ends of lines or at the edges of areas. A
nonzero velocity component at the end of a line or at the edge of an area will not replace an existing
zero velocity condition at the associated nodes. Where a wall intersects an inlet, the wall condition will
automatically prevail.
If you apply new (and different) boundary conditions to a solid model of a finite element mesh, you
should delete existing nodal boundary conditions before transferring the new loads.
Specified Flow: You specify all velocity components at the boundary. Use this method to specify a flow
at an inlet. Knowledge of the mass flow at the inlet requires you to know the density.
33

Specified Pressure: Typically, you apply a relative pressure (usually zero) as an outlet boundary condition.
In the absence of gravity and a rotating reference frame, the absolute pressure is the sum of the FLOTRAN
(relative) pressure and the reference pressure. See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for a more
complete discussion of pressure. A problem may also be pressure driven, in which case one of the
pressure boundaries is an inlet.
Note
If significant gradients are calculated near a boundary, a mass imbalance can occur. This is
due to the implied condition of fully developed flow for a constant pressure boundary. If the
flow has not fully developed, FLOTRAN is forced to adjust it across the last row of elements
to satisfy the boundary condition. Occasionally, this adjustment may cause a mass imbalance.
To prevent this from occurring, you can add a development length to the exit. This addition does not
actually need to match the physical flow geometry. You can subtract the pressure drop in this "chimney"
to obtain the desired pressure drop. The pressure drop in the "chimney" will vary over its full cross
section. You will have to choose a representative value of the pressure drop to match the desired outlet
conditions. You will not know this pressure drop, of course, until after you examine the results from
the chimney. You can opt to apply an exit pressure profile, based on these results, to the original geometry.
You can calculate the required length of the chimney (L) using the characteristic diameter (D) from the
development length formula:
Laminar flow: L/D ~ 0.06 Re
Turbulent flow: L/D ~ 4.4 Re1/6
Typically, a chimney 20 to 25 diameters long will be sufficient. Although the mesh in this region may
be coarse, you should avoid drastic changes in element size by using a size ratio in the chimney. The
important feature is the chimney length, not the number of nodes in it.
Symmetry Boundary: The velocity component normal to the boundary is specified as zero. Leave all
other degrees of freedom unspecified.
Generalized Symmetry Boundary Conditions: You can also apply generalized symmetry boundary
conditions. Velocity components are set tangential to the symmetry surface if the ALE formulation is
not activated. They are set equal to the mesh velocity if the ALE formulation is activated. To apply
generalized symmetry boundary conditions, use one of the following commands or the GUI equivalent:
D,NODE,ENDS,-1
DL,LINE,AREA,ENDS,-1,Value2
DA,AREA,ENDS,-1,Value2
With one exception, if any velocity component is specified at the same boundary, the generalized
symmetry boundary conditions are overwritten. In a 2-D swirl problem, specification of a velocity component VZ does not overwrite generalized symmetry conditions.
Stationary Wall: This is also referred to as a no-slip condition. All the velocity components are set to
zero.
Moving Wall: Specify the velocity component tangent to the wall and set all other velocity components
to zero. As a flag to indicate this is a moving wall, set the turbulent kinetic energy to -1 on a moving
34
Flow Boundary Conditions

wall. This specification is as a flag only; it does not affect the performance of the wall turbulence model.
If you are using the GUI, indicate a moving wall when specifying the velocities.
Unspecified Boundary: In this case, neither the relative pressure nor the velocities are known. The
most common application for this is at downstream boundaries in compressible supersonic flow.
Periodic Boundary: Conditions are unknown but identical at two boundaries. You select the nodes at
one boundary and then issue the macro PERI,DX, DY, DZ, where DX, DY, and DZ are the offsets of the
second boundary from the first. The offsets are input in the established FLOTRAN coordinate system.
The meshes at the two boundaries must be identical.
Intersections: At the intersection of surfaces where two different boundary conditions are applied,
either the boundary conditions are merged or one takes precedence over the other. The following table
provides guidance on what boundary conditions are applied at the intersection.
Table 3.1: Boundary Conditions at Intersections
Intersecting Boundary Intersecting Boundary Action
1
2
Inflow:
Wall:
VX, VY, VZ values specifiedVX, VY, VZ = 0
Overwrite inflow with wall
Inflow:
Symmetry:
VX, VY, VZ values specifiedVX or VY or VZ = 0
Combine inflow with symmetry
Inflow:
Outflow:
VX, VY, VZ values specifiedP = 0
Enforce inflow condition, not outflow
Symmetry:
VX or VY or VZ = 0
Outflow:
P=0
Combine symmetry and outflow
Symmetry:
VX or VY or VZ = 0
Wall:
X, VY, VZ = 0
Overwrite symmetry with the wall
Wall:
VX, VY, VZ = 0
Outflow:
P=0
Combine wall and outflow conditions
Generalized Symmetry
Outflow:
P=0
Combine the generalized symmetry and outflow conditions
Note
Inflow, symmetry , and wall boundary conditions all overwrite generalized symmetry conditions.
Inlet Values: If you activate the turbulence model, boundary conditions are required. The ANSYS program
supplies default values based on the inlet velocity and a scale factor. Given an inlet velocity magnitude
V, the inlet kinetic energy is specified as:
35
inlet
The default value of the factor ININ is 0.01, corresponding to a level of turbulence of 1 percent at the
inlet. The inlet value of the kinetic energy dissipation rate is calculated from:
3
The INSF value is a user-controlled scale factor. To specify the factors ININ and INSF, use either of the
following methods:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,ININ,Value and FLDATA24,TURB,INSF,Value
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence> Turbulence Param
You can set specific values of the turbulent kinetic energy (ENKE) or the dissipation rate (ENDS) using
either the FLDATA24 command or the menu paths in Determining Whether an Analysis Is Turbulent (p. 25).
Occasionally, you may wish to activate the turbulence model for the case, but deactivate it for certain
regions. To deactivate the turbulence model in regions, set the kinetic energy (ENKE) to zero and the
dissipation rate (ENDS) to 1.0. It is never valid to set the dissipation rate to zero, and FLOTRAN prohibits
it. ENDS will be set to 1.0, if ENKE is set to zero.
Wall Roughness:
The FLOTRAN default condition is smooth walls. To specify wall roughness values, you must use the
equilibrium wall turbulence model. You activate it using the FLDATA24,TURB,WALL,EQLB command.
To apply a uniform wall roughness in length units to all walls, you can use the FLDATA24,TURB,KS,Value
command. In addition to being the actual roughness, the KS parameter determines the regime of
roughness (smooth, transitional, or fully rough). The default value of 0.0 implies a smooth wall.
You can also apply an empirical dimensionless factor (CKS) between 0.5 and 1.0 that specifies the degree
of nonuniformity of the surface. The default value of 0.5 means that the roughness signified by KS is
uniformly distributed. Higher values increase the roughness losses without changing the flow regime
implied by the value of KS. You can use the FLDATA24,TURB,CKS,Value command to specify this factor.
The following two methods are available if you have surfaces that require different roughness values.
The first method utilizes real constants for all the wall elements. You apply suitable KS and CKS values
to the near wall elements as real constants. A different real constant set will exist for each set of wall
roughnesses. Note that roughness constants applied to elements that are not near wall will be ignored.
Also, any KS and CKS values specified by the FLDATA24,TURB command will be ignored.
The second method is for cases where most of the surfaces have the same roughness condition and
only a few are different. First, set the values appropriate for most of the surfaces with the FLDATA24,TURB
command. Then use real constants to apply roughnesses to the walls that have different conditions.
The real constants will overwrite the FLDATA24,TURB values. Note that if the same value of CKS is applied
to all the surfaces (as is typical), it can be controlled with the FLDATA24,TURB command and the real
constant can be omitted.
36
Strategies for Difficult Problems
3.4. Strategies for Difficult Problems

The most common problems are divergence or oscillation of the pressure and/or velocity field.
The following strategies have proven helpful in getting difficult turbulent problems to converge.
1. Activate the turbulence option if you have not done so.
Turbulence modeling is activated by either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB,T
2. Use a mapped mesh if a free mesh has given poor results. Resolve the boundary layer so that the
value of Y+ is less than 5000.
To set the Y+ output option, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA5,OUTPUT,YPLU,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Additional Out> RFL Out Derived
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> Additional Out> RFL Out Derived
3. Set the turbulence inertial relaxation factor to 1.0. Values as low as 1.0-2 may help. (For incompressible
flow problems, you may not need to vary this factor.)
To set the turbulence inertial relaxation factor, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA26,STAB,TURB,Value
4. Use pressure and momentum relaxation factors less than 0.5. If values as low as 0.2 do not help,
going lower probably will not help either.
To set the pressure and momentum relaxation factors, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA25,RELX,PRES,Value FLDATA25,RELX,VX (or VY, VZ),Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> DOF Relaxation
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> DOF Relaxation
5. Begin the problem with a higher turbulence ratio (meaning a higher initial effective viscosity). Do
not set values for this parameter, which takes effect only at problem startup, above 1.0 x 107. The
ratio set controls the initial effective viscosity no matter when you activate the turbulence model.
To set the turbulence ratio, use either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,RATI,Value
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence> Turbulence Param
6. After initializing with the correct properties, solve the problem with a higher viscosity and the turbulence model turned off. When the flow field is partially converged, the turbulence model is activated. You may need to reduce the relaxation factor of the effective viscosity to 0.1 or 0.0 for some
global iterations to allow partial convergence of the turbulence equations. Refer to the foregoing
strategies for command information.
37

7. Difficulties can involve large changes in properties due to large fluctuations in pressure or temperature. Preventing property variations early in the analysis (until the large fluctuations calm down)
can stabilize the analysis significantly.
You also can invoke velocity capping to prevent large values of velocities or pressures. This is
particularly useful in compressible analyses, where velocity spikes can cause negative static
temperatures.
To implement velocity capping, use either of the following methods:
Command(s): FLDATA31,CAPP,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Results Capping
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Results Capping
If you use the FLDATA31 command, Label represents a capping parameter such as VELO
(velocity), or TEMP (temperature). Value is either the capping flag (T or F) or the capping
parameter value. Pressure capping applies to relative values of pressure. Temperature capping
applies to absolute values of temperature.
8. Problems involving pyramid, wedge or in particular tetrahedral element shapes may require tighter
convergence of the pressure equation. Values as low as 1.E-18 may be required
(FLDATA21,CONV,PRES,1.E-18). You should reduce the convergence criterion until, from one global
iteration to the next, the number of iterations required to solve the equation varies by less than 10
percent (as per the Jobname.DBG file).
9. The solution of the pressure equation may affect the mass balance. The mass balance may be incorrect
(as per the Jobname.PFL file) if large aspect ratio elements are near significant flow area changes.
Mass imbalances may also occur if inlet or outlet regions are too coarsely meshed or if the flow
tends to exit at an angle at outlets.
10. If FLOTRAN displays a message stating that the coefficient matrix has a negative diagonal and the
solution is probably divergent, try turning on modified inertial relaxation in the momentum equation
or turbulence equation. Set the Value between 0.1 and 1.0. To achieve a faster convergence rate,
use the smallest Value possible.
To set the turbulence inertial relaxation factor, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA34,MIR,Label,Value
11. If you notice anomalous results for 3-D problems, you should increasing the quadrature order to 2.
12. Specifying the Streamline Upwind/Petrov-Galerkin (SUPG) approach for momentum may help convergence. Specifying the SUPG approach for temperature may also yield more accurate energy
solutions and hence more accurate energy balances. For more information on the SUPG approach,
see Advection Discretization Options (p. 161).
3.5. Example of a Laminar and Turbulent FLOTRAN Analysis

Before you begin the laminar/turbulent example, note the following:
The example problem is only one of many possible FLOTRAN analyses. It does not illustrate every
technique you might use in a FLOTRAN analysis, and is intended only to show the kinds of tasks a
FLOTRAN analysis typically requires.
38
Example of a Laminar and Turbulent FLOTRAN Analysis

You can use many techniques in a FLOTRAN analysis that are not shown in this problem. For example,
you can integrate pressure and shear stress on an airfoil to determine the lift and drag forces (see
the description of the INTSRF command in Integrating Surface Results in the Basic Analysis Guide).
The values you enter in this example are specific values for this example only. The characteristics of
the individual problem you are solving dictate what values you should specify for a particular FLOTRAN
analysis.
39
40
Chapter 4: FLOTRAN Thermal Analyses

In a thermal analysis, you solve the temperature equation to determine temperature. Even if the temperature itself is not important, the variation of fluid properties with temperature may be important
enough to warrant a thermal analysis.
In addition to calculating a temperature field, a thermal analysis provides heat fluxes at problem
boundaries and heat transfer coefficients based on an assumed bulk or ambient temperature.
You activate solution of the temperature equation via one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,TEMP,TRUE
FLOTRAN automatically includes viscous heating for compressible flows. For information on activating
viscous heating for incompressible flows, see Forced Convection, Temperature Dependent Properties (p. 45) and the description of the FLDATA1 command in the Command Reference.
The following FLOTRAN thermal analysis topics are available:
4.2. Property Specifications and Control
4.3.Thermal Loads and Boundary Conditions
4.4. Solution Strategies
4.5. Heat Balance
4.6. Surface-to-Surface Radiation Analysis Using the Radiosity Method
4.7. Examples of a Laminar, Thermal, Steady-State FLOTRAN Analysis
4.8. Example of Radiation Analysis Using FLOTRAN (Command Method)

The ANSYS program has no formal criteria for evaluating the finite element mesh. However, thermal
gradients are often extremely high near thermal boundaries, especially heat flux boundaries. Therefore,
the mesh should usually be denser near thermal boundaries.
4.2. Property Specifications and Control

In addition to density and viscosity, thermal flow problems require the specification of thermal conductivity and specific heat. You must determine whether or not fluid properties should vary with temperature.
To set properties for non-fluid regions, use one of these methods:
Command(s): MP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> CFD> Conductivity> Isotropic
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> CFD> Specific Heat
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props
41
FLOTRAN Thermal Analyses
4.3. Thermal Loads and Boundary Conditions

The ANSYS program supports six types of thermal boundary conditions:
1. Constant temperatures
2. Constant heat fluxes
3. Applied heat transfer (film) coefficients with associated ambient temperatures
4. Ambient radiation with associated surface emissivities and ambient temperatures
5. Surface-to-surface radiation with associated emissivities and enclosure number.
6. Adiabatic boundaries (the default condition)
In addition, constant volumetric heat sources may be located in both fluid and non-fluid regions.
The applicable commands are summarized below.
You can apply your boundary conditions via TABLE type array parameters (see Applying Loads Using
TABLE Type Array Parameters in the Basic Analysis Guide). You can also apply your boundary conditions
using function boundary conditions (see Using the Function Tool in the Basic Analysis Guide).
You can define a TABLE type array parameter to apply your boundary conditions in a FLOTRAN analysis.
Attempting to use tabular boundary conditions in a FLOTRAN analysis will create erroneous results.
4.3.1. Applying Loads

The table below lists the loads you can apply in a thermal FLOTRAN analysis.
Table 4.1: Command Family and GUI Path Used to Apply Loads
Load Type
Category
Cmd
Family
Constraints
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>

Temperature
Convection (CONV), Surface

Heat Flux (HFLU),
Loads
Radiation (RAD),
Surface-to-surface
radiation (RDSF)
SF
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads>

Apply> Thermal> Convection
Apply> Thermal> Heat Flux
Apply> Thermal> Ambient Rad
Apply> Thermal> Surface Rad
Heat Generation
Rates (HGEN)
BF
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply>

Fluid/CFD> Heat Generat
Temperature
(TEMP)
Body
Loads
GUI Path
In an analysis, you can apply, remove, operate on, or list loads.
42
Thermal Loads and Boundary Conditions
4.3.1.1. Applying Loads Using Commands

The table below lists all the commands in detail you can use to apply loads in a FLOTRAN thermal
analysis.
Table 4.2: Load Commands for a FLOTRAN Thermal Analysis
Load Type
Solid
Model or
FE
Entity
Apply
Delete
List
Temperature
Finite Element
Nodes
DDELE
DLIST
Convection,
Heat Flux, Ambient Radiation, or
Surface-to- surface Radiation
Solid Model
Lines
SFL
SFLDELE
Solid Model
Areas
SFA
SFADELE SFALIST
Finite Element
Nodes
SF
SFDELE
SFLIST
Finite Element
Elements
SFE
SFEDELE
SFELIST
SFSCALE
Finite Element
Elements
SFE
SFEDELE
SFELIST
SFSCALE
Solid Model
Lines
BFL
BFLDELE BFLLIST
BFTRAN
Solid Model
Areas
BFA
BFADELE BFALIST
BFTRAN
Solid Model
Volumes BFV
BFVDELE BFVLIST
BFTRAN
Finite Element
Nodes
BF
BFDELE
Finite Element
Elements
BFE
BFEDELE BFELIST
Heat Generation
Rates
BFLIST
Operate
Apply
Settings
SFTRAN
SFGRAD
BFSCALE
Note
You must use tabular boundary conditions if you are applying tapered heat flux or convection
loads.
4.3.1.2. Applying Loads Using the GUI

You access all operations except List through a series of cascading menus. From the Solution Menu,
you choose the operation (Apply, Delete, etc.), then the load type (temperature, heat flux, etc.), and
then the object (node, line, or area) to which you are applying the load.
For example, to apply a temperature load to lines, follow this GUI path:
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Thermal> Temperature> On Lines
To list loads, follow this GUI path:
43

Utility Menu> List> Loads> load type
4.3.1.3. Solutions
The following list describes what is known and what is calculated as a function of the type of boundary
specified.
For temperature boundary conditions, heat flux and heat transfer coefficient are calculated.
For heat flux boundary conditions, temperature and heat transfer coefficient are calculated.
For ambient radiation boundary conditions, temperature and heat flux are calculated.
For surface-to-surface radiation boundary conditions, temperature and heat flux are calculated.
For heat transfer boundary conditions, temperature and heat flux are calculated.
For adiabatic boundary conditions, temperature is calculated.
When you apply a heat transfer (film) coefficient, you also specify an associated ambient temperature.
The ANSYS program uses this along with the surface temperature to calculate the heat flux at that
boundary.
You specify heat flux and heat transfer coefficients at external model boundaries. You cannot specify
them at general internal surfaces. You can specify heat flux and heat transfer coefficients at internal
boundary faces (such as fluid/solid interface surfaces), but FLOTRAN will issue a warning because they
are probably incorrect. In a standard FLOTRAN analysis the heat transfer at a fluid/solid boundary is a
desired result, not a boundary condition. If you wish to apply a heat flux or a heat transfer coefficient,
you should apply it at the external solid material boundary, or at the edge of the fluid region without
modeling the solid material in the analysis. If you specify a film coefficient or a heat flux at an internal
fluid/solid interface, FLOTRAN interprets it to be a line/area heat source or sink. You can prescribe
temperatures anywhere.
In cases where you must calculate the heat transfer coefficient at a surface, ANSYS uses the surface
temperature along with the bulk temperature you specify using either of the following methods:
Command(s): FLDATA14,TEMP,BULK,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Ref Conditions
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Ref Conditions
If the analysis is compressible, boundary condition temperatures are in terms of total temperature, and
the temperature equation is formulated and solved in terms of total temperature.
The FLOTRAN ambient radiation load simulates radiation heat transfer to space at a constant temperature.
You specify the constant temperature with the SF command. You specify the Stefan-Boltzmann constant
with the STEF command (defaults to 0.119E-10 Btu/hr/in2/ R4). The form factor is 1.0 by assumption.
Since radiation can pass through a fluid region and impact on a solid, you can apply the ambient radiation
load on a fluid/solid interface, as well as on external model boundaries. In this case, you should apply
the surface load to either the fluid or solid element faces, or the solid model entity defining the interface.
If you apply the load to more than one face, FLOTRAN applies the boundary conditions on only one
face and issues a message that it skipped duplicate boundary conditions.
44
Solution Strategies

The most efficient way to solve thermal-flow problems depends on the degree to which the fluid
properties depend on the temperature.
4.4.1. Constant Fluid Properties

In this case, the flow solution does not depend at all on the temperature field and can be converged
without activating the temperature equation solution.
Once the flow solution is complete, the temperature equation become linear. You can then solve it in
one global iteration after you set the relaxation factor for temperature to 1 using either method shown
below:
Command(s): FLDATA25,RELX,TEMP,1.0
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap/DOF Relaxation
Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap/Prop Relaxation
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap/DOF Relaxation
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap/Prop Relaxation
This is often best accomplished with a semi-direct solution algorithm.
See FLOTRAN CFD Solvers and the Matrix Equation (p. 139) for more information.
The flow equations need not be solved during the solution of the temperature equation. Executing two
global iterations should result in a very small change, if any, in the answer during the second calculation.
This will be reflected in a large decrease in the convergence monitors for temperature in the second
iteration.
4.4.2. Forced Convection, Temperature Dependent Properties

The flow pattern will be a mild function of the temperature field. You can choose to solve the temperature equation every global iteration or converge the flow field calculations before activating solution
of the temperature equation. In the latter case, you will still need to solve the flow and temperature
equations together to refine the flow field with the property variations. If difficulties with the temperature
equation are encountered early in the solution, it is then best to start over and partially converge the
flow solution before allowing the properties to vary with temperature.
For incompressible flows, viscous heating is generally not important for cases with low Prandtl numbers
or low to moderate velocities. However, you should turn on viscous heating whenever the Prandtl
number is greater than 2 or the velocities are high (e.g., greater than 100 m/s in air). FLOTRAN automatically includes viscous heating for compressible flows. To include viscous heating for incompressible
flows, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,IVSH,T
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Solution Options
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Solution Options
For information on the energy units required for thermal quantities when an incompressible analysis
includes viscous heating, refer to Fluid Property Types (p. 117).
4.4.3. Free Convection, Temperature Dependent Properties

In this case, the driving force for the flow is the density change brought about by temperature variations.
You must turn on both options.
45

You also must do the following:
Specify acceleration due to gravity, using one of the following:
Command(s): ACEL
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Gravity
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Gravity
Activate the variable density option using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA13,VARY,Label,TRUE (Label = fluid property)
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid properties
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid properties
Buoyancy property types, which use a constant pressure to evaluate the density from the ideal gas law
are provided for AIR. (See Specifying Fluid Properties for FLOTRAN (p. 117).) Pressure fluctuations are
thus prevented from causing instabilities in density calculations. Natural convection cases converge
slowly, and may be more stable if the TDMA algorithm is used for pressure and temperature. The
number of sweeps used may be set to Number of Nodes/10, but should be at least 100.
4.4.4. Conjugate Heat Transfer

When the thermal properties of the non-fluid material are several orders of magnitude different from
those of the fluid, this is called an ill-conditioned conjugate heat transfer problem. In this situation, the
TDMA method probably will not yield useful results, no matter how many sweeps you specify. You access
the TDMA method using either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA18,METH,TEMP,1
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Controls> Temp Solver CFD
The Conjugate Residual method offers more functionality and requires little more memory than the TriDiagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA) method. To access it, use either of the following:
You can control several parameters, such as convergence criteria and the number of search vectors
used, to enhance performance. (See the discussion of FLDATA18 in the Command Reference for more
information about these parameters.) However, the conjugate residual method, although fairly fast, is
not suited for difficult problems.
A more robust choice for solving ill-conditioned heat transfer problems is the Preconditioned Conjugate
Residual method, which requires much more memory than either the TDMA or Conjugate Residual
methods. The PCR method allows you to control the number of search vectors used, up to a maximum
of 30. To use it, use either of the following:
Note
For nodes connected only to solid nodes, the value stored in the Jobname.RFL file under
the density (DENS) label is the product of the density and specific heat.
You can evaluate performance of the Conjugate Residual and Preconditioned Conjugate Residual
methods by looking at the Jobname.DBG file (described in FLOTRAN CFD Solvers and the Matrix
Equation (p. 139)).
46
Solution Strategies
The most robust, but most memory-intensive, method for solving conjugate heat transfer problems is
the Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual method. You can access it via either of the following:
The Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) solution method is the default choice for
temperature.
Although the same user controls exist for the PGMR method as for the PCCR solver, the default values
are different. For PGMR, the least restrictive convergence criterion allowed is 1.E-10. If you try to use a
less restrictive convergence criterion, FLOTRAN will change it to 1.E-10. A convergence criterion as low
as 1.E-20 may be necessary for some problems. In addition, you should use at least 12 search vectors,
and FLOTRAN ensures this. For the PGMR solver, 12 search vectors is the default and the allowable
range is 12 to 20.
FLOTRAN non-fluid elements support both temperature dependence and orthotropic variation. That is,
KXX, KYY, and KZZ can assume different values and temperature variations. FLOTRAN considers conductivity as an element quantity, evaluated at the quadrature points in the element. However, in fluid elements, FLOTRAN considers thermal conductivity to be a nodal quantity.
To specify the variable and orthotropic conductivities, you use the following commands or GUI paths:
Command(s): MP or MPDATA
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> CFD> Conductivity> Orthotropic
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Load Step Opts> Other> Change Mat Props
Note
Thermal analysis problems having variable thermal conductivity are nonlinear and require
multiple iterations to solve. Variable solid thermal conductivities are not relaxed.
For a conjugate heat transfer problem, it is wise to obtain an initial temperature solution before solving
the coupled energy/momentum equations. To achieve the temperature solution, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,FLOW,F
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,TEMP,T
Command(s): FLDATA25,RELX,TEMP,1.0
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> DOF Relaxation
Command(s): FLDATA2,ITER,EXEC,1
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Contr> TEMP Solver CFD
In the above steps, an initial temperature solution is obtained from a solution of the heat conduction
equation.
FLOTRAN can calculate film coefficients at walls in conjugate heat transfer problems. Two algorithms
are available for this purpose: the conductivity matrix algorithm and the temperature field algorithm.
The conductivity matrix algorithm uses the thermal conductivity matrix to calculate heat fluxes and film
coefficients. It is the default. Generally, it produces satisfactory results for well shaped elements. However,
if the elements are not well shaped, it can produce non-smooth results. You should then switch to the
47

temperature field algorithm. It calculates film coefficients directly from thermal gradients. To set the
algorithm, use the following:
Command(s): FLDATA37,ALGR,HFLM,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Algorithm Ctr
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Algorithm Ctr
4.5. Heat Balance

Using information in the Jobname.PFL file, you can calculate a heat balance for your problem. For
any flow problem with the thermal option activated, the energy flow into and out of the problem domain
at the inlets/outlets is calculated and tabulated. Also calculated for the flow boundaries is the heat
conduction across the boundary faces. The difference between the energy flow into the system and
out of the system at the flow boundaries should equal the total energy added through sources and
sinks.
The accuracy of the energy balance depends on the approach used to discretize the advection term in
the energy equation. In general, the Streamline Upwind/Petrov-Galerkin (SUPG) approach provides a
more accurate energy balance than the Monotone Streamline Upwind (MSU) approach. If you desire
an exact energy balance, use the Collocated Galerkin (COLG) approach. For steady-state incompressible
flows, it provides an exact energy balance, even with a coarse mesh. However, SUPG or COLG may
suffer from oscillatory thermal solution near walls with a coarse mesh. Use the FLDATA40,WADV command to minimize such spatial oscillation.
Energy flowing into or out of the system at mass flow boundaries is equal to the product of the mass
flow, the specific heat, and the temperature. A temperature offset specified by the TOFFST command
does not enter this calculation. Positive numbers mean heat flows into the system.
Energy sources include volumetric heat sources in either fluids or solids. Specified wall temperatures
and specified film coefficient boundaries are either sources or sinks, depending on the temperature
gradient. Heat fluxes are sources or sinks depending on the sign.
Heat transfer to/from wall faces refers to boundaries of fluid regions which are not inlets or outlets.
Heat transfer at wall faces refers to fluid boundaries, regardless of whether or not the boundary is a
no-fluid element or simply a no-slip condition. Positive numbers mean heat flows into the fluid.
Volumetric heat generation can be applied to solid regions or fluid regions. Be careful, when calculating
the energy balance to avoid accounting for heat generation in solids twice.
For example, suppose a conjugate heat transfer problem featured a volumetric heat source in a solid
region which is cooled by a fluid flow. The difference between the energy flow in and out should equal
heat transfer to wall faces. This number should also match the volumetric heat generation in the solid.
For all cases, the difference between the energy flowing into the system at flow boundaries and flowing
out at the boundaries should equal heat transfer to wall faces plus fluid volumetric heat sources plus
the heat conduction effects normal to the flow direction at the flow boundaries.
Essentially, FLOTRAN performs a heat balance on the fluid region only. Heat fluxes and film coefficients
are solution outputs for the external fluid boundaries only. Heat fluxes applied on external boundaries
are not part of the solution output.
The effects of viscous dissipation on a heat balance are not explicitly tabulated. The associated heat
generation is manifested in terms of an increased temperature, which in turn affects the energy departure
at the outlet and the heat transfer at wall faces if applicable. With adiabatic walls, for example, the
48
Examples of a Laminar, Thermal, Steady-State FLOTRAN Analysis

temperature of the fluid will increase from viscous dissipation, even though no heat sources will be
apparent.
4.6. Surface-to-Surface Radiation Analysis Using the Radiosity Method

Surface-to-surface radiation analysis in FLOTRAN can be used for solving generalized radiation problems
involving two or more radiating surfaces in single or multiple open or closed enclosures. The method
is supported for both 3-D and 2-D FLOTRAN elements FLUID141 and FLUID142. The thermal solution
option has to be on for radiation analysis. You can switch radiation analysis off using the FLDATA1,
SOLU, RDSF command. The command defaults to on.
Surface-to-surface radiation analysis in 2-D is supported for planar and axisymmetric geometry about
YR and XR coordinate systems. Radiation analysis is not supported for 3-D/2-D compressible flow thermal
analysis and for R- and R--Z coordinate system in 2-D and 3-D analysis respectively.
Elements supported for the radiosity method include:
FLOTRAN
FLUID141
FLUID142
4.6.1. Procedure
The Radiosity Solution method consists of four steps:
1. Define the radiating surfaces.
2. Define Solution options.
3. Define View Factor options.
4. Calculate and query view factors.
See Using the Radiosity Solver Method in the Thermal Analysis Guide for a detailed explanation of these
steps.
4.6.2. Heat Balances

Jobname.PFL file provides information of the net positive and negative radiation heat transfer from
both solid and fluid surfaces.
See Example of Radiation Analysis Using FLOTRAN (Command Method) (p. 59)
4.7. Examples of a Laminar, Thermal, Steady-State FLOTRAN Analysis

This chapter describes a laminar, thermal, steady-state fluid flow problem and two ways to solve it: by
choosing items on the ANSYS GUI menus or by issuing a series of ANSYS commands.
Before you begin reading about the example, note the following:
The example problem described is only one of many possible FLOTRAN analyses. It does not illustrate
every technique you might use in a FLOTRAN analysis, and is intended only to show the kinds of
tasks a FLOTRAN analysis typically requires.
49

The values you enter in this example via commands or dialog boxes are specific values for this example
only. The characteristics of the individual problem you are solving dictate what values you should
specify for a particular FLOTRAN analysis.
4.7.1. The Example Described

This example evaluates buoyancy-driven flow in a square cavity with differentially heated vertical sides.
It is a laminar steady-state analysis that uses the FLUID141 2-D element. The physics modeled in this
problem govern a number of practical problems, including solar energy collection, the ventilation of
rooms, and so on.
Figure 4.1: Diagram of the Square Cavity
Insulated
T = 320K
g = 9.81 m/s
T = 280K
Insulated
L = .03m
Density variations resulting from the temperature difference across the cavity drive the laminar flow.
The Rayleigh number for this flow is 1.01E+05, and is defined as follows:
Ra = g TL3 2Cp/k
The symbols in this equation are:
g = gravitational acceleration
= 1/T
T = THOT - TCOLD
L = cavity length
= density
Cp = specific heat
k = thermal conductivity
= viscosity
Other example analysis conditions are:
Cavity: dimensions 0.03m x 0.03m; gravitational acceleration 9.81 m/s2
50

Operating conditions: nominal temperature 193K; reference pressure 1.0135E+05 Pa
Fluid: Air in SI units
Loads: no slip walls (Vx = Vy = 0); left wall of cavity maintained at THOT = 320K; right wall of cavity
maintained at TCOLD = 280K
4.7.2. Doing the Buoyancy Driven Flow Analysis (GUI Method)

To do the example buoyancy-driven flow analysis using the menus, perform the steps discussed in the
next few sections.
Step 1: Establish an Analysis Title and Preferences

When you have entered the ANSYS program, do these tasks:
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> File> Change Title. The Change Title dialog box appears.
2. Enter the text "Buoyancy driven flow in a square cavity."
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preferences. The Preferences for GUI Filtering dialog box appears.
5. Click the button for FLOTRAN CFD to "On."
6. Click on OK. You have just instructed the ANSYS program to do a FLOTRAN analysis.
Step 2: Define Element Types

Next, you need to specify which elements your analysis will use. The example uses only one element,
FLUID141. To define it:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The Element
Types dialog box appears.
2. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
3. In the two scrollable lists, highlight (click on) FLOTRAN CFD and "2D FLOTRAN 141."
4. Click on OK. ANSYS returns you to the Element Types dialog box.
5. Click on Close.
Step 3: Create Areas

Next, create the areas you need. Our example requires an area representing the square cavity. To create
it, perform these tasks:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Rectangle> By Dimensions. The Create Rectangle by Dimensions dialog box appears.
2. Enter the X coordinates from 0.0 to 0.03.
3. Enter the Y coordinates from 0.0 to 0.03.
51

4. Click on OK. The square area you have just created will appear in the Graphics Window.
Step 4: Define Lines, Mesh, and Plot Elements

This step meshes the square cavity area so that you can apply temperature loads to it. Follow these
steps:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> MeshTool. Under the Size Controls
section of the MeshTool, click Lines,Set. The Element Size on Picked Lines picking menu appears.
2. Click Pick All. The Element Size on Picked Lines dialog box appears.
3. Set the number of element divisions to 25.
4. Click on OK.
5. In the MeshTool, select Areas from the Mesh drop down menu. Then click Quad and Free. Then click
MESH. The Mesh Areas picking menu appears.
6. Click on Pick All to generate the mesh.
7. Click on Close on the MeshTool.
8. Click SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
Step 5: Apply Velocity Boundary Conditions

In this step and Step 6, you apply boundary conditions to your model, starting with the exterior nodes.
Do the following:
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears.
2. Select Nodes and Exterior.
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Velocity> On Nodes. The Apply V on Nodes picking menu appears.
5. On the picking menu, click on Pick All. The Velocity Constraints on Nodes dialog box appears.
6. Set the VX velocity component and VY velocity component fields to 0.
7. Click on OK.
Step 6: Apply Thermal Boundary Conditions

Now you need to apply temperature loads on the left and right edges of the model. To do so:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Thermal> Temperature> On Nodes. The Apply TEMP on Nodes picking menu appears.
2. Click on Box. Doing this enables you to select the nodes to which you are applying loads by drawing
a box around them.
52

3. Press and drag your left mouse button to draw a box around the nodes on the left edge of the
meshed area.
4. Click on OK.
5. In the Apply TEMP on Nodes dialog box, enter 320 as the temperature value.
6. Click on OK.
7. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Thermal> Temperature> On Nodes. The Apply TEMP on Nodes picking menu appears.
8. On the menu, click on Box. Doing this enables you to select the nodes to which you are applying
loads by drawing a box around them.
9. Press and drag your left mouse button to draw a box around the nodes on the right edge of the
meshed area.
10. Click on OK.
11. In the Apply TEMP on Nodes dialog box, enter 280 as the temperature value.
12. Click on OK.
13. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Select> Everything. This step is important; it ensures that ANSYS
includes all nodes and elements in the analysis.
14. Click on the SAVE_DB button on the Toolbar.
Step 7: Set FLOTRAN Solution Options and Execution Controls

In this step and the next few steps, you set up conditions for the FLOTRAN analysis. You first specify
what type of FLOTRAN analysis you are doing and what values will control FLOTRAN execution.
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Solution Options. The FLOTRAN
Solution Options dialog box appears.
2. Set the "Adiabatic or thermal?" field to Thermal.
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Execution Ctrl. The Steady
State Control Settings dialog box appears.
5. Set the Global Iterations (EXEC) field to 200.
6. Set the .RFL File Overwrite Freq field to 50.
7. Set the Output summary frequency (SUMF) field to 50.
8. Click on OK.
Step 8: Set Fluid Properties

To set the fluid properties for the example analysis, do the following:
53

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid Properties. The Fluid
Properties dialog box appears.
2. Set the "Density," "Viscosity," "Conductivity," and "Specific heat" fields to AIR-SI.
3. Set the "Allow density variations?" field to Yes.
4. Click on Apply. The CFD Flow Properties dialog box appears.
5. Read the information about how coefficients will be calculated, then click on OK.
Step 9: Set FLOTRAN Flow Environment Parameters

To set the flow environment parameters, follow these steps:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Gravity.
The Gravity Specification dialog box appears.
2. Set the "Accel in Y direction" field to 9.81.
3. Click on OK.
Step 10: Solve the Problem

Set controls for the FLOTRAN solver before you initiate the solution process. Follow these steps:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Contr> PRES
Solver CFD. The PRES Solver CFD dialog box appears.
2. Choose TDMA.
3. Click on OK. The TDMA Pressure dialog box appears.
4. Make sure that the value of the "No. of TDMA sweeps for pressure" field is 100. If so, click on OK.
5. Click on the SAVE_DB button in the Toolbar.
6. Choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN.
7. Wait for the solution to finish, then review the information in the ANSYS Output Window. Click Close
in the Solution is done window.
Step 11: Read In Results and Plot the Temperature Solution

Perform these steps:
1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General PostProc> Read Results> Last Set.
2. Choose menu path Main Menu> General PostProc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The
Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
3. In the "Item to be Contoured" list, click on (highlight) DOF Solution.
4. In the scrollable list, scroll down and choose TEMP.
5. Click on OK. The Graphics Window shows you the following contour plot:
54

Figure 4.2: Plot of the Temperature Solution
Step 12: Plot Streamline Contours

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General PostProc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Nodal Solu. The
Contour Nodal Solution Data dialog box appears.
2. Click on (highlight) "Other quantities."
3. In the scrollable list, select "Strm func2D STRM" (stream function).
4. Click on OK. The Graphics Window shows you the following contour plot:
Figure 4.3: Plot of Streamline Contours
55
Step 13: Plot Velocity Vectors

For better viewing of the analysis results for the example, switch to vector plotting as described below:
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Device Options. The Device Options dialog box appears.
2. Set Vector mode (wireframe) to "On."
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose menu path Main Menu> General PostProc> Plot Result> Vector Plot> Predefined. The
Vector Plot of Predefined Vectors dialog box appears.
5. Verify that the items "DOF solution" and "Velocity" are highlighted. If so, click on OK. The display in
the Graphics Window now looks similar to the one below.
Figure 4.4: Plot of Velocity Vectors
Step 14: Plot Particle Traces Contoured by Temperature

In the example analysis, the dimensions of the problem are small (.03 x .03). Therefore, before plotting
particle trace points, you should change the working plane to give a better view from which to choose
those points.
1. Choose menu path Utility Menu> WorkPlane> WP Settings. The WP Settings dialog box appears.
2. Set Snap Increment to 0.0005.
3. Set Spacing to 0.0001.
4. Set Tolerance to 0.00005.
5. Click on OK.
56

6. Choose menu path Utility Menu> Plot> Elements.
7. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Flow Trace> Defi Trace Pt.
8. Using your mouse, pick five or six points anywhere within the upper half of the problem domain.
9. Click on OK in the picking menu.
10. Choose menu path Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Flow Trace> Plot Flow Trace.
The Plot Flow Trace dialog box appears.
11. In the scrollable list, click on (highlight) "Temperature TEMP".
12. Click on OK. The Graphics Window shows a plot that resembles the plot shown below. Your plot
may look different, depending on the location of the points you picked. If a warning message appears
telling you that the maximum number of loops has been exceeded, review it and click Close. For the
purposes of this problem, the particle trace is stuck in a loop by definition, so you can ignore this message.
Figure 4.5: Plot of Flow Trace
Step 15: Plot Particle Traces Contoured by Velocity Magnitude

1. Choose menu path Main Menu> General PostProc> Plot Results> Flow Trace> Plot Flow Trace. The
Plot Flow Trace dialog box appears.
2. In the scrollable list, choose "VSUM."
3. Click on OK. The plot shown in the Graphics Window is now contoured by velocity magnitude. How your
plot looks will depend on the location of the points you picked. If you receive another warning message
about the maximum number of loops being exceeded, click Close.
4. If you wish, you can use animation to enhance your analysis of particle flow. Choose menu path Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Particle Flow. When the Animate Flow Trace dialog box appears, enter
57

the desired animation data and click OK. (To animate particle flow, you must have at least one trace
point defined. To complete the sample analysis, simply take the defaults and click on OK.)
5. When you are done viewing the animation, click Stop and then Close in the Animation Controller. If additional warning messages appear, close them.
6. To exit ANSYS, click Quit on the ANSYS Toolbar. Choose an exit option and then click on OK.
See Section 5.10, Doing the Sample Analysis (Command Method), for an example problem.
4.7.3. Doing the Buoyancy Driven Flow Analysis (Command Method)

To do the example buoyancy-driven flow analysis, you issue these ANSYS commands:
/TITLE,Buoyancy driven flow in a square cavity
/PREP7
ET,1,FLUID141
! Set 2-D fluid element type
RECTNG,,0.03,,0.03
! Create square area
LPLOT
LESIZE,ALL, , ,25,1,0
! Define line divisions and mesh area
AMESH,1
EPLOT
NSEL,S,EXT
! Apply velocity b.c. on exterior nodes
D,ALL,,,,,,VX,VY
NSEL,S,NODE,,1
! Apply thermal b.c. on left edge
NSEL,A,NODE,,52
NSEL,A,NODE,,77,100
D,ALL,TEMP,320
NSEL,S,NODE,,2
! Apply thermal b.c. on right edge
NSEL,A,NODE,,27,51
D,ALL,TEMP,280
NSEL,ALL
ESEL,ALL
FLDATA1,SOLU,TEMP,1
! Set solution option to thermal
FLDATA2,ITER,EXEC,200
! Set FLOTRAN execution controls
FLDATA2,ITER,OVER,50
FLDATA5,OUTP,SUMF,50
!*
FLDATA13,VARY,DENS,1
! Set fluid properties
FLDATA7,PROT,DENS,AIR-SI
FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,AIR-SI
FLDATA7,PROT,COND,AIR-SI
FLDATA8,NOMI,COND,-1
FLDATA7,PROT,SPHT,AIR-SI
!*
ACEL,0,9.81,0
! Set flow environment gravity
FLDATA18,METH,PRES,1
! Set FLOTRAN solver controls
FLDATA19,TDMA,PRES,100
FINISH
/SOLU
SOLVE
! Solve model
FINISH
/POST1
SET,LAST
PLNSOL,TEMP
! Plot temperature solution
PLNSOL,STRM
! Plot streamline contours
/DEVICE,VECTOR,1
!*
PLVECT,V, , , ,VECT,ELEM
! Plot velocity vectors
wpstyle,0.0005,0.0001,-1,1,0.00005,0,2,,5
EPLOT
TRPOIN,P
! The P argument enables graphical picking
! of trace points via the GUI
PLTRAC,FLUID,TEMP
! Plot particle traces contoured by
PLTRAC,FLUID,V,SUM
! temperature and velocity magnitude
FINISH
58
Example of Radiation Analysis Using FLOTRAN (Command Method)
4.8. Example of Radiation Analysis Using FLOTRAN (Command Method)

The following is an example of a laminar, thermal, steady-state FLOTRAN analysis with surface-to-surface
radiation using the radiosity solution method (command method). In this example a buoyancy-driven
flow in a square cavity with differentially heated vertical walls is considered. All walls of the cavity are
radiating surfaces with an emissivity of 0.9. The final temperature distribution in the cavity effected by
the presence of the radiating walls in the fluid domain.
To do the surface-to-surface radiation problem, you issue these ANSYS commands:
/prep7
et, 1, 141
! 2-D Fluid element
rectng, , .027744, , .027744 ! Create square cavity
esize, , 20
! Set number of elements
amesh, all
! Mesh area
nsel, s, ext
! Select external nodes
d, all,,,,,,vx,vy
! Set all external wall velocities to zero
allsel
lsel, s, loc, x, 0.0
nsll, s, 1
d, all, temp, 500
! Set wall temperature at x = 0.0 to 500 K
lsel, s, loc, x, .027744
nsll, s, 1
d, all, temp, 200
! Set wall temperature at x = 0.027744 to 200 K
nsel, all
esel, all
fldata1, solu, temp, 1
! Set solution option to thermal
fldata2, iter, exec, 200
! Set FLOTRAN execution control
fldata2, iter, over, 50
fldata5, outp, sumf, 50
!
fldata13, vary, dens, 1
! Set fluid properties
fldata7, prot, dens, air-si
fldata7, prot, visc, air-si
fldata7, prot, cond, air-si
fldata8, nomi, cond, -1
fldata7, prot, spht, air-si
!
acel, 0, 9.81, 0
! Set flow environment gravity
fldata18, meth, pres, 1
fldata19, tdma, pres, 100
fldata18, meth, temp, 6
stef,5.67e-8
! Set Stefan-Boltzmann constant
toff,0
! Set temperature offset to zero
radopt,.5,0.0001
! Set radiosity solver options
finish
/solu
allsel
nsel,s,ext
! Select all external nodes
sf, all, rdsf, 0.9, -1
! Apply radiation on external faces facing inwards
allsel
solve
! Solve
finish
/post1
set last
plnsol, temp
! Plot temperature solution
plnsol, strm
! Plot streamline contours
59
60
Chapter 5: FLOTRAN Transient Analyses

You activate the transient algorithm by setting the solution option, using one of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,TRAN,TRUE
You must make decisions regarding the time step, the method of converging the analysis during a time
step, the length of execution of the job and the frequency of output.
What you specify via one of the following methods determines the transient execution and output:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME and FLDATA4A,STEP
The final section of this chapter explains how to apply transient boundary conditions for FLOTRAN.
The following FLOTRAN transient analysis topics are available:
5.1.Time Integration Method
5.2.Time Step Specification and Convergence
5.3.Terminating and Getting Output from a Transient Analysis
5.4. Applying Transient Boundary Conditions
5.1. Time Integration Method

There are two methods available for the time integration: Backward (the default) and Newmark. The
Newmark method is more accurate than the Backward method. To specify the Newmark method, use
one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,METH,NEWM
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Transient Contrl> Time Integration Meth
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Transient Contrl> Time Integration Meth
When using the Newmark method, you can introduce numerical damping to stabilize the solution.
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,DELT,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Transient Contrl> Time Integration Meth
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Transient Contrl> Time Integration Meth
The Newmark parameter must be 0.5. It defaults to 0.5. The recommended range is 0.5 to 0.6. Higher
values are more stable because there is more damping. Lower values result in more accurate results
with 0.5 corresponding to second order accuracy. For more information on the Newmark method, see
Transient Analysis in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
There are two mass types that you can set for the transient analysis: lumped (the default) and consistent.
The consistent type is more dissipative than the lumped type. To specify the consistent type, use one
of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA38,MASS,Label,CONS MSMASS,SPNUM,CONS
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Transient Contrl> Mass Type
61
FLOTRAN Transient Analyses

Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Transient Contrl> Mass Type
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Multiple Species
5.2. Time Step Specification and Convergence

Because the algorithm is implicit in nature, no stability restrictions exist on the time step size. You
specify a time step or elect to have FLOTRAN calculate a time step. To do so, use either of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA4A,TIME,STEP,Value
The graphical user interface will require you to set the time step if you choose the User Defined option.
The table below shows the values you can specify. A brief description of the FLOTRAN calculation follows
the table.
Table 5.1: Specifying Values for Time Steps
Value to Specify
Any value > 0
Meaning
User Specified Time Step
-1
Advection Limit
-2
Pressure Wave Limit
-3
Smaller of Pressure wave and Advection
-4
Conduction Limit
The advection limit prevents a particle of fluid from passing completely through a finite element during
a time step.
The pressure wave limit means the time step is chosen small enough to prevent a pressure wave from
passing all the way through a finite element during a single time step. This option is active only if you
choose the compressible solution algorithm.
The choice of -3 (again valid only for compressible analyses) means that the more restrictive (that is,
smaller) time step criterion will be imposed.
The conduction limit is calculated to prevent the conductive diffusion of a parcel of energy completely
through an element during a time step. The limit applies only to problems that include conduction,
and is valid for problems with both fluid and non-fluid elements.
FLOTRAN must execute global iterations to converge within a time step. The time step terminates when
either of the following happens:
The convergence criteria are met.
The maximum number of global iterations allowed per time step executes.
You set the maximum number of global iterations per time step using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA4A,TIME,GLOB,Value
62
Terminating and Getting Output from a Transient Analysis

The convergence criteria are values below which the convergence monitors for each active degree of
freedom must drop to cause the time step to terminate. You specify these values using the following
commands or menu paths:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,Label,Value
As soon as all the convergence criteria are met, the time step terminates. The time step terminates on
the number of global iterations allowed if the convergence monitor criteria are not met.
If the problem is adiabatic, only the pressure equation monitor is checked. Both the pressure and temperature equation monitors must be reduced below the convergence criteria values if the temperature
equation also is solved.
As soon as the convergence monitor criteria are met, the time step terminates. The time step terminates
on the number of global iterations allowed if the convergence monitor criteria are not met.
5.3. Terminating and Getting Output from a Transient Analysis

You can either specify an end time for a transient FLOTRAN analysis or have it end after a specified
number of time steps. To specify an end time, use either method shown below.
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,TEND,Value
To specify a number of time steps, either use one of the menu paths listed above or issue the following
command:
Command(s):
FLDATA4,TIME,NUMB,Value
The event that occurs first (end time or reaching the time step threshold) terminates the analysis.
You determine how often ANSYS saves the analysis results for processing and how often it writes information to the Jobname.PFL file. You do this by choosing from the following commands or menu
paths:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,Label,Value and FLDATA4A,STEP,Label,Value
The table below shows you how the values you specify affect analysis output:
Table 5.2: Saving Analysis Results for Processing
Name, Label, Value
Meaning of Value
STEP,APPE,n
Output results to Jobname.RFL every n time steps
TIME,APPE,x
Output results to Jobname.RFL every x seconds
STEP,SUMF,n
Add output summary to Jobname.PFL every n time steps
TIME,SUMF,x
Add output summary to Jobname.PFL every x seconds
STEP,OVER,n
Overwrite the temporary results set every n time steps
TIME,OVER,x
Overwrite the temporary results set every x seconds
63
FLOTRAN Transient Analyses

If you wish to control the output based on time, you must first defeat the default controls which set
APPE and SUMF to ten steps.
5.4. Applying Transient Boundary Conditions

When any boundary conditions are changed, FLOTRAN assumes either a step change (default) or a ramp
change. The ramp is chosen by setting the BC label in the TIME item to 1 via one in the following:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,BC,1
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Execution Control
The ramp will occur for the next execution over the period of time for execution specified by the user.
This is the difference between the current time (i.e., the beginning in the execution) and the end time
as specified by the following:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,TEND,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Execution Control
The ramp is between the "old" boundary conditions and the "new" boundary conditions. A boundary
condition is considered old as soon as FLOTRAN has gone through the calculational loop. This means
that to use a ramped condition at the beginning of an analysis, a zero iteration execution (which may
be accomplished with the FLOCHECK command) should be done with the initial condition (applied as
a boundary condition) and then the boundary condition value(s) are changed to those at the end in
the ramp.
Note that the ramp is calculated with the value of TEND as specified above, NOT the actual ending time
in the case. For this reason, it is recommended that the user terminate the case with the TIME controls
rather than the STEP controls. Ensure that the case will not terminate prematurely due to an insufficient
number of time steps. If the case terminates before the time specified by TEND, upon restart the
boundary conditions will be immediately changed from where they were when the run terminated to
what the current boundary condition setting is. If you use the STEP controls in the GUI to set the
number of time steps, you need to set TEND in that same dialog box. Otherwise, TEND defaults to 1.0
x 106 and the ramp is almost nonexistent.
Transient boundary conditions on velocity DOF (VX, VY, and VZ) must not be ramped from zero to a
nonzero value. A very small velocity must be used instead of zero so that FLOTRAN recognizes the face
as an inlet or outlet rather than a wall.
At any time, you can change the applied boundary conditions to the "old" state with one of the following:
Command(s): FLOCHECK,2
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> Flocheck
FLOCHECK,2 has no effect on the Jobname.RFL file.
Caution
FLOTRAN has no record of boundary conditions at earlier times. That is, if you want to restart
from an earlier point in time and simulate a ramped boundary condition it is necessary to
apply the boundary condition appropriate for the beginning of the ramp, make it an old
condition via the FLOCHECK command, and then apply the condition at the end of the
ramp.
64
Chapter 6: Volume of Fluid (VOF) Analyses

In a Volume of Fluid (VOF) analysis, FLOTRAN uses an advection algorithm for the volume fraction (VFRC)
to track the evolution of the free surface. The VFRC value for each element varies from zero to one,
where zero denotes an empty or void element and one denotes a full or fluid element. The values
between zero and one indicate that the corresponding elements are the partially full or surface elements
(henceforth called partial elements), and the free surface can thus be determined by the distribution
of the VFRC field.
For the dynamic behavior at the interface between a gas and liquid, FLOTRAN uses a continuum surface
force (CSF) method to model the surface tension. Surface tension is an inherent characteristic of material interfaces. It is a localized surface force acting on the interface. FLOTRAN reformulates this surface
force into an equivalent volumetric force in the momentum equation. This force consists of two components: a normal component to the interface due to local curvature and a tangential component to
the interface due to local variations of the surface tension coefficient.
Currently, VOF capability is available only for quadrilateral elements for two dimensional planar or
axisymmetric analyses. For a VOF analysis, boundary conditions are required for boundary nodes that
belong to at least one non-empty (partial or full) element.
To activate a VOF analysis in FLOTRAN and model the surface tension effect, use the following commands
or GUI menu paths:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,VOF,Value FLDATA1,SOLU,SFTS,Value
In FLOTRAN, the VOF algorithm first computes the motion of the polygon of fluid in a Lagrangian sense
and then utilizes the computational geometry of the intersection of two polygons to determine the
VFRC fluxes. This method is referred to as the Computational Lagrangian-Eulerian Advection Remap
(CLEAR) method. See CLEAR-VOF Advection in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for information on
the theoretical background. This CLEAR-VOF method tracks the free surface explicitly in time, and it is
therefore necessary to activate the transient solution option for a VOF analysis. Refer to FLOTRAN
Transient Analyses (p. 61) for information on the selection of the transient parameters, such as the time
step, converging method, execution length and the output frequency. For accuracy, you should use
the Streamline Upwind Petrov-Galerkin (SUPG) approach described in Advection Discretization Options (p. 161). If you encounter a convergence difficulty, the time increment may be reduced, and the
modified inertial relaxation (MIR) scheme may also be activated for robustness.
Caution
You should avoid using quadrilateral elements with only one node on the inflow or outflow
boundary.
The following VOF topics are available:
6.1. VFRC Loads
6.2. Input Settings
6.3. Postprocessing
65
Volume of Fluid (VOF) Analyses

6.4. VOF Analysis of a Dam
6.5. VOF Analysis of Open Channel with an Obstruction
6.6. VOF Analysis of an Oscillating Droplet
6.1. VFRC Loads

When performing a VOF analysis, you need to apply both initial and boundary VFRC loads. In most
cases, default values are appropriate.
6.1.1. Initial VFRC Loads

You impose initial conditions for the velocity and other degrees of freedom in the usual manner. For
the initial VFRC field, you can define each element as initially full, partially full or empty. Take care when
initially setting partial elements. Each partial element must be adjacent to at least one full element and
one empty element. During the analysis, if a partial element does not have any full elements as neighbors,
it will be reset to empty. You should also include at least one layer of empty elements above the free
surface to allow the surface to evolve in time.
To set the initial volume fraction field, use one of the following:
Command(s): ICE,ELEM,VFRC,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Fract> Init
Loads> On Elements
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Fract> Init Loads> On Elements
By default, the volume fraction is zero. Therefore, if there is fluid initially inside the problem domain,
you must set the VFRC field accordingly.
To set the initial volume fraction for a given geometry, use one of the following:
Command(s): ICVFRC,GEOM,VAL1,VAL2,VAL3,VAL4
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Volume Fract> Init Loads> By
Geom
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Frac> Init Loads> By Geom
ICVFRC automatically calculates the volume fraction value for all selected elements that are either inside
the given geometry or intersect with it. The volume fraction is:
One for elements completely within the geometry
A fraction equal to the element area within the geometry for elements intersected by the boundary
of the geometry
Currently, there are two valid geometries: circle (CIRC) and ellipse (ELPT). For a circle or ellipse, VAL1
and VAL2 are the x and y coordinates of the center, respectively. For a circle, VAL3 is the radius and
VAL4 is not used. For an ellipse, VAL3 and VAL4 are the x and y semiaxes, respectively.
To display the initial volume fraction loads, use the following:
Command(s): /PICE,VFRC,,KEY
GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Symbols
The /PBF and /PSF commands override the /PICE command.
6.1.2. Boundary VFRC Loads

You impose boundary conditions for the velocity and other degrees of freedom in the usual manner.
Although boundary conditions outside the fluid region have no physical meaning initially, these condi-
66
Input Settings
tions will become active if the fluid touches these boundaries. Accordingly, you should apply all appropriate boundary conditions on all boundaries potentially touched by the fluid. FLOTRAN treats unspecified
boundaries with natural conditions.
Boundary conditions for VFRC loads consist of the boundary VFRC value and the wetting status. FLOTRAN
only allows zero (empty) and one (full) values for the boundary VFRC values. By default, boundary VFRC
values are set to one (full). FLOTRAN uses the boundary VFRC values to determine the normal surface
direction in the VOF reconstruction stage, when the boundary is adjacent to the surface elements. The
wetting status specifies whether the fluid can be advected into the problem domain. A zero value indicates a non-wetting boundary, whereas a unity value indicates a wetting boundary. By default, wetting
status is set to zero (non-wetting boundary). On a wetting boundary, fluid advection into the problem
domain takes place. The corresponding boundary VFRC value must be set to unity to be meaningful.
On a non-wetting boundary, advection of the fluid or void elements into the problem domain does not
take place. The boundary VFRC value only acts passively to help determine the normal surface direction.
To set boundary VFRC loads, use one of the following:
Command(s): SFL,LINE,VFRC,VALI,VALJ,VAL2I,VAL2J SFE,ELEM,LKEY,VFRC,KVAL,VAL1,VAL2,VAL3,VAL4
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Fract> Bound Loads>
On Lines
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Fract> Bound Loads> On
Elements
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Fract> Bound Loads> On Lines
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Volume Fract> Bound Loads> On Elements
For the SFL command, VALI specifies the boundary VFRC value and (defaults to 1) VAL2I specifies
the wetting status (defaults to non-wetting). If Lab = VFRC, a VAL2I setting of 1 indicates a wetted
boundary. For the SFE command, VAL1 specifies the boundary VFRC value (defaults to 1) when KVAL
= 0 or 1, and VAL1 specifies the boundary wetting status (defaults to non-wetting) when KVAL = 2. If
Lab = VFRC and KVAL = 2, a VAL1 setting of 1 indicates a wetted boundary. At a wetted boundary,
the fluid upstream keeps the associated elements full.
6.2. Input Settings

When performing a VOF analysis, you may set the environmental conditions regarding the ambient
conditions, the VFRC tolerances, and the time stepping strategy.
When studying surface tension effects, you need set the proper values for the surface tension coefficient
and the wall static contact angle. Refer to Specifying Fluid Properties for FLOTRAN (p. 117) for information
on these property types.
6.2.1. Ambient Conditions

Set the ambient nodal values outside the fluid region for the following variables:
VX - U velocity
VY - V velocity
VZ - W velocity
TEMP - Temperature
ENKE - Turbulent Kinetic Energy
ENDS - Turbulent Dissipation Rate
using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA36,AMBV, Label,Value
67

GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> VOF Environment> Ambient Condit'n
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> VOF Environment> Ambient Condit'n
When a boundary node with Dirichlet Condition lies outside the fluid region, the assigned ambient
values on this node are ignored. The prescribed Dirichlet Condition will become active once its associate
element becomes partially full or full. Except for pressure, the ambient values are only set for postprocessing purposes. Pressure acts as an actual boundary condition.
Unlike other FLOTRAN analyses, the pressure field for a VOF analysis will include both the dynamic
pressure and the static pressure and the static pressure will be in balance with the gravitational acceleration terms. For example, in a VOF analysis, the pressure contours for a parallel uniform flow with
gravity will consist of parallel lines with a gradient balancing gravity, whereas they remain constant for
other FLOTRAN analyses.
In a VOF analysis, an outlet can have specified pressures or it can have natural conditions. When outlet
pressures are specified, the values will differ from those in other FLOTRAN analyses by the offsets of
the static pressure (or elevation head). For natural boundary conditions the outlet pressures will adjust
automatically. In that case, if a steady state solution exists, the outlet pressures will converge to the
correct values.
6.2.2. VFRC Tolerances

Ideally, a VFRC value of one signifies a full or fluid element and a value of zero signifies an empty or
void element. In reality, however, exact values of one and zero are difficult to maintain in the VOF advection algorithm due to various types of error accumulations. Hence, FLOTRAN introduces small cutoff
values to determine the full and empty elements. An element is considered full if its VFRC value is
greater than or equal to 1 - VOFU, where VOFU is the upper tolerance for the VOF advection algorithm.
An element is considered empty if its VFRC value is less than or equal to VOFL, where VOFL is the lower
tolerance for the VOF advection algorithm. By default, VOFL and VOFU are both set to 10-5.
In the FLOTRAN solution routines, a nearly empty element adjacent to a nearly full element may introduce
an abrupt change in the locally rescaled meshes. This can make the stiffness matrix more ill-conditioned
and can adversely affect the quality of the desired solution. To avoid this, FLOTRAN introduces another
tolerance to not assemble the finite element equations for those elements with VFRC values less than
or equal to LAML for laminar flows and TRBL for turbulent flows, where LAML and TRBL are the lower
tolerances for laminar and turbulent flows, respectively. Similarly, elements with VFRC values greater
than or equal to 1 - LAMU for laminar flows and 1 - TRBU for turbulent flows are considered full when
assembling the finite element equations. You can set any of these tolerance values. By default, LAML
and LAMU are set to 10-2 and TRBL and TRBU are set to 10-1.
To set any of the tolerance values, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA35,VFTOL,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> VOF Environment> VFRC Tolerance
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> VOF Environment> VFRC Tolerance
6.2.3. VOF Time Steps

Because the CLEAR-VOF is explicit in time, it must use a time step for the VOF advection algorithm that
corresponds to a CFL number less than one. On the other hand, selecting the time step based on the
VOF constraint may be too restrictive sometimes because the FLOTRAN transient solution algorithm is
implicit in time, and there is no stability restriction on the time step size. Accordingly, FLOTRAN allows
multiple VOF advection steps per solution step. The VOF advection time step is set equal to the solution
time step divided by a factor that you specify. If the VOF advection time step is still too large, FLOTRAN
68
Postprocessing
will automatically reduce the VOF time step by half. This automatic reduction in the VOF time step
continues until the local imbalance of the VFRC field during the VOF advection computations is less
than the VOFL tolerance. A good input parameter guess makes the calculation more efficient by removing
some checks on the time step.
To set the number of VOF advection time steps per solution time step, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA4,TIME,NTVF,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Setup> VOF Environment> Time Stepping
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Setup> VOF Environment> Time Stepping
For a VOF analysis, the density is constant. Therefore, mass conservation is equivalent to the conservation
of the total fluid volume (or area in two dimensions). Ideally, the difference between the volume coming
into the problem domain and going out of the domain should be equal to the increase or decrease of
the total volume inside the domain. In an actual finite element analysis, however, continuity satisfaction
is expressed in a Galerkin weak form. Therefore, in general, each element has a small mass imbalance.
The local mass imbalance is usually of the order of the discretization error, and this error is a major
source of the global VFRC imbalance introduced in a VOF analysis. Even though this imbalance may be
very small compared to the total volume, it can accumulate exponentially as the number of time steps
increases. Hence, FLOTRAN performs a global adjustment of the VFRC field at each VOF time step. It
proportionally increases or decreases the VFRC values of the partial elements to guarantee the global
VFRC balance. It prints the final VFRC imbalance in the Jobname.PFL file.
6.3. Postprocessing
The volume fraction is stored as a non-summable miscellaneous record in the element data section of
the results file. If you want to view the volume fraction, issue the command:
Command(s):
PLESOL,NMISC,1
Since the volume fraction is essentially an element based quantity, it is discontinuous across elements.
If you wish to see a smooth and continuous volume fraction, you should first store the results in an
element table, using one of the following:
Command(s): ETABLE,VFRC,NMISC,1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Define Table
You can then plot the results with an averaging operation, using one of the following:
Command(s): PLETAB,VFRC,1
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Element Table> Plot Elem Table
However, instead of using the foregoing commands, you can use one of the following:
Command(s): PLVFRC,CONT
GUI: Main Menu> General Postproc> Plot Results> Contour Plot> Element Solu
The PLVFRC macro issues the ETABLE and PLETAB commands. When CONT = 0, PLVFRC uses contour
levels of 0.5 and 1.0 to indicate the free surface and fluid regions. When CONT = 1, it uses the current
contour settings.
You can also animate your results. To obtain an animation over a time sequence by interpolation
between time steps, use the PLVFRC command macro along with one of the following:
Command(s): PLVFRC,CONT ANTIME,NFRAM, DELAY, NCYCL, AUTOCNTRKY, RSLTDAT, MIN, MAX
GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Over Time
69

To produce an animation based on the time steps without interpolation, use the PLVFRC command
macro along with one of the following:
Command(s): PLVFRC,CONT ANDATA,DELAY,NCYCL, RSCLDAT, MIN, MAX, INCR, FRCLST,
AUTOCNTRKY
GUI: Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Animate> Over Results
Note that if CONT = 0, the animation is based on two contour levels of 0.5 and 1.0. If CONT = 1, the
animation is based on AUTOCNTRKY setting.
6.4. VOF Analysis of a Dam

6.4.1. The Problem Described
In this example, two vertical walls confine a rectangular column of stationary water. When the right
wall is removed, the water flows out onto a rigid horizontal plane. The ICE command sets the initial
volume fraction field.
6.4.2. Building and Solving the Model (Command Method)

The following command stream shows all the relevant parameters and solution strategy. All text prefaced
with an exclamation point (!) is a comment.
/BATCH,LIST
/title, broken dam problem by the VOF solution.
/com
/com -----------------------------------------------------------------/com ** Reference: "Part IV: An Experimental Study of the Collapse of
/com **
Liquid Columns on a Rigid Horizontal Plane"
/com **
By Martin and Moyce, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc.
/com **
(London,A244, pp. 312-324, 1952.
/com **
"Volume of Fluid (VOF) Method for the Dynamics of
/com **
Free Boundaries" By C.W. Hirt and B.D. Nichols,
/com **
J. Comput. Physics, Vol. 39, pp. 201-225, 1981.
/com **
/prep7
!!!!!
Define some dimensions and gravity
LX = 5.0
! X length
LY = 2.5
! Y length
DELX = 0.2
! X spacing
DELY = 0.05
! Y spacing
grav = 9.81
! Gravity
et,1,141
!!!! meshing
rect,0,LX,0,LY
lsel,s,,,2,4,2
lesize,all,DELY
lsel,s,,,1,3,2
lesize,all,DELX
amesh,all
nsel,s,loc,y,0.0
nsel,a,loc,x,0.0
d,all,vx,0.0
d,all,vy,0.0
! Wall boundary conditions
nsel,s,loc,x,0.0,1.0
nsel,r,loc,y,0.0,2.0
esln,s,1
ice,all,vfrc,1.0
! Setup initial VFRC
alls
ic,all,vx,0
ic,all,vy,0
save
! Initial conditions for vx & vy
70
VOF Analysis of Open Channel with an Obstruction

fini
/solu
!!!! FLOTRAN input
acel,0.0,grav,0
FLDA,NOMI,DENS,1.0e3
FLDA,NOMI,VISC,1.0d-3
FLDA,SOLU,FLOW,T
FLDA,SOLU,TRAN,T
FLDA,SOLU,turb,F
flda,solu,vof,t
flda,time,glob,5
flda,time,numb,70
flda,time,step,0.01
flda,time,appe,0.1
flda,advm,mome,supg
flda,relx,vx,0.5
flda,relx,vy,0.5
flda,relx,pres,1.0
solve
fini
exit,nosa
6.5. VOF Analysis of Open Channel with an Obstruction

In this example, water flows in an open channel with a semicircular obstruction on the bottom. The
computation uses the standard k- turbulence model since the turbulence model is not very important
for the prediction of the free-surface shape. The solution domain extends five cylinder diameters upstream
and five diameters downstream of the obstruction. The fluid starts to fill the domain at the beginning
of the simulation. The SFE and SFL commands set a wetting boundary on the left inlet.

/BATCH,LIST
/title, initial development of flow over a bump.
/com
/com -----------------------------------------------------------------/com **
Initial development of flow over a semicircular bump
/com **
Reference: "Critical Free-Surface Flow Over a Semi-Circular
/com **
Obstruction" By L.K. Forbes, J. Eng. Math.,
/com **
vol. 22, pp. 3-13, 1998.
/com **
"Computation of free-surface flows using the
/com **
finite-volume method and moving grids",
/com **
By S. Muzaferija and M. Peric, Numerical Heat
/com **
Transfer, Part B, 32:369-384, 1997.
/com -----------------------------------------------------------------!
!
! Property and parameter input
rho = 1.0e0
! Density
grav = 9.81
! Gravity
mu
= 1.0e-6
! Viscosity
!
R = 0.03
! Bump radius
L = 2*R
H = 0.075
! Inlet height
H0 = R
! Height above the Inlet
outlen = 5.0*R
! Outlet length
inlen = 5.0*R
! Inlet length
ny1 = 8
! Number of elements in line 1
ny2 = 2
! Number of elements in line 2
71

ny3 = 4
ry2 = 1.0
ry3 = 1.0
nx1 = 15
nx2 = 15
nx3 = 20
rx1 = 0.5
rx2 = 1.0
rx3 = 1.5
nr1 = 10
!!
/prep7
et,1,141
k,1,-inlen,0.0
k,2,-inlen,L
k,3,-inlen,H
k,4,-inlen,H+H0
!
l,1,2
l,2,3
l,3,4
!
k,5,-L,0.0
k,6,-L,L
k,7,-L,H
k,8,-L,H+H0
!
l,5,6
l,6,7
l,7,8
!
k,9,L,0.0
k,10,L,L
k,11,L,H
k,12,L,H+H0
!
l,9,10
l,10,11
l,11,12
!
k,13,outlen,0.0
k,14,outlen,L
k,15,outlen,H
k,16,outlen,H+H0
!
l,13,14
l,14,15
l,15,16
!
l,1,5
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Number of elements in
Ratio of element size
line 3
in line 2
in line 3
line 13
line 21
line 17
in line 13
in line 25
in line 17
radial direction near bump
! KP 1 - 4 are at the inlet
! Lines 1-3 are the inlet line
! KP 5 - 8 are before the bump
! Lines 4-6 before the bump
! KP 9 - 12 are after the bump
! Lines 7-9 after the bump
! KP 13 - 16 are at the outlet
! Lines 10-12 at the outlet
! Lines 13-16 are horizontal lines near inlet
l,2,6
l,3,7
l,4,8
!
l,9,13
! Lines 17-20 are horizontal lines near outlet
l,10,14
l,11,15
l,12,16
!
l,6,10
! Lines 21-23 are horizontal lines near the bump
l,7,11
l,8,12
!
k,17,R,0.0
! KP 17 to 23 are for the semicircular bump
k,18,0.0,0.0
circle,18,R,,17,180,4
lcomb,25,26,0
!
l,19,9
! Lines 26, 28-30 in radial direction near bump
l,20,10
l,22,6
72
VOF Analysis of Open Channel with an Obstruction

l,23,5
!
!
Select lines and establish line divisions
!
lsel,s,,,1,4,3
lesize,all,,,ny1
!
lsel,s,,,2,11,3
lesize,all,,,ny2,ry2
!
lsel,s,,,3,12,3
lesize,all,,,ny3,ry3
!
lsel,s,,,13,16
lesize,all,,,nx1,rx1
!
lsel,s,,,21,23
lesize,all,,,nx2,1.0/rx2
lsel,s,,,25
!
lsel,s,,,17,20
!
lsel,s,,,27
lesize,all,,,ny1
!
lsel,s,,,26
lsel,a,,,28,30
lesize,all,,,nr1
!
!
define the y-direction mesh
lsel,s,,,24
lsel,a,,,7
lsel,a,,,10
lesize,all,,,nx2,1.5
!
alls
!
Create areas....
a,1,5,6,2
! Inlet
a,2,6,7,3
a,3,7,8,4
a,9,13,14,10
! Outlet
a,10,14,15,11
a,11,15,16,12
a,6,10,11,7
! Bump
a,7,11,12,8
a,19,9,10,20
a,20,10,6,22
a,5,23,22,6
alls
amesh,all
!
! Inlet boundary condition
lsel,s,,,1,2
nsll,,1
d,all,vx,0.32
d,all,vy,0.0
!
nsel,s,loc,x,-inlen
nsel,r,loc,y,0.0
d,all,vx,0.001
!
! boundary volume fraction (SFL and SFE commands)
sfl,1,vfrc,1,,1
sfl,2,vfrc,1,,1
!!
!!!!
The walls
lsel,s,,,13
lsel,a,,,17
lsel,a,,,24,25
73

lsel,a,,,27
lsel,a,,,26
lsel,a,,,30
nsll,,1
d,all,vx,0
d,all,vy,0
alls
/solu
!!!! FLOTRAN Input
acel,0.0,grav,0.0
FLDA,SOLU,VOF,ON
FLDA,SOLU,FLOW,ON
FLDA,SOLU,TRAN,ON
FLDA,SOLU,TURB,ON
FLDA,TIME,GLOB,3
FLDA,TIME,NUMB,50
FLDA,TIME,STEP,1e-2
FLDA,TIME,APPE,0.1
FLDA,TIME,PRES,1.0E-6
FLDA,ADVM,MOME,SUPG
flda,relx,vx,0.5
flda,relx,vy,0.5
flda,relx,pres,1.0
flda,prot,dens,constant
flda,prot,visc,constant
flda,nomi,dens,rho
flda,nomi,visc,mu
solve
fini
exit,nosa
!
!
!
!
Constant density
Constant viscosity
Density set earlier
Viscosity set earlier
6.6. VOF Analysis of an Oscillating Droplet

This example examines the interesting phenomenon of a liquid droplet oscillating in a dynamically inactive gas. For small amplitudes, the angular frequency, , is given by the following formula from A.
Prosperetti, ("Free Oscillations of Drops and Bubbles: The Initial-Value Problem," Journal of Fluid Mechanics, Vol. 100, p. 333, 1980):
F3
where is the density, is the surface tension coefficient, and RF is the radius of the drop at its equilibrium state. Here, Re is the Reynolds number given by:
where is the dynamic viscosity of the liquid.

When the oscillation is fully damped by the viscosity, the droplet takes a spherical shape and the droplet
pressure is given by:
theory
74
VOF Analysis of an Oscillating Droplet

The droplet analyzed here is initially elliptical with major and minor semiaxes of 24.69 mm and 18 mm,
respectively. This corresponds to a final radius of RF of 20 mm. The time increment, t, is set to 2 x 10-4
ms.
The material properties of the droplet are:
= 109 mg/(m)3
= 106 mg/(m)(ms)
= 0.073 mg/(ms)2
The Prosperetti formula gives an oscillation frequency of 43.0 kHz.
6.6.2. Results
Figure 6.1: Instantaneous Pressure Distributions at 0.001 ms (p. 75) and Figure 6.2: Instantaneous Pressure
Distributions at 0.012 ms (p. 76) show the instantaneous pressure distributions at 0.001 ms and 0.012
ms, respectively. Rather than a pressure jump across the interface, the pressure is observed to vary
smoothly in a thin transition region near the interface. Initially, the maximum pressure occurs at the
top and bottom portion of the droplet due to a high local curvature. The resulting pressure gradient
forces the fluid inward and redirects it to the sides. As the droplet moves, the pressure starts to rise at
the sides due to the increasing local curvature. This slows down the movement of the droplet and
eventually forces the fluid back inward from the sides. The pressure distribution controls the droplet
oscillation by balancing the kinetic energy and the potential energy due to the surface tension. The
simulation produces a free surface profile every 5 time steps. The frequency is 42.6 kHz (two cycles occur
in 0.047 ms). This agrees quite well with the 43.0 kHz predicted by the Prosperetti formula. The oscillation
amplitude decreases with time and damps out at 0.2 ms due to viscosity. Averaging the pressure values
on interior nodes attached to only full elements gives the numerical droplet pressure. The difference
between the numerical and the analytical pressure is approximately 1%. There are some noises in the
velocity field near the interface due to the so-called parasitic currents inherent in the CSF formulation.
Figure 6.1: Instantaneous Pressure Distributions at 0.001 ms
75

Figure 6.2: Instantaneous Pressure Distributions at 0.012 ms

/title, oscillating axisymmetric drop problem by the VOF/CSF solution.
/nopr
LX
= 30
!
x length in micrometer (um)
LY
= 30
!
y length in micrometer (um)
RadF = 20
!
radius of the final sphere in micrometer (um)
aRad = 18
!
x radius in micrometer (um)
bRad = RadF**3/aRad**2
!
y radius in micrometer (um)
DELX = 0.1*RadF
!
x spacing in micrometer (um)
DELY = 0.1*RadF
!
y spacing in micrometer (um)
DELT = 2.0e-4
!
time increment in millisecond (ms)
APPT = DELT*5
!
append time in millisecond (ms)
NDT = 1000
!
total number of time steps
Sigm = 0.073
!
SFTS coefficient in unit of (mg)/(ms)^2
rho = 1.0e-9
!
density in unit of (mg)/(um)^3
mu
= 1.0e-6
!
viscosity in unit of (mg)/(um)(ms)
pexact=2*Sigm/RadF
!
theoretical pressure in equilibrium
/prep7
et,1,141,,,1
!
RY geometry
rect,0,LX,-LY,LY
lsel,s,,,2,4,2
lesize,all,DELY
lsel,s,,,1,3,2
lesize,all,DELX
amesh,all
nsel,s,loc,x,0
d,all,vx,0.0
! symmetry condition
alls
icvf,elpt,0.0,0.0,aRad,bRad
ic,all,vx,0
ic,all,vy,0
save
fini
! initial VFRC
! initial velocity
/solu
flda,solu,tran,t
flda,solu,vof,t
flda,solu,sfts,t
76
VOF Analysis of an Oscillating Droplet

flda,nomi,sfts,sigm
flda,nomi,dens,rho
flda,nomi,visc,mu
flda,time,glob,10
flda,time,numb,NDT
flda,time,step,DELT
flda,advm,mome,supg
flda,mir,mome,1.0
flda,relx,pres,1.0
flda,time,appe,APPT
solve
fini
/post1
set,last
PLVFRC,0
ANDATA,0.1, ,2,1,51,1,0.0,1
set,last
*GET,VFAdvU,FLDA,VFTO,VOFU
VFAdvU=1.0-VFAdvU
alls
*get,elmmax,elem,0,count
*get,elmi,elem,0,num,min
*get,vfval,elem,elmi,nmis,1
*IF,vfval,LE,VFAdvU,then
esel,u,,,elmi
*ENDIF
!
!
!
Get the number of elements

Get the lowest elem number in the set
Get the VFRC for the element
Remove elmi from the active set
*do,ilop,2,elmmax
*get,elmn,elem,elmi,nxth
*get,vfval,elem,elmn,nmis,1
*IF,vfval,LE,VFAdvU,then
esel,u,,,elmn
*ELSE
elmi=elmn
*ENDIF
*enddo
!
!
!
Loop over selected elements

Get the next higher elem number in the set
Get the VFRC for the element
Remove elmn from the active set
nsle,s,all
nsel,u,ext
!
!
select all node attached to elements

unselect ext. nodes of prev. selected nodes
pavg=0.0
prms=0.0
*get,nodmax,node,0,count
!
*do,ilop,1,nodmax
!
*get,nodi,node,0,num,min
!
*get,pval,node,nodi,pres
!
pavg=pavg+pval
!
prms=prms+(pval-pexact)**2
!
nsel,u,,,nodi
!
*enddo
pavg=pavg/nodmax
prms=sqrt(prms/nodmax)/pexact
Get the number of selected nodes

Loop over the number of nodes
Get the lowest node number in the set
Get the y
pressure sum
pressure rms
Remove node from the active set
/go
*vwrite
(9x,'DelX/Rad ', 3x, 'PRES / Pexact ',3x,'Prms ')
*vwrite,DELX/RadF,pavg/pexact,prms
(3(4x,1pe12.5))
fini
exit,nosa
6.6.4. Where to Find Other Examples

For more examples on the VOF analysis of free surface problems with surface tension, refer to G. Wang,
(Finite Element Simulations of Gas-Liquid Flows with Surface Tension, International Mechanical Engineering Congress & Exposition, November 5-10, 2000, Orlando, Florida).
77
78
Chapter 7: Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) Formulation for

Moving Domains
Fluid flow problems often involve moving interfaces. The interfaces can be moving internal walls (for
example, a solid moving through a fluid), external walls, or free surfaces. In such problems, the fluid
domain changes with time and the finite element mesh must move to satisfy the boundary conditions
at the moving interfaces. You can use the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) formulation to solve
problems of this type.
Figure 7.1: Torsional Mirror at t = 0 Seconds (p. 79) illustrates a typical fluid flow problem requiring the
ALE formulation. It involves a micro-electromechanical system (MEMS) device with a viscous fluid between
two rigid plates. Initially, the plates are parallel and the fluid is at rest.
Figure 7.1: Torsional Mirror at t = 0 Seconds
The top plate begins to oscillate about its centerline setting the fluid in motion. The ALE formulation
allows the fluid domain to change with time and the finite element mesh to move to satisfy the
boundary conditions at the moving plate. Figure 7.2: Torsional Mirror at t = 2.5 Seconds (p. 80) and
Figure 7.3: Torsional Mirror at t = 7.5 Seconds (p. 80) show the finite element mesh at later times.
79
Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) Formulation for Moving Domains

Figure 7.2: Torsional Mirror at t = 2.5 Seconds
Figure 7.3: Torsional Mirror at t = 7.5 Seconds
To perform a transient analysis employing the ALE formulation, you must activate the ALE formulation
and the transient solution algorithm. To activate the ALE formulation, you use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,ALE,TRUE
To activate the transient algorithm, you use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,TRAN,TRUE
For more information on transient analyses and the transient algorithm, see FLOTRAN Transient Analyses (p. 61).
To do an ALE analysis, you need to use one of the following elements:
80
Boundary Conditions
FLUID141, KEYOPT(3) = 0 (Cartesian coordinates), 1 (axisymmetric about Y-axis), or 2 (axisymmetic about
X-axis).
FLUID142, KEYOPT(3) = 0 (Cartesian coordinates). You cannot use a cylindrical coordinate system (KEYOPT(3) = 3) with ALE.
You will need to activate KEYOPT(4) to specify boundary motions (displacement DOFs). To define the
element type, use one of the following:
Command(s): ET,ITYPE,Ename,KOP1,KOP2,KOP3,KOP4,KOP5,KOP6 KEYOPT,ITYPE,KNUM,VALUE
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete
Real constants 18 (BDTOL) and 19 (MMFAC) are also used in an ALE analysis.
Currently, free surfaces are not a part of the ALE formulation. However, you can use the Volume of
Fluid (VOF) method in conjunction with the ALE formulation to simulate flows involving free surfaces
and moving walls. (Refer to Volume of Fluid (VOF) Analyses (p. 65).)
The following ALE topics are available:
7.1. Boundary Conditions
7.2. Mesh Updating
7.3. Remeshing
7.4. Postprocessing
7.5. ALE Analysis of a Simplified Torsional Mirror
7.6. ALE/VOF Analysis of a Vessel with a Moving Wall
7.7. ALE Analysis of a Moving Cylinder

Generally, either slip or stick boundary conditions apply for moving internal or external walls (See Figure 7.4: Boundary Conditions for Moving Walls (p. 81).)
Figure 7.4: Boundary Conditions for Moving Walls
Slip or stick boundary

conditions for displace-
Fluid
ments and velocities
Moving solid
81

Table 7.1: Interface Boundary Conditions (p. 82) shows the required displacement and velocity specifications for slip and stick boundary conditions.
Table 7.1: Interface Boundary Conditions
Boundary Condition
Slip[1]
Stick[1]
Displacement
Specify normal
component of
displacement
for fluid nodes.
Specify all displacement components

for fluid nodes.
That is, specify the following:
2-D
That is, specify

the following:
or Dx; Dy
3-D
or Dx; Dy; Dz
Velocity
Inviscid Flow
Viscous Flow
Specify normal
component of
velocity for fluid nodes.
Specify all velocity components for

fluid nodes.
That is, specify

the following:
That is, specify the following:

2-D
or Vx; Vy
3-D
or Vx; Vy; Vz
1. The time derivative of the normal displacement must be equal to the normal velocity, dDn/dt = Vn.
Slip or stick boundary conditions can apply for displacement. For velocity, slip boundary conditions
apply for inviscid flow and stick boundary conditions apply for viscous flow. In all cases, the time derivative of the normal displacement must be equal to the normal velocity. In FLOTRAN, only stick boundary
conditions are currently valid.
To set displacement or velocity boundary conditions at nodes, you can use either of the following:
Command(s): D
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Displacement (or
Velocity)> On Nodes
82
Mesh Updating
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Displacement (or Velocity)> On
Nodes
To set boundary conditions on the solid model, you can use any of the following:
Command(s): DL and DA
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Displacement (or
Velocity)> On Lines
Lines
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Displacement (or Velocity)> On Areas
Areas
If a node is part of a distributed resistance or a fan model or part of a solid region composed of FLUID141
or FLUID142 elements, homogeneous displacement boundary conditions are automatically applied (that
is, D,ALL,UX,0.0 and D,ALL,UY,0.0 for 2-D and D,ALL,UX,0.0, D,ALL,UY,0.0, and D,ALL,UZ,0.0 for 3-D).
You can specify partial displacement boundary conditions to make external nodes move along a global
axis. For example, D,ALL,UX,0.0 will make a set of nodes slide along the y-axis in a 2-D model. Currently,
normal and tangential components of displacement can not be specified for an external boundary.
You can also specify generalized symmetry boundary conditions. If the ALE formulation is activated,
velocity components are then set equal to the mesh velocity. To do so, use one of the following commands or the GUI equivalent:
D,NODE,ENDS,-1
DL,LINE,AREA,ENDS,-1,Value2
DA,AREA,ENDS,-1,Value2
7.2. Mesh Updating

The ALE formulation uses the displacement boundary conditions applied by the D, DL, and DA commands
to update the finite element mesh. It determines the displacement at the beginning of each time step
relative to the previous time step. For each time step, an elasticity based morphing algorithm updates
the mesh. The algorithm ensures that boundary layers are retained (that is, nodes in a fine mesh area
move less than nodes in a coarse mesh area).
A transient analysis cannot proceed if morphing fails. If morphing is independent of the fluid flow
solution, you can step through the morphing algorithm before doing a fluid flow analysis to determine
whether morphing will fail. To do so, issue the following command sequence:
/solu
.
.
.
fldata,solu,turb,f
fldata,solu,temp,f
fldata,solu,spec,f
fldata,solu,ale,t
fldata,solu,flow,f
solve
You cannot check for morphing failure in advance if the time step size depends on the fluid flow variables
or the problem involves a free surface.
Mesh morphing is currently available for the following element shapes:
83

Pure quadrilaterals, pure triangles, or a combination for FLUID141
Pure hexahedrals, pure tetrahedrals, pure pyramids, pure wedges, or any combination for FLUID142
Sometimes mesh morphing produces poor quality elements (for example, when a fluid domain is extremely squeezed by a moving wall). The birth and death feature can then be useful. To implement this
feature, you assign a birth/death tolerance to the candidate elements using the real constant BDTOL.
A node is automatically deactivated if the distance from it to the center of any element face on the
wall becomes less than the assigned BDTOL. An element is deactivated if all of its nodes are deactivated.
Conversely, a node is reactivated if the distance from it to the center of the closest element face on the
wall becomes greater than or equal to the assigned BDTOL. An element is reactivated if all of its nodes
are reactivated.
Setting the MMFAC (mesh morphing multiplier) real constant on the FLUID141 or FLUID142 elements
can affect mesh morphing. If the real constant set number defaults to zero in a third-party mesher, the
default value for the multiplier is set to 0.0. In this case, you will need to either set the real constant
set number or the MMFAC real constant explicitly if you are not satisfied with the 0.0 default value.
7.3. Remeshing
Large fluid domain changes can produce poor quality elements and mesh morphing failure. To avoid
element failure, you must remesh.
To accomplish remeshing, issue one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA39,REMESH
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Remesh Ctrl
FLDATA39,REMESH will automatically remesh the fluid elements and linearly interpolate the nodal
solution from the old mesh to the new mesh. Use it to specify one of the following three ways of
remeshing:
Remesh all defined fluid elements if the quality of the worst defined element falls below any specified
quality requirement listed in Table 7.2: Element Qualities (p. 85).
Whole domain remeshing is suitable when the moving boundary affects all of the fluid elements
(all the fluid elements may become distorted during solution).
Remesh defined fluid elements that have a quality below any specified quality requirement.
Partial domain remeshing is suitable when the distorted elements are locally distributed and the
location of the distorted elements is not known before solution or it changes during solution.
Remesh all grouped fluid elements with a specified component name if the quality of the worst selected element falls below any specified quality requirement.
Selected component remeshing is suitable when the distorted elements are locally distributed,
but the location of the distorted elements is known before solution and it does not change
during solution.
84
Remeshing
There are three maximum allowable element qualities that you need to specify for remeshing: aspect
ratio, change of element size, and change of element aspect ratio.
Table 7.2: Element Qualities
Element Quality
Triangles
Tetrahedrons
Generalized Aspect Ratio (AR)
AR = ((lavg)2 / A) / 2.3
AR = ((lavg)3 / V) / 8.48
Change of Element Size (VOCH)
VOCH = exp | log (A(t) / A(0)) |
VOCH = exp | log (V(t) / V(0)) |
Change of Aspect Ratio (ARCH)
ARCH = exp | log (AR(t) / AR(0)) |
where:
lavg = average length of the element edges
A = element area
V = element volume
A(t) and V(t) = element area and volume at time t
A(0) and V(0) = element area and volume at time 0
You may also specify the following remeshing inputs:
Elements Excluded
You can exclude all elements connected to boundary nodes from remeshing. For a fluid-structure
interaction analysis, you can exclude the elements connected to fluid-solid interfaces.
Element Size
The element remeshing size defaults to 0. The element size at the nearest boundary is then used
for remeshing.
Area Expansion or Contraction
You can size internal elements so that they are approximately the size of the boundary elements
times an expansion or contraction factor.
Checkpoints
You can specify element quality checkpoints in three ways: every time step, every Nth time step,
or at a single time point. The fluid elements will automatically remesh if any quality requirement
is not met at a checkpoint.
After each remesh, new databases and results files are written with the extensions .rfl0n and .dbn,
where n is the remesh file number (Jobname.rfl01, Jobname.rfl02, ... and Jobname.db01,
Jobname.db02,...). Use the ANMRES command to create an animation across the results files.
Note
The original database file is Jobname.db0. The Jobname.db01, Jobname.db02, ... files
have elements that are detached from the solid model.
You can use the FLOTRAN remeshing capability in a pure fluid flow analysis or a fluid-solid interaction
analysis. For information on fluid-solid interaction analyses, see Load Transfer Coupled Physics Analysis
and The ANSYS Multi-field (TM) Solver - MFS Single-Code Coupling in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
85

Some important remeshing limitations are listed in the following table.
Table 7.3: Remeshing Limitations
Limitation
Description
Elements
Remeshing supports models meshed with triangular or tetrahedral

elements. It only works for element groups with one element type and
one real constant.
Area/Volume
Changes
Remeshing will not work for extreme area or volume changes.
Domains
2-D problems can have multiple domains; 3-D problems require a single
domain. Do not allow two separate domains without distance (e.g.,
when solving a FSI problem with a beam or shell element, at least one
side elements connected to the beam or shell elements must be excluded from remeshing).
Loads
Remeshing can treat nodal loads on the boundary, but it cannot treat
body loads applied to interior nodes. Fluid-solid interaction is the only
valid element based load.
Boundary Nodes
Nodes on the boundary cannot be remeshed. Therefore, remeshing

will not work if morphing failed on surface nodes.
See ALE Analysis of a Moving Cylinder for a problem using remeshing.
7.4. Postprocessing
For postprocessing, you can use the following contour and vector command sequence for the reference
domain or the current deformed domain:
set,load step,substep
/dscal,,1.0
plns,pres,,0
plve,v,,,,,,,1
!
!
!
!
sets the set number for processing

sets the scaling for display
display pressure contours on deformed domain
display velocity vectors on the deformed domain
To view the deformed mesh , issue the following command sequence:

set,load step,substep
/dscal,,1.0
pldi,2
!
!
!
!
sets the set number for processing

sets the scaling for display
display the deformed mesh overlayed with undeformed
edges
To produce an animated sequence of the results, issue the ANTIME macro with the above commands.
Note
The displacements of non-structural elements are mesh (or grid) displacements to avoid
mesh distortion but have no physical meaning except at the interface between the fluid and
the structure.
86
ALE Analysis of a Simplified Torsional Mirror
7.5. ALE Analysis of a Simplified Torsional Mirror

This is an Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) analysis of a micro-electromechanical system (MEMS)
device. The device consists of a viscous fluid between two rigid plates. Initially, the plates are parallel
and the fluid is at rest. The top plate begins to oscillate about its centerline setting the fluid in motion.
The top plate oscillates with a very small angular amplitude.
You must determine the torque on the moving plate in order to develop a reduced order model for
this device.
Figure 7.5: Torsional Mirror Problem Description
Oscillating plate
= (t)
(Xo, Yo)
Ho = Yo = H
Initial p siti n f
scillating plate
(at t = 0)
Y
X
Fixed plate
LX
7.5.2. Boundary Conditions

This section derives formulas for the displacement and velocity boundary conditions.
The angle of rotation is: = osint
Differentiating, the angular velocity is: = ocost

The position of any point on the plate is given by:
x(t) = xo + Rcos
y(t) = yo + Rsin
where:
R = xr xo and xr is the x coordinate on the plate at time equals zero.
Therefore, the displacements of the plate are given by:
UX(t) = x(t) x(o) = x xr R
UY(t) = y(t) y(o) = y yo
87

Substituting the expressions for x and y gives:
UX = R(cos 1)
UY = Rsin
Note
As approaches 0, UX approaches 0 and UY approaches R.
Differentiating displacements gives the following velocity equations:
= =
= =
Note
As approaches 0, VX approaches R o2 and VY approaches R o. Therefore, VX

approaches 0 faster than VY.
The command listing in Building and Solving the Model (Command Method) (p. 90) uses the above
expressions for UX, UY, VX, and VY in the boundary condition tables.
7.5.3. Forces and Moments

This section derives formulas for the forces and moments acting on the torsional mirror.
Figure 7.6: Torsional Mirror Problem - Boundary Conditions
Oscillating plate

U = U(x,t)

V = V(x,t)
D = D (x,t)
Dy = Dy (x,t)
p = po
ho
h = h(x,t)
p = po
Y
X
L
Fixed plate
U=V=0
D = Dy = 0
Assuming the flow is 2-D and neglecting inertia terms, the Navier-Stokes equation reduces to the
Reynolds equation for incompressible flow:
88

where: h = h (x,t) is the gap height and U and V are the velocity components of the moving plate.
Assuming that the angular displacement of the mirror is small gives:
U 0
V R
R x
Substituting these values in the Reynolds equation and assuming that U variations with x are small
gives:
Integrating gives:
where C1 and C2 are constants to be determined.

Substituting ho for h for small angular displacements and completing the integration gives:

o

o
Substituting p = po at x = L/2 gives:
=
=

Solving these two equations for C1 and C2 gives:

C2 = po
C1 = 2 (L/2)2
Substituting the C1 and C2 values into the pressure equation gives:
89
o =
3
o
Thus, the force and moment on the torsional mirror are given by:
L/
p
- L/

The flow field at any x coordinate is given by:
Accordingly, the shear stress on the torsional mirror is:
y =h
Thus, the force and moment due to shearing stresses are:

s


with an exclamation point (!) is a comment. Please refer to Figure 7.5: Torsional Mirror Problem Description (p. 87).
/BATCH,LIST
/tit,Torque Mirror Problem
/nopr
LX
= 1.0
NDX
= 40
H
= 0.01
NDY
= 10
POUT = 0.0
90
!
!
!
!
!
Plate Length in X direction

Number of X divisions
Gap in Y-direction
Number of Y divisions
Outlet relative pressure

RHO
= 1.0000
MU
= 1.00
nts = 40
time = 10.
delta = time/nts
appf = delta
*AFUN,RAD
AMAX = (2*H/LX)/8
OMEGA = 2*3.14159/time
X0 = LX/2
Y0 = H
H0 = H
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Fluid density
Fluid viscosity
number of time steps
total simulation time
time step size
append results every time step
angles are in radians
adjust angular amplitude << 1
complete 1 cycle in given time
pivot point x-coord
pivot point y-coord
! use function builder/tables (refer to Using the Function Tool in the Basic Analysis Guide)
! for displacements/velocities of oscillating plate
*DIM,UXTAB,TABLE,6,4,1
UXTAB(0,0,1) = 0.0,-999, 1, X0 ,AMAX, 0.0, 0.0
UXTAB(0,1,1) = 1.0,-1 , 0, 1.0 , 27 , 2 , 17
! Radius = XR - X0
UXTAB(0,2,1) = 0.0,-2 , 9,OMEGA, 1 , 3 , 18
! Angle=amax*sin(omega*t)
UXTAB(0,3,1) = 0.0,-3 , 10, 1.0 ,-2 , 3 ,-1
! Radius*cos(Angle)
UXTAB(0,4,1) = 0.0,99 , 0, 1.0 ,-3 , 2 ,-1
! Radius*cos(Angle)-Radius
*DIM,UYTAB,TABLE,6,3,1
UYTAB(0,0,1) = 0.0,-999, 1, X0 ,AMAX, 0.0, 0.0
UYTAB(0,1,1) = 1.0,-1 , 0, 1.0 , 27 , 2 , 17
! Radius = XR - X0
UYTAB(0,2,1) = 0.0,-2 , 9,OMEGA, 1 , 3 , 18
UYTAB(0,3,1) = 0.0,99 , 9, 1.0 ,-2 , 3 ,-1
! Radius*sin(Angle)
*DIM,VXTAB,TABLE,6,5,1
VXTAB(0,0,1) = 0.0,-999, 1, X0 ,AMAX,OMEGA*AMAX, 0.0
VXTAB(0,1,1) = 1.0,-1 , 0,-1.0 , 27 , 1 , 17
! -Radius = -(XR-X0)
VXTAB(0,2,1) = 0.0,-2 , 9,OMEGA, 1 , 3 , 18
VXTAB(0,3,1) = 0.0,-3 , 10,OMEGA, 1, 3 , 19
! Angle speed=
! amax*omega*cos(omega*t)
VXTAB(0,4,1) = 0.0,-4 , 9, 1.0 ,-2 , 3 , -1
! -Radius*sin(angle)
VXTAB(0,5,1) = 0.0,99 , 0, 1.0 ,-4 , 3 , -3 !-Radius*sin(angle)*angle speed
*DIM,VYTAB,TABLE,6,5,1
VYTAB(0,0,1) = 0.0,-999, 1, X0 ,AMAX,OMEGA*AMAX, 0.0
VYTAB(0,1,1) = 1.0,-1 , 0, 1.0 , 27 , 2 , 17
!Radius = XR - X0
VYTAB(0,2,1) = 0.0,-2 , 9,OMEGA, 1 , 3 , 18
!Angle=amax*sin(omega*t)
VYTAB(0,3,1) = 0.0,-3 , 10,OMEGA, 1, 3 , 19
!Angle speed=
!amax*omega*cos(omega*t)
VYTAB(0,4,1) = 0.0,-4 , 10, 1.0 ,-2 , 3 , -1
!Radius*cos(angle)
VYTAB(0,5,1) = 0.0,99 , 0, 1.0 ,-4 , 3 , -3 !Radius*cos(angle)*angle speed
/PREP7 $smrt,off
et,1,141
keyopt,1,4,1
esha,2
rect,,LX,,H
lesize,1,,,NDX,
lesize,3,,,NDX,
lesize,2,,,NDY,-10
lesize,4,,,NDY,-10
alls
amesh,all
! 2-D XY system
! allow disp. DOFs
! Quad elements
lsel,s,,,3
nsll,s,1
d,all,VX,%VXTAB%
d,all,VY,%VYTAB%
d,all,enke,-1
d,all,ux,%UXTAB%
d,all,uy,%UYTAB%
! Moving top plate
lsel,s,,,2
lsel,a,,,4
nsll,s,1
d,all,pres,POUT
! Left & Right Outlets
lsel,s,,,1
! Stationary bottom plate
91

nsll,s,1
d,all,vx,
d,all,vy,
d,all,ux,0.0
d,all,uy,0.0
alls
fini
/SOLU
FLDA,NOMI,DENS,RHO
FLDA,NOMI,VISC,MU
FLDA,OUTP,TAUW,T
flda,quad,momd,2
flda,quad,moma,2
flda,quad,moms,2
flda,quad,prsd,2
flda,quad,pres,2
flda,solu,tran,t
flda,time,step,delta
flda,time,numb,nts
flda,time,tend,time
flda,time,glob,25
flda,time,appe,appf
flda,solu,ale,t
save
SOLVE
fini
!
!
!
!
!
Nominal density
Nominal viscosity
Output wall shear stress
increased quadrature for deformed
elements
! Turn ALE on
!do the comparison with analytical solution here

/post1
!moving wall
*dim,RES1,,NDX+1,15
*do,j,1,nts,1
! loop over the time steps
rsys,0
csys,0
set,1,j
! get the results of step j
*get,curtime,active,0,set,time
! get the time of this substep
theta = amax*sin(omega*curtime)
! get the plate angle
thetad = amax*omega*cos(omega*curtime)
! get plate angular speed
nsel,s,loc,y,H
! select moving wall nodes
*do,i,1,NDX+1
! loop over these nodes
*get,XMAX,node,,mxloc,x
n = node(XMAX,H,0)
RES1(i,1) = n
! Node number
RES1(i,2) = NX(n)
! X-coordinate
RES1(i,3) = NY(n)
! Y-coordinate
RES1(i,4) = UX(n)
! UX
Rn = NX(n)-X0
RES1(i,10) = Rn*(cos(theta)-1.0)
! UX exact
RES1(i,5) = UY(n)
! UY
RES1(i,11) = Rn*sin(theta)
! UY exact
RES1(i,6) = VX(n)
! VX
RES1(i,12) = -Rn*sin(theta)*thetad ! VX exact
RES1(i,7) = VY(n)
! VY
RES1(i,13) = Rn*cos(theta)*thetad ! VY exact
RES1(i,8) = PRES(n)
! Pressure
c1 = 2.0*MU*thetad/H0**3
c2 = NX(n) - X0
RES1(i,14) = c1*(c2**3 - c2*(LX/2)**2) ! Exact Pressure
*get,RES1(i,9),node,n,TAUW
! Shear stress
c0 = NX(n) - X0
c1 = H0 + theta*c0
c2 = 3*c0**2 - (LX/2)**2
RES1(i,15) = ABS(c1*mu*thetad*c2/H0**3) ! Exact shear stress
nsel,u,,,n
*enddo
/com Compare disps/velocities/pressures/shears on moving wall(X,H,0)
/com
*status,curtime
*status,theta
*vwrite
92

(4x,'NODE',7x,'X COOR',12x,'Y COOR',9x,'UX (FLOTRAN)',5x,'UX (Exact)')
*vwrite,RES1(1,1),RES1(1,2),RES1(1,3),RES1(1,4),RES1(1,10)
(3x,f5.0,4(1pe17.5))
/com
*vwrite
(4x,'NODE',7x,'X COOR',12x,'Y COOR',9x,'UY (FLOTRAN)',5x,'UY (Exact)')
(3x,f5.0,4(1pe17.5))
/com
*vwrite
(4x,'NODE',7x,'X COOR',12x,'Y COOR',9x,'VX (FLOTRAN)',5x,'VX (Exact)')
(3x,f5.0,4(1pe17.5))
/com
*vwrite
(4x,'NODE',7x,'X COOR',12x,'Y COOR',9x,'VY (FLOTRAN)',5x,'VY (Exact)')
(3x,f5.0,4(1pe17.5))
/com
*vwrite
(4x,'NODE',7x,'X COOR',12x,'Y COOR',9x,'PRE (FLOTRAN)',5x,'PRE (Exact)')
(3x,f5.0,4(1pe17.5))
/com
*vwrite
(4x,'NODE',7x,'X COOR',12x,'Y COOR',9x,'TAU (FLOTRAN)',5x,'TAU (Exact)')
(3x,f5.0,4(1pe17.5))
/com
nsel,s,loc,y,H
! select nodes on moving plate
local,11,0,X0,Y0,0
! setup local coord system for moment calcs
rsys,11
/com compute pressure force/moments on the wall
intsrf,pres
*get,forcex,intsrf,0,item,fx
*get,forcey,intsrf,0,item,fy
*get,forcez,intsrf,0,item,fz
*get,momx,intsrf,0,item,mx
*get,momy,intsrf,0,item,my
*get,momz,intsrf,0,item,mz
*status,forcex
*status,forcey
! should be zero
*status,forcez
*status,momx
*status,momy
*status,momz
! Flotran
Moment = -0.0166*mu*thetad*LX**5/H0**3 ! Exact
*status,moment
/com compute shear force/moments on the wall should be zero
intsrf,tauw
*get,forcex,intsrf,0,item,fx
*get,forcey,intsrf,0,item,fy
*get,forcez,intsrf,0,item,fz
*get,momx,intsrf,0,item,mx
*get,momy,intsrf,0,item,my
*get,momz,intsrf,0,item,mz
*status,forcex
! should be zero
*status,forcey
*status,forcez
*status,momx
*status,momy
*status,momz
! should be zero
*enddo
fini
/exit,nosa
93
7.6. ALE/VOF Analysis of a Vessel with a Moving Wall

This problem involves a moving wall and a free surface. A square vessel is half filled with liquid and at
t = 0 the left wall begins to move to the right. The wall stops moving after a short time and the fluid
comes to rest gradually. The total analysis time is 2 seconds. The left wall comes to rest at 0.125 * (time)
= 0.125*(2 seconds) = 0.25 seconds. The left wall displacement and velocity are input as tabular
boundary conditions (see Figure 7.8: Left Wall Displacement and Velocity (p. 95)). The simulation uses
the Volume of Fluid (VOF) method in conjunction with the ALE formulation.
Figure 7.7: Square Vessel with a Moving Wall
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Left
Moving Free Surface
Wall
LX
Right
Stationary
Wall
Liquid
= 1.0
= 1.0
Left
Wall
Free Surface
Stationary
Right
Wall
Stationary
Liquid
LX
t=0
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Free Surface
LXF
t = 0.125 * Time
Steady
Solution
Liquid
t = Time
94
ALE/VOF Analysis of a Vessel with a Moving Wall

Figure 7.8: Left Wall Displacement and Velocity
UX
LX-LXF
0.125 * Time
Time
VX
0.125 * Time
10 -6
(LX-LXF)
0.125 * Time
Time
7.6.2. Results
The initial fluid volume is 1/2 H times LX. Since H and LX are both equal to 1, the initial fluid volume
is 0.500000000. The calculated final fluid volume is 0.499999673.

/BATCH,LIST
/title,ALE-VOF combination - container with moving wall & free surface
/nopr
LX
= 1.0
! Initial width in X direction
NDX
= 10
! Number of X divisions
H
= 1.0
! Height of container
NDY
= 10
! Number of Y divisions
RHO
= 1.0000
! Fluid density
MU
= 1.00
! Fluid viscosity
LXF = 0.750
! Final X-Length
time = 2.
! Total simulation time
nts = 200
! Total number of time steps
delta = time/nts
! Time step size
appf = delta
! Results append frequency
VEL = (LX-LXF)/(0.125*time)
! left wall moves for 12.5% of
! simulation time with velocity VEL
*dim,timutab,table,3,,,time
! left wall displacement history
timutab(1,0)=0,0.125*time,time
timutab(1,1)=0,(LX-LXF),(LX-LXF)
*dim,timvtab,table,4,,,time
! left wall fluid velocity history
timvtab(1,0)=0,0.125*time,0.125*time+0.000001,time
timvtab(1,1)=VEL,VEL,1.e-12,1.e-12
95

/PREP7 $smrt,off
et,1,141
keyopt,1,4,1
esha,2
rect,,LX,,H
lesize,1,,,NDX,-10
lesize,3,,,NDX,-10
lesize,2,,,NDY,
lesize,4,,,NDY,
alls
amesh,all
lsel,s,,,4
nsll,s,1
d,all,VX,%timvtab%
d,all,VY,
d,all,enke,-1
d,all,ux,%timutab%
d,all,uy,0.0
! 2-D XY system
! enable disp DOFs
! Quad elements
! Moving left wall
lsel,s,,,1
nsll,s,1
d,all,vx
d,all,vy
! bottom wall
lsel,s,,,3
nsll,s,1
d,all,vx
d,all,vy
! top
lsel,s,,,2
nsll,s,1
d,all,vx,
d,all,vy,
d,all,ux,0.0
d,all,uy,0.0
wall
! Stationary right wall
alls
nsel,s,loc,y,0,0.5*H
esln,s,1
ice,all,vfrc,1.0
allsel
! select lower half elements

! apply vof initial conditions
fini
/SOLU
FLDA,NOMI,DENS,RHO
FLDA,NOMI,VISC,MU
acel,,9.8
flda,step,sumf,1
flda,solu,tran,t
flda,time,step,delta
flda,time,numb,nts
flda,time,tend,time
flda,time,glob,25
flda,time,appe,appf
flda,solu,ale,t
flda,solu,vof,t
save
SOLVE
fini
! Nominal density
! Nominal viscosity
! Apply gravity loading
! Ale on
! Vof on
!do the comparison here for final fluid volume

/post1
set,last
fvol = 0.
! initialize volume to zero
*do,i,1,NDX*NDY
! loop over elements
n1 = nelem(i,1)
! 4 nodes of this element
n2 = nelem(i,2)
n3 = nelem(i,3)
n4 = nelem(i,4)
96
ALE Analysis of a Moving Cylinder

x1 = nx(n1)+ux(n1)
! current coords of the 4 nodes
y1 = ny(n1)+uy(n1)
x2 = nx(n2)+ux(n2)
y2 = ny(n2)+uy(n2)
x3 = nx(n3)+ux(n3)
y3 = ny(n3)+uy(n3)
x4 = nx(n4)+ux(n4)
y4 = ny(n4)+uy(n4)
evol1 =
x1*y2+y1*x3+y3*x2 ! compute volume of triangle 123
evol1 = evol1-y2*x3-y1*x2-x1*y3
evol1 = abs(0.5*evol1)
! first triangle volume
evol2 =
x1*y4+y1*x3+y3*x4 ! compute volume of triangle 143
evol2 = evol2-y4*x3-y1*x4-x1*y3
evol2 = abs(0.5*evol2)
! second triangle volume
*get,frac,elem,i,nmisc,1
! get VOF of this quad
fvol = fvol + (evol1+evol2)*frac!increment the total fluid volume
*enddo
*status,fvol
! print the final fluid volume
target = 0.5*H*LX
*status,target
! print the expected fluid volume
/com
fini
/exit,nosa
7.7. ALE Analysis of a Moving Cylinder

This problem involves a cylinder passing through a channel with a constant velocity VX = 1.0. FLUID141
triangle elements model the fluid. The simulation uses the ALE formulation and remeshing.
FLDATA39,REMESH,Label,Value specifies the quality requirements shown in the following table.
Table 7.4: Quality Requirements
Element Quality
FLDATA39,REMESH,Label,Value Command
Aspect Ratio (AR)
FLDATA39,REMESH,ARMA,5.0
Change of Element Size (VOCH)
FLDATA39,REMESH,VOCH,3.0
Change of Aspect Ratio (ARCH)
FLDATA39,REMESH,ARCH,3.0
FLDATA39,REMESH,ELEM,ALL sets the remeshing to all defined fluid elements if the quality of the worst
defined element falls below any quality requirement. The total analysis time is 44 seconds.
Figure 7.9: Moving Cylinder
UX = 0
UY = 0
UX = 0
VX = 0
VY = 0
UY = 0
UX = 0,
UY = 0,
VY = 0
VX = 1.0
5
UX = t
= 1.0
= 1.0
12.5
P = 0
UX = 0, UY = 0, VY = 0
47.5
97
7.7.2. Results
The ten results files are file.rfl01 through file.rfl10. They were created when one of the remeshing criteria
were met. The following figures display the remeshed elements at 0, 22, and 44 seconds.
Figure 7.10: Elements at 0 Seconds

/batch,list
/verify,dv-1101c
/title, dv-1101c, Flotran Remeshing: Cylinder pass through a channel
/COM,****************************************************
/COM,* Cylinder pass through a channel (pure fluid flow)
/COM,* Verify partial domain re-meshing
/COM,****************************************************
r1 = 2.5
l1 = 5.0
l2= 20.0
l3=60.0
h = 10.0
rx0= l1+(l2-l1)/2.0
ry0 = h/2.0
98

nl1 = 5
nl3 = 10
nr=8
nc=8
/PREP7
*DEL,_FNCNAME
*DEL,_FNCMTID
*DEL,_FNC_C1
*SET,_FNCNAME,'DIS'
*DIM,_FNC_C1,,1
*SET,_FNC_C1(1),1.0
! /INPUT,force.func
*DIM,%_FNCNAME%,TABLE,6,3,1
!
! Begin of equation: a*{TIME}
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(0,0,1), 0.0, -999
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(2,0,1), 0.0
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(3,0,1), %_FNC_C1(1)%
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(4,0,1), 0.0
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(5,0,1), 0.0
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(6,0,1), 0.0
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(0,1,1), 1.0, -1, 0, 1, 17, 3, 1
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(0,2,1), 0.0, 99, 0, 1, -1, 0, 0
*SET,%_FNCNAME%(0,3,1),
0
! End of equation: a*{TIME}
!-->
RECTNG,0,l1,0,h,
RECTNG,l1,l2,0,h,
RECTNG,l2,l3,0,h,
aglue,all
CYl4,rx0,ry0,0,45,r1,135
CYl4,rx0,ry0,0,135,r1,225
CYl4,rx0,ry0,0,225,r1,315
CYl4,rx0,ry0,0,315,r1,405
asel,s,,,2
asel,a,,,3
asel,a,,,6
asel,a,,,7
allsel,below,area
aglue,all
allsel
FLST,3,4,5,ORDE,3
FITEM,3,2
FITEM,3,8
FITEM,3,-10
ASBA,
4,P51X
aplot
et,1,141
KEYOPT,1,4,1
type,1
mat,1
asel,s,,,1
esize,.5
mshape,1,2d
mshkey,0
amesh,all
et,2,141
KEYOPT,2,4,1
type,2
mat,1
asel,s,,,3
esize,.5
mshape,1,2d
mshkey,0
amesh,all
99

et,3,141
KEYOPT,3,4,1
type,3
mat,1
asel,s,,,5
esize,2.0
mshape,1,2d
mshkey,0
amesh,all
nsel,s,loc,x,0
D,ALL,VX,0.0,
D,ALL,VY, 0.0
D,ALL,UX,0.0,
D,ALL,UY, 0.0
nsel,s,loc,x,l3
D,ALL,pres,0.0
D,ALL,UX,0.0,
D,ALL,UY, 0.0
nsel,s,loc,y,0
D,ALL,vy,0.0
D,ALL,UX,0.0,
D,ALL,UY, 0.0
nsel,s,loc,y,h
D,ALL,vy,0.0
D,ALL,UX,0.0,
D,ALL,UY,0.0,
lsel,s,,,5
lsel,a,,,23
lsel,a,,,25
lsel,a,,,27
nsll,s,1
d,all,UX,%DIS%
d,all,UY,0.0
d,all,VX,1.0
d,all,VY,0.0
allsel
cdwrite,db,fluid,cdb,
fini
! Flotran Setup
/solu
FLDATA30,QUAD,MOMD,2,
FLDATA30,QUAD,MOMS,2,
FLDATA30,QUAD,PRSD,2,
FLDATA30,QUAD,PRES,2,
FLDATA30,QUAD,THRD,0,
FLDATA30,QUAD,THRS,0,
FLDATA30,QUAD,TRBD,0,
FLDATA30,QUAD,TRBS,2,
/solu
FLDATA4,TIME,NUMB,100000,
FLDATA4,TIME,TEND,44.0,
FLDA,SOLU,ALE,T
FLDATA1,SOLU,FLOW,1
FLDATA1,SOLU,TRAN,1
!FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB,1
FLDATA2,TIME,GLOB,5
! ALE solution
FLDATA7,PROT,DENS,CONSTANT
FLDATA8,NOMI,DENS,1.0
FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,CONSTANT
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC,1.0
!FLDA,BULK,BETA,1.0e5
FLDA,TIME,STEP, 2.0
!
!!! Newmark method
!
FLDATA,OUTP,TAUW,T
FLDATA,TIME,METH,NEWM
FLDATA,TIME,DELT,0.5
!
!! Set ANSYS-STRUCTURE commands
100

SAVE
/COM
/COM Re-meshing Commands
/COM
FLDATA,REMESH,ELEM,ALL
FLDATA,REMESH,ARMA,10.0
FLDATA,REMESH,VOCH,5.0
FLDATA,REMESH,ARCH,5.0
SOLVE
SAVE
finish
!
!
!
!
all defined element re-meshing

maximum aspect ratio
maximum volume change
maximum aspect ratio change
101
102
Chapter 8: FLOTRAN Compressible Analyses

As is true with turbulence, activating the compressible algorithm is at your discretion. You should activate
turbulence for virtually all compressible analyses, (although in principle the Reynolds number can be
in the laminar range for high Mach numbers). Differences in results (pressure, density, velocity distributions) between the incompressible and compressible algorithms can exist at Mach numbers as low as
0.3, and are quite pronounced when the Mach number is as high as 0.7.
The speed of sound is a function of the equation of state of the fluid and its absolute temperature. For
a constant density fluid, the speed of sound is infinite. For an ideal gas, regardless of whether the incompressible or compressible solution algorithm is used, the relationship is:
In the preceding equation:

R is the Universal Gas Constant
is the ratio of specific heats (Cp/Cv)
T is the absolute temperature
For 2-D compressible analyses, meshes using quadrilateral elements are highly recommended.
Hexagonal elements are recommended for 3-D cases. For more information, see Structured vs. Unstructured Mesh (p. 105).
The following compressible analysis topics are available:
8.1. Property Calculations
8.3. Structured vs. Unstructured Mesh
8.5. Example of a Compressible Flow Analysis
8.6. Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (GUI Method)
8.7. Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (Command Method)
8.1. Property Calculations

The compressible algorithm takes into account the kinetic energy changes of the fluid as it accelerates.
The formulation is in terms of the total temperature.
In an adiabatic analysis, the total temperature remains constant throughout the problem domain. You
specify the temperature using either of the following methods:
Command(s): FLDATA14,TEMP,TTOT,Value
103
FLOTRAN Compressible Analyses

The conservation of energy is then a balance between thermal storage (static temperature) and kinetic
energy.
The total (stagnation) temperature is the temperature of the fluid after it has been brought isentropically
to a zero velocity. Typically, you choose the conditions at the inlet. Knowledge of the static temperature
and the velocity magnitude |V| at the inlet enables you to calculate the total temperature via the following
equation,
2
o = static +
This relationship is sometimes useful when cast in terms of the Mach number (M):
You must specify the specific heat and the ratio of specific heats . (To enter this ratio, use one of the
following:)
Command(s): FLDATA17,GAMM,COMP,
The ANSYS program uses the resulting static temperature and the absolute pressure to calculate the
density from the equation of state.
Note
Unlike incompressible analyses, where freezing the density calculation for the early global
iterations can be an advantage, compressible analyses automatically involve the variable
density option. Another difference between these types of analysis is that for compressible
analyses, initial properties are calculated from the calculated static temperature, not from
the nominal temperature.

Typically, you will know the Mach number or the velocity or the mass flow along with the static temperature for the inlet. Knowing the velocity or Mach number enables you, using the above equations,
to calculate of the appropriate total temperature. If you know only the mass flow rate, you can approximate the pressure at the inlet by the reference pressure and use it with the equation of state to approximate the inlet density and thus the velocity.
For subsonic problems, the boundary condition strategy is similar to that used for incompressible flow
problems, that is, velocity or pressure at the inlet and pressure at the outlet. For supersonic problems,
however, the nature of the equations changes and the effects of downstream boundary conditions
cannot propagate upstream. It is common in such cases to apply both pressure and velocity to upstream
locations. Leave the downstream boundary unspecified.
Free stream conditions are often applied as far field boundary conditions for external flow problems.
Often specification of pressure at these boundaries helps. However, as the solution develops, phenomena
such as shock waves propagate to these boundaries. In this case, you should remove the boundary
104
Solution Strategies
conditions. Failure to do so could adversely affect the resultant mass balance. Also, if the boundary is
too close to the region of interest (e.g. the airfoil the flow is moving past), the velocity solution near
the boundary will tend to be greater than the free stream velocity. In such cases, a better choice for
the velocity boundary conditions is the symmetry condition (only specify the velocity normal to the
boundary as zero).
If the problem is thermal, ANSYS takes all of the applied boundary conditions to be total temperature,
not static temperature. Conversely, if a problem is adiabatic, thermal boundary conditions are ignored.
If you use a thermal incompressible solution as a starting point for a thermal compressible problem,
you must change the boundary conditions so that they are specified in terms of total temperature.
8.3. Structured vs. Unstructured Mesh

As noted at the beginning of this chapter, for 2-D compressible flow problems, quadrilateral mesh is
the best to use. Consider Figure 8.1: Three Types of Meshing (p. 105):
Figure 8.1: Three Types of Meshing
(a) Quadrilateral mesh, (b) Triangular mesh with a random pattern, (c) Triangular mesh
with a symmetrical pattern
In 2-D compressible analyses, mesh (a), the quadrilateral mesh, produces the most accurate results.
Mesh (b) yields 2-D, not 1-D results, and mesh (c) yields 1-D results.
Similarly, in a 3-D compressible analysis, a hexagonal mesh (the equivalent of quadrilateral mesh in 2D) produces the best results. A tetrahedral mesh with a random pattern (the 3-D equivalent of mesh
(b)) yields only 3-D results, not 1-D. And a tetrahedral symmetric mesh, the 3-D equivalent of mesh (c),
gives you 1-D results.

You must solve compressible analyses as pseudo-transient or transient problems. This is due to the
non-elliptic nature of supersonic problems. The pseudo-transient approach is quite adequate when the
time-history of the developing transient is not of interest. In that approach, you apply inertial relaxation
to the pressure equation (see Inertial Relaxation (p. 106)).
For an ideal gas, the density is always calculated from an equation of state involving the absolute
pressure and the absolute temperature. Because of this, you must prevent negative values of absolute
pressure and absolute static temperature from being encountered during the iterative process, as these
would lead to a negative density. One way to do this is to use a converged incompressible solution as
a starting point. Another way is to use capping to specify a minimum FLOTRAN (relative) pressure. For
example, to keep the absolute pressure at a minimum of 1 psi, you would cap the relative pressure at
105

-13.7 psi for a reference pressure of 14.7 psi. Capping is not a stability control and by itself it will not
control the solution progression. It only helps prevent negative properties.
Artificial viscosity helps to prevent negative temperatures. You set it at the beginning of the analysis,
and must reduce it slowly for subsequent continuations of the analysis. You will probably encounter
divergence if you increase the viscosity between runs. The magnitude of the artificial viscosity required
can vary greatly. The smaller the starting value, the fewer the global iterations required. But if it is not
large enough, you may encounter negative static temperatures. You can use the laminar and effective
viscosities to gauge a good starting value. It is typically a couple orders of magnitude higher than the
effective viscosity, which in turn is initialized as a multiple of the laminar value. Generally, a value 3 or
4 orders of magnitude higher than the laminar viscosity is a good approximate starting point.
In a compressible problem, the final answer would be a function of the artificial viscosity if it were not
removed. Therefore, after stability has been achieved, gradually remove the artificial viscosity during
repeated analysis continuations.
8.4.1. Inertial Relaxation

Inertial relaxation helps to stabilize a solution by increasing the magnitude of the main diagonal of the
matrix equation along with a corresponding increase in the forcing function. Values used are generally
between 1.0 x 10-3 (less relaxation) and 1.0 x 10-6 (more relaxation) for pressure. The smaller values
provide more diagonal dominance and thus equation stability. The cost of this is slower convergence
since it de-emphasizes the influence of the cross-coupling terms present in the equations.
Unlike artificial viscosity, the inertial relaxation does not affect the answer if the problem is converged
and thus does not have to be removed. It is best to reduce the magnitude to the range of 1 x 10-4 later
in the analysis. You can measure the effectiveness of the relaxation by observing the performance of
the parameter RTR in the Jobname.DBG file.
All the techniques discussed so far involve the steady state algorithm. It is common for supersonic
problems, even if they are posed as steady state to be solved with the transient algorithm. An initial
velocity field can be imposed as a first guess. The inertial relaxation acts similarly to the transient algorithm and its use is considered redundant in transient analyses. Do note that problems involving
moving shocks may lead to inaccurate solutions when using the transient algorithm. With the current
set of governing partial differential equations and the discretization techniques used, the transient algorithm has demonstrated solutions that are qualitatively correct but may yield quantitatively inaccurate
results.
8.5. Example of a Compressible Flow Analysis

8.5.1. The Example Described
This example evaluates compressible flow in a converging-diverging nozzle. The nozzle is axisymmetric
with inlet, throat, and outlet radii of 2.432 cm, 0.5 cm and 0.80 cm, respectively. The nozzle inlet pressure
is given as 6.13769e+6 dynes/cm2.
8.5.1.1. Fluid Properties

The analysis uses density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, and specific heat properties for air in units of
cm-g-sec.
106
Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (GUI Method)
8.5.1.2. Approach and Assumptions

The compressible flow analysis is a turbulent analysis that uses the FLUID141 2-D Fluid-Thermal element.
The analysis assumes atmospheric pressure conditions at the outlet. It assumes a stagnation temperature
of 550 K.
Inlet and outlet pressure boundary conditions are set to 6.13769e+6 dynes/cm2 and 0, respectively. The
VY velocity component is set to 0 along the axis of symmetry and the VX and VY velocity components
are set to 0 along the outer surface.
The analysis starts with 20 iterations at an artificial viscosity of 10. It then continues for 20 iterations at
artificial viscosity values of 1, .1, .01, .001, .0001, and .00001 to give a total of 140 iterations. The analysis
then continues for another 160 iterations at an artificial viscosity of 0. After 300 iterations of slowly reducing the viscosity to 0, the analysis continues for 100 iterations with increased momentum and
pressure inertial relaxation factors. Finally, the analysis converges to a final solution with the momentum
and pressure inertial relaxation factors increased to higher values for 400 iterations.
8.6. Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (GUI Method)

You perform the following steps to analyze the converging diverging nozzle using the GUI Method.
Step 1: Establish an Analysis Title and Preferences

1. Choose Utility Menu> File> Change Title. The Change Title dialog box appears.
2. Enter the text "Compressible Flow in a Converging Diverging Nozzle."
3. Click on OK.
4. Choose Main Menu> Preferences. The Preferences for GUI Filtering dialog box appears.
5. Click the button for FLOTRAN CFD to "On."
6. Click on OK.
Step 2: Define Element Types

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Element Type> Add/Edit/Delete. The Element Types dialog box
appears.
2. Click on Add. The Library of Element Types dialog box appears.
3. In the two scrollable lists, highlight (click on) "FLOTRAN CFD" and "2D FLOTRAN 141."
4. Click on OK. ANSYS returns you to the Element Types dialog box.
5. Click on Close.
Step 3: Create Keypoints

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Keypoints> In Active CS. The Create Keypoints
in Active Coordinate System dialog box appears.
107

2. In the "Keypoint number (NPT)" field enter 1 and in the "Location in active CS (X and Y)" fields enter 0
and 2.432, respectively. Click on Apply.
3. Repeat the previous substep for the following sets of keypoint numbers and (X, Y) locations: 2 (0, 0), 3
(1, 2.432), 4 (1, 0), 5 (2, 2.232), 6 (2, 0), 7 (5, 0), 8 (5, 0.7), 9 (6, 0), 10 (6, 0.5), 11 (14, 0), 12 (14, 0.8). After
entering each set, click on Apply. After entering the last set, click on OK.
4. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
Step 4: Create Lines

1. Choose Utility Menu> PlotCtrls> Numbering. The Plot Numbering Controls dialog box appears.
2. Click the button for "Line Numbers (LINE)" to "On" and click OK.
3. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> In Active Coord. The Lines in
Active Coord picking menu appears.
4. Pick the keypoint numbers 2 and 4 and click on Apply.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the following sets of keypoint numbers: 3 and 4; 1 and 3; 1 and 2; and 5 and
8. After entering each set, click on Apply. After entering the last set, click on OK.
6. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Tan to 2 Lines. The Line Tangent
to 2 Lines picking menu appears.
7. Pick line number 3 and click on Apply. The Line Tangent to 2 Lines picking menu reappears.
8. Pick keypoint number 3 and click on Apply. The Line Tangent to 2 Lines picking menu reappears.
10. Pick keypoint number 5 and click on OK.
12. Pick the keypoint numbers 10 and 12 and click on OK.
13. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Lines> Lines> Tan to 2 Lines. The Line Tangent
to 2 Lines picking menu appears.
15. Pick keypoint number 8 and click on Apply. The Line Tangent to 2 Lines picking menu reappears.
17. Pick keypoint number 10 and click on OK.
19. Pick the keypoint numbers 4 and 6 and click on Apply.
108

20. Enter the following sets of keypoint number by repeating steps 18 and 19: 6 and 7; 7 and 9; and 9 and
11. After entering each set, click on Apply. After entering the last set, click on OK.
Step 5: Create Areas

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Areas> Arbitrary> Through KPs. The Create
Area thru KPs picking menu appears.
2. Pick the keypoint numbers (2, 4, 3, 1) and click on Apply.
3. Repeat the previous substep for the following sets of keypoint numbers: (4, 6, 5, 3), (6, 7, 8, 5), (7, 9, 10,
8), and (9, 11, 12, 10). After entering each set, click on Apply. After entering the last set, click on OK.
4. Click on SAVE_DB on the ANSYS Toolbar.
Step 6: Define Scalar Parameters

1. Choose Utility Menu> Parameters> Scalar Parameters. The Scalar Parameters dialog box appears.
2. Type in the parameter values shown below. (Press ENTER after entering each value.)
ntran = 24
rtran = 10
na = 10
nb = 10
nc = 25
nd = 10
ne = 100
re = -1.5
3. Click on Close to close the dialog box.
Step 7: Mesh the Model

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Size Cntrls> Lines> Picked Lines. The Element Size on
Picked Lines picking menu appears.
2. Pick line number 4 and click on Apply. The Element Sizes on Picked Lines dialog box appears.
3. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter ntran, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter
rtran. Click on Apply.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for line number 2.
6. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter ntran, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter
1/rtran. Click on Apply.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for line numbers 14, 15, and 16.
9. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter na, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter 1.
Click on Apply.
109

12. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter nb, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter 1.
Click on Apply.
15. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter nc, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter 1.
Click on Apply.
18. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter nd, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter 1.
Click Apply.
21. In the "No. of element divisions (NDIV)" field, enter ne, and in the "Spacing ratio (SPACE)" field enter re.
Click on Apply.
22. Repeat steps 20 and 21 for line number 12 but this time click OK.
23. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh> Areas> Mapped> 3 or 4 sided. A picking menu
appears.
24. Click on Pick All. The meshed model appears.
Step 8: Compress Numbers

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Numbering Ctrls> Compress Numbers. The Compress Numbers
dialog box appears.
2. Select Nodes as the "Item to be compressed" and click on Apply.
3. Select Elements as the "Item to be compressed" and click on OK.
Step 9: Apply Boundary Conditions

1. Choose Utility Menu> Select> Entities. The Select Entities dialog box appears.
2. Choose "Lines" and "By Num/Pick," then click on OK. A Select Lines picking menu appears.
3. Choose Utility Menu> Plot>Lines.
4. Pick lines 1, 9, 10, 11, and 12 and click on OK.
110

6. Choose "Nodes" and "Attached to," click on Lines, all, and then click on OK.
7. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Velocity> On Nodes.
The Apply V on Nodes picking menu appears.
8. Click on Pick All. The Velocity Constraints on Nodes dialog box appears.
9. In the "Velocity component (VY)" field, enter 0, and click on OK.
11. Choose "Lines" and "By Num/Pick," then click on the Sele All button. Click on OK. The Select Lines picking
menu appears.
12. Pick line number 4 and click on OK.
15. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Pressure DOF> On
Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears.
16. Click on Pick All. The Pressure Constraint on Nodes dialog box appears.
17. In the "Pressure value (PRES)" field, enter 6.13769e+6, and click on OK.
18. Choose Utility Menu> Select> Entities.
19. Choose "Lines" and "By Num/Pick," then click on the Sele All button. Click on OK. The Select Lines picking
menu appears.
20. Pick line numbers 3, 5, 6, 7, and 8 and click on OK.
21. Choose Utility Menu> Select> Entities.
23. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Velocity> On Nodes.
The Apply V on Nodes picking menu appears.
24. Click on Pick All. The Velocity Constraints on Nodes dialog box appears.
25. In the "Velocity component (VX)" field and in the "Velocity component (VY)" enter 0, and click on OK.
27. Choose "Lines" and "By Num/Pick," click on the Sele All button, and then click on OK. The Select Lines
picking menu appears.
28. Pick line number 16 and click on OK.
111

31. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Pressure DOF> On
Nodes. The Apply PRES on Nodes picking menu appears.
32. Click on Pick All. The Pressure Constraint on Nodes dialog box appears.
33. In the "Pressure value (PRES)" field, enter 0, and click on OK.
Step 10: Set Fluid Properties

1. Choose Utility Menu> Select> Everything.
2. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid Properties. The Fluid Properties dialog
box appears.
3. Set the "Density (DENS)," "Viscosity (VISC)," "Conductivity (COND)," and "Specific heat (SPHT)" fields to
AIR-CM.
4. Set the "Allow density variations?" field to yes.
5. Click on Apply. The CFD Flow Properties dialog box appears.
6. Read the information about how coefficients will be calculated, and click on OK.
Step 11: Set Flow Environment Parameters

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Ref Conditions. The
Reference Conditions dialog box appears.
2. Set the "Reference pressure (REFE)" field to 1.01325e+6 and the "Nominal temperature (NOMI)" and
"Stagnation (total) temperature (TTOT)" fields to 550, and then click on OK.
Step 12: Set Solution Options and CFD Solver Controls

1. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Solution Options. The FLOTRAN Solution Options
dialog box appears.
2. Set the "Laminar or turbulent (TURB)" field to Turbulent and the "Incompress or compress (COMP)" field
to Compressible. Click OK.
3. Choose Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Contr> PRES Solver CFD. The
PRES Solver CFD dialog box appears.
4. Choose Precond conj res.
5. Click on OK. The Semi Direct Solver Options for Pressure dialog box appears.
6. In the "Convergence criterion" field, enter 1.e-12, and click on OK.
Step 13: Solve

1. Choose Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Prop Relaxation. The Property
Relaxation dialog box appears.
2. Set the "Density relaxation" field to 1.0 and click on OK.
112

3. Choose Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> MIR Stabilization. The Modified
Inertial Relaxation (MIR) dialog box appears.
4. Set the MIR values for the momentum and turbulence equations to 0.2
5. Choose Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Stability Parms. The Stability
Parameters dialog box appears.
6. Set the "Momentum inertia" field to 1.0, the "Pressure inertia" field to 1.e-4, and the "Artificial viscosity"
field to 10, and then click on OK.
7. Choose Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Execution Ctrl. The Steady State Control Settings
dialog box appears.
8. Set the "Global iterations (EXEC) field to 20 and click on OK.
9. Choose Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN.
10. After 20 iterations finish, the Solution is done message appears. Close it. Choose Main Menu> Solution>
FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Stability Parms. The Stability Parameters dialog box appears.
11. Set the "Artificial viscosity" field to 1 and click on OK.
13. Repeat the previous 3 substeps and continue to reduce the "Artificial viscosity" to .1, .01, .001, .0001, and
.00001.
14. After 140 total iterations finish, the Solution is done message appears. Close it. Choose Main Menu>
Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Stability Parms. The Stability Parameters dialog box
appears.
15. Set the "Artificial viscosity" field to 0 and click on OK.
dialog box appears.
appears.
20. Set the "Momentum inertia" field to 10, the "Pressure inertia" field to 1.e-2, and then click on OK.
dialog box appears.
113

appears.
25. Set the "Momentum inertia" field to 1e+15, the "Pressure inertia" field to 1.e+15, and then click on OK.
dialog box appears.
28. Choose Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN. When the Solution is done message appears, close it.
29. Click QUIT on the ANSYS Toolbar. Choose an exit option and click OK.
8.7. Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (Command Method)

You issue the following ANSYS commands to perform a compressible flow analysis of the converging
diverging nozzle. Text preceded by an exclamation point (!) is a comment.
/title, Compressible Flow in a Converging Diverging Nozzle
/prep7
!
! Assign Element Type
!
et,1,141
!
! Create the Model Geometry
!
/pnum,line,1
k,1,0,2.432
k,2,0,0
k,3,1,2.432
k,4,1,0
k,5,2,2.232
k,6,2,0
k,7,5,0
k,8,5,.7
k,9,6,0
k,10,6,.5
k,11,14,0
k,12,14,.8
l,2,4
l,3,4
l,1,3
l,1,2
l,5,8
l2tan,3,5
l,10,12
l2tan,5,7
l,4,6
l,6,7
l,7,9
l,9,11
a,2,4,3,1
a,4,6,5,3
a,6,7,8,5
a,7,9,10,8
a,9,11,12,10
!
! !Mesh the Model and Compress Numbers
!
ntran=24
rtran=10
na=10
nb=10
114
Doing the Example Compressible Flow Analysis (Command Method)

nc=25
nd=10
ne=100
re=-1.5
lesize,4,,,ntran,rtran
lesize,2,,,ntran,rtran
lesize,13,,,ntran,1/rtran
lesize,1,,,na
lesize,3,,,na
lesize,6,,,nb
lesize,9,,,nb
lesize,5,,,nc
lesize,10,,,nc
lesize,8,,,nd
lesize,11,,,nd
lesize,7,,,ne,re
lesize,12,,,ne,re
amesh,all
numcmp,node
numcmp,elem
!
! Apply Boundary Conditions
!
lsel,s,,,1
lsel,a,,,9,12,1
nsll,,1
d,all,vy,0
lsel,all
lsel,s,,,4
nsll,,1
d,all,pres,6.13769e+6
lsel,all
lsel,s,,,3
lsel,a,,,5,8,1
nsll,,1
d,all,vx,0
d,all,vy,0
lsel,all
lsel,s,,,16
nsll,,1
d,all,pres,0
!
! Set Fluid Properties
!
alls
/solu
flda,prot,dens,air-cm
flda,prot,visc,air-cm
flda,prot,cond,air-cm
flda,prot,spht,air-cm
flda,vary,dens,t
!
! Set Flow Environment Parameters
!
flda,pres,refe,1.01325e+6
flda,temp,ttot,550
flda,temp,nomi,550
!
! Set Solution Options and CFD Solver Controls
!
flda,solu,turb,t
flda,solu,comp,t
flda,meth,pres,3
flda,conv,pres,1e-12
!
! Solve
!
flda,relx,dens,1
flda,mir,mome,0.2
115

flda,mir,turb,0.2
flda,stab,mome,1
flda,stab,pres,1e-4
flda,stab,visc,10
flda,iter,exec,20
solve
flda,stab,visc,1
solve
flda,stab,visc,.1
solve
flda,stab,visc,.01
solve
flda,stab,visc,.001
solve
flda,stab,visc,.0001
solve
flda,stab,visc,.00001
solve
flda,stab,visc,0
flda,iter,exec,160
solve
flda,stab,mome,10
flda,stab,pres,1e-2
flda,iter,exec,100
solve
flda,stab,mome,1e+15
flda,stab,pres,1e+15
flda,iter,exec,400
solve
116
Chapter 9: Specifying Fluid Properties for FLOTRAN

Every flow analysis requires the fluid properties density and viscosity. Thermal analyses, in addition, require the fluid's thermal conductivity as well as specific heat. Volume of Fluid (VOF) analyses, in addition,
might require the fluid properties surface tension coefficient and wall static contact angle. You specify
fluid properties using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid Properties
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid Properties
The command shown above simply sets the fluid property type. After choosing the property type, you
may have to set values.
To specify non-fluid properties (density, specific heat, and thermal conductivity), use one of the following:
Command(s): MP
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Other> Change Mat Props> Polynomial
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Thermal> Density
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Thermal> Specific Heat
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Material Props> Material Models> Thermal> Conductivity> Isotropic
Main Menu> Solution> Other> Change Mat Props> Polynomial
Non-fluid thermal conductivities can vary with temperature. Orthotropic variation of non-fluid thermal
conductivity also is supported. For further information, see the descriptions of the MP and MPDATA
commands, and related commands.
ANSYS provides no default values for density or viscosity properties. This prevents default properties
from putting the analysis into an unexpected flow regime.
A value of -1 will appear in the user interface for properties that must be set. If you submit an analysis
without setting these properties, an error message results and you will be reminded that you must
specify properties.
The following fluid property topics are available:
9.1. Fluid Property Types
9.2. Initializing and Varying Properties
9.3. Modifying the Fluid Property Database
9.4. Using Reference Properties
9.5. Using the ANSYS Non-Newtonian Flow Capabilities
9.6. Using User-Programmable Subroutines
9.1. Fluid Property Types

A "fluid property type" defines how the particular fluid property will vary with temperature (and pressure,
in the case of density for a gas). You choose the fluid property type separately for density, viscosity,
thermal conductivity, specific heat, surface tension coefficient, and wall static contact angle.
117
Specifying Fluid Properties for FLOTRAN

You must use a consistent set of units for all the data that you enter. All thermal quantities must have
the same energy unit as shown in the following table:
Table 9.1: Units for Thermal Quantities
Thermal Quantity
Units
Thermal Conductivity
energy/length-temperature-time
Specific Heat
energy/mass-temperature
Heat Flux
energy/length2-time
Volumetric Heat Source
energy/length3-time
Heat Transfer Coefficient
energy/length2-temperature-time
Except for incompressible flow analyses including viscous heating, you can use any energy unit as long
as you use the same unit for all thermal quantities. The metric and English property types defined below
use joules and BTUs, respectively, as the energy unit for thermal conductivity and specific heat. For an
incompressible analysis including viscous heating, you must use the energy unit for the system as shown
in the following table:
Table 9.2: Energy Units for Incompressible Analyses with Viscous Heating
System
Energy Unit[1]
SI (meter-kg-sec)
Joule
CGS (cm-g-sec)
Erg
mm-g-sec
Centi-erg
U. S. Customary (ft-slugsec)
lbf-ft
PSI
lbf-in
1. 1 Joule = 1.0E9 Centi-ergs; 1 BTU = 778.26 lbf-ft.

The following property type topics are available:
9.1.1. Property Types for Specific Heat
9.1.2. Property Types for Density and Thermal Conductivity
9.1.3. Property Types for Viscosity
9.1.4. Property Types for Surface Tension Coefficient
9.1.5. Property Types for Wall Static Contact Angle
9.1.6. General Guidelines for Setting Property Types
9.1.7. Density
9.1.8. Viscosity
9.1.9. Specific Heat
9.1.10.Thermal Conductivity
9.1.11. Surface Tension Coefficient
9.1.12. Wall Static Contact Angle
9.1.1. Property Types for Specific Heat

For specific heat, you can choose among the following property types: CONSTANT, CMIX, TABLE, userdefined through a file (floprp.ans), user-programmable subroutine (USER), and the variations of AIR
shown below in Table 9.3: Units for the AIR Property Type (p. 119).
118
Fluid Property Types
9.1.2. Property Types for Density and Thermal Conductivity

For density and thermal conductivity, the property types you can choose are CONSTANT, CMIX, TABLE,
GAS, LIQUID, user-defined through a file (floprp.ans), and the variations of AIR shown below. (To
learn how to add more, see Modifying the Fluid Property Database (p. 127).) A user-programmable
subroutine (USER) also is available. For density only, you have one other property type option: CGAS.
Table 9.3: Units for the AIR Property Type
PROT
AIR
AIR-SI
Units
meter-kg-sec
meter-kg-sec
Pressure Units
Pascals
Pascals
AIR-CM
cm-g-sec
dynes/cm
AIR-MM
mm-g-sec
Pascals
AIR-FT
AIR-IN
ft-slug-sec
2
in-(lbf-s /in)-sec
lbf/ft
psi
Density Units
Viscosity Units
kg/m
kg/m-sec
kg/m
kg/m-sec
g/cm-sec (poise)
g/cm
g/mm3
slugs/ft
g/mm-sec
3
lbf-sec /in
slug/ft-sec
4
lbf-s/in2
ANSYS automatically supplies for you, in the property database, the relevant input for the AIR property
types.
9.1.3. Property Types for Viscosity

For viscosity, you can choose the property types CMIX, TABLE, CONSTANT, LIQUID, GAS, Power Law
(POWL), Bingham (BING), Carreau (CARR), user-defined through a file (floprp.ans), and a user-programmable subroutine (USER or USRV). The AIR and GAS property types assume that the fluid is an
ideal gas with constant specific heat. The viscosity and thermal conductivity variations with temperature
are assumed to follow Sutherland's laws for gases, the form of which is shown below. A LIQUID assumes
up to a second order polynomial for the variation of density with temperature, a constant value for
specific heat, and Sutherland's laws for a liquid for viscosity and thermal conductivity.
Viscosity as a function of the velocity gradient is represented by the non-Newtonian viscosity types:
Power Law, Bingham, and Carreau. Refer to Using the ANSYS Non-Newtonian Flow Capabilities (p. 130)
for more information.
9.1.4. Property Types for Surface Tension Coefficient

For surface tension coefficient, you can choose among the following property types: CONSTANT, LIQUID,
and user-programmable subroutine (USER).
9.1.5. Property Types for Wall Static Contact Angle

For wall static contact angle, CONSTANT is the only valid property type.
9.1.6. General Guidelines for Setting Property Types

You must use a consistent set of units (the gravitational constant gc must be unity.) Of course, the
proper length unit must be assumed when building the finite element model. Additional choices are
available for air as per the table shown below. Units for density are simply mass/volume; the table omits
them.
Set the property type using the following:
119

Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,Label,Value
For Label, you specify one of the following: DENS (density), VISC (viscosity), COND (thermal conductivity), SPHT (specific heat), or SFTS (surface tension coefficient).
For Value, you specify any of the property types listed in Table 9.4: Property types for Value (p. 121),
or you can specify a table of fluid properties. To specify a table, enclose the table name in percent signs
(%) (for example, FLDATA7,PROT,DENS,%Table%).
9.1.6.1. Using a Fluid Property Table

If working interactively, you define a new table prior to using the table to apply loads. You can define
a table interactively via the Utility Menu> Parameters> Array Parameters> Define/Edit menu path,
or in batch mode via the *DIM command. If working interactively, you will be asked to define the table
through a series of dialog boxes. If working in batch mode, you need to define the table before issuing
any of the loading commands.
For more information on defining tables, see the discussion of table array parameters in the ANSYS
Parametric Design Language Guide.
When you define the table, you can define the following primary variables:
Temperature (TEMP)
Pressure (PRESSURE)
Time (TIME)
X-coordinate (X)
Y-coordinate (Y)
Z-coordinate (Z)
Velocity (VELOCITY)
Reference X-coordinate (Xr) (ALE formulation only)
Reference Y-coordinate (Yr) (ALE formulation only)
Reference Z-coordinate (Zr) (ALE formulation only)
The valid labels used by the *DIM command are shown in parentheses.
If you need to specify a variable other than one of the primary variables listed, you can do so by defining
an independent variable. To specify an independent variable, define an additional table for the independent variable. That table must have the same name as the independent variable and can be a
function of either a primary variable or another independent variable.
120
9.1.6.2. Specifying Property Types

The following table describes the property types that you can specify.
Table 9.4: Property types for Value
Property Type
Argument
Constant properties
CONSTANT
Gas properties
GAS
Liquid properties
LIQUID
Table of property values and corresponding temperature values (which you

enter using the MPDATAand MPTEMP commands)
TABLE
Air properties in units of meter-kg-sec
AIR or AIR-SI
Air properties in units of meter-kg-sec, with pressure set to the reference

pressure for the evaluation of density
AIR_B or AIRSI_B
Air properties in units of cm-g-sec
AIR-CM
Air properties in units of cm-g-sec, with pressure set to the reference pressure AIR-CM_B
for the evaluation of density
Air properties in units of mm-g-sec
AIR-MM
Air properties in units of mm-g-sec, with pressure set to the reference pressure AIR-MM_B
Air properties in units of fl-slug-sec
AIR-FT
Air properties in unites of fl-slug-sec, with pressure set to the reference pressureAIR-FT_B
Air properties in units of in-(lbf-s**2/in)-sec (results in units of psi for pressure) AIR-IN
Air properties in units of in-(lbf-s**2/in)-sec (results in units of psi for pressure), AIR-IN_B
with pressure set to the reference pressure for the evaluation of density
Power Law non-Newtonian viscosity type
POWL
Carreau non-Newtonian viscosity type
CARR
Bingham non-Newtonian viscosity type
BING
Property is mass fraction average of the species component
CMIX
User-programmable via subroutines:UserVisLaw for viscosityUserSpht for specific heatUserDens for densityUserCond for conductivityUserSfts for surface
tension
USER
A variation of ideal gas law based on species mass fractions. Available for
density only.
CGAS
Once you choose property types, you do not need to specify any coefficients for the properties. If the
characters _B are added to these property types (as in the AIR types listed above), the pressure in the
ideal gas law calculation is at a constant density corresponding to atmospheric pressure. The length
and time units of conductivity and specific heat must be consistent with the rest of the properties. The
energy units in these quantities are unrestricted.
If using property types CONSTANT, GAS, or LIQUID, you must specify property coefficients. To do so,
either issue the commands shown below or choose one of the following menu paths:
121

Command(s): FLDATA8,NOMI,Label,Value FLDATA9,COF1,Label,Value FLDATA10,COF2,Label,Value FLDATA11,COF3,Label,Value
If you use the commands, you enter the property in the Label field of each command and enter the
value itself in each command's Value field.
The format of the equations for GAS and LIQUID input is oriented towards calculating constants based
on chosen data points. All cases take COF1 to be the absolute temperature at which the chosen property
has the value set by NOMI. (Using Reference Properties (p. 129) discusses the use of relative temperatures
and an offset temperature to calculate absolute temperatures.) This is not used in the COF1 specification;
COF1 should always be an absolute temperature.
Once values are inserted into the relationships below for NOMI and COF1, the values of COF2 and COF3,
if necessary, follow from knowledge of one or two additional data points, respectively. When calculating
COF2 and COF3 for GAS and LIQUID property types, you must use absolute temperatures and pressures
in these relationships. If COF1 is set to zero, the property will become constant at the value set by NOMI.
For GAS and LIQUID property types, the specific heat is constant and therefore the parameters COF1,
COF2 and COF3 are not needed. For viscosity types Power Law, Bingham, and Carreau, NOMI, COF1,
COF2, and COF3 have different interpretations. This is discussed in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference
and in Viscosity (p. 123).
9.1.7. Density
If the property type choice is CONSTANT, then set the constant value of the property using the
FLDATA8,NOMI command or the equivalent menu path. For example, you set the density to 1.205 via:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,DENS,1.205
If the property type is GAS, the ideal gas law is used for the density. You specify density for this choice
as:
Density = NOMI * (P/COF2) / (T/COF1)
If the choice is LIQUID, then a second order polynomial as a function of temperature is used for density.
Density = NOMI + COF2*(T - COF1) + COF3*(T - COF1)2
If the property type is CMIX, then:
= i i
i=1
In the equation shown above, N is the defined number of species, Yi is the mass fraction of the ith
species, and i is the density of the ith species.
If the property is CGAS, then:
122
In the CGAS equation shown above, N is the defined number of species, Yi is the mass fraction of the
ith species, Mi is the molecular weight of the ith species, R is the universal gas constant, and P is the
absolute pressure.
If the property type is TABLE, the density is interpolated linearly between the data points provided via
the MPTEMP or MPDATA commands (or their GUI equivalents).
If the choice is USER, the density is computed in the user-programmable subroutine UserDens. The four
coefficients NOMI, COF1, COF2, and COF3 are available in this routine.
9.1.8. Viscosity
FLDATA8,NOMI command or the equivalent menu path. For example, you set the viscosity to 1.205
via:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC,1.205
If the choice is GAS, Sutherland's law for gases is used for viscosity. You can enter the parameters NOMI,
COF1, and COF2.
The ideal gas constant R is defined as (COF2/NOMI*COF1)
Viscosity ("Property"):
Property/NOMI = (T/COF1)1.5 * (COF1 + COF2)/(T + COF2)
As an example of using this relationship, suppose that there are two data points available for the calculation of viscosity as a function of temperature:
Viscosity = 4.18 x 10-5 at T = 760
Viscosity = 5.76 x 10-5 at T = 1010
Consider the first data point as the nominal value. This means that NOMI = 4.18 x 10-5 and COF1 = 760.
Using these in the Sutherland relationship yields:
Property/4.18 x 10-5 = (T/760)1.5 (760 + COF2)/(T + COF2)
Use the remaining data point to calculate COF2 by setting "Property" to 5.76 x 10-5 and T = 1010. Thus,
the constants are calculated from the data points.
If the choice is LIQUID, then Sutherland's liquid law is used for the viscosity.
Viscosity ("Property"):
Property/NOMI = EXP{COF2*(1/T - 1/COF1) + COF3(1/T - 1/COF1)2}
123

If the choice is POWL, then the non-Newtonian Power Law model is used for the viscosity:
(COF3-1)
(COF3-1)
If the choice is BING, then the non-Newtonian Bingham model is used for the viscosity:
If the choice is CARR, the non-Newtonian Carreau model is used for the viscosity:

2
N
= i i
i=
species, and i is the viscosity of the ith species.
If the choice is USRV or USER, then the viscosity is computed in the user programmable subroutine
UserVisLaw. The four coefficients NOMI, COF1, COF2, and COF3 are available in this routine.
9.1.9. Specific Heat

FLDATA8,NOMI command or the equivalent menu path. For example, you set the specific heat to 1.205
via:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,SPHT,1.205
If the choice is USER, specify specific heat via user-programmable subroutine UserSpht. For specific
heat, NOMI, COF1, COF2, and COF3 are available in the user-programmable subroutine UserSpht.

= p
=
124

species, and
is the specific heat of the ith species.
If the property type is TABLE, the specific heat is interpolated linearly between the data points provided
via the MPTEMP or MPDATA commands (or their GUI equivalents).
9.1.10. Thermal Conductivity

FLDATA8,NOMI command or the equivalent menu path. For example, you set the thermal conductivity
to 1.205 via:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,COND,1.205
If the choice is GAS, Sutherland's law for gases is used for conductivity. You can enter the parameters
NOMI, COF1, and COF2.
The ideal gas constant R is defined as (COF2/NOMI*COF1)
Thermal Conductivity ("Property"):
Property/NOMI = (T/COF1)1.5 * (COF1 + COF2)/(T + COF2)
If the choice is LIQUID, then Sutherland's liquid law is used for conductivity.
Thermal Conductivity ("Property"):
Property/NOMI = EXP{COF2*(1/T - 1/COF1) + COF3(1/T - 1/COF1)2}
N
=1
species, and Ki is the conductivity of the ith species.
If the choice is USER, then the thermal conductivity is computed in the user programmable subroutine
UserCond. The four coefficients NOMI, COF1, COF2, and COF3 are available in this routine.
9.1.11. Surface Tension Coefficient

FLDATA8,NOMI command or the equivalent menu path. For example, you set the surface tension
coefficient to 73.0 via:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,SFTS,73.0
125

If the choice is LIQUID, then a second order polynomial as a function of temperature is used for surface
tension coefficient.
Surface tension coefficient = NOMI + COF2*(T - COF1) + COF3*(T - COF1)2
If the choice is USER, the surface tension coefficient is computed in the user-programmable subroutine
UserSfts. The four coefficients NOMI, COF1, COF2, and COF3 are available in this routine.
9.1.12. Wall Static Contact Angle

To set the constant value use the FLDATA8,NOMI command or the equivalent menu path. For example,
set the wall static contact angle to 120.0 degrees via:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,WSCA,120.0
The wall static contact angle defaults to 90 degrees. Angles less than 90 degrees describe an adhesive
wall condition and angles between 90 and 180 degrees describe a nonadhesive wall condition. In reality,
the angle is not only a material property of the fluid, but also depends on the local fluid and wall conditions. FLOTRAN treats it as a single input constant for simplicity.
9.2. Initializing and Varying Properties

When an analysis begins, Mechanical APDL calculates properties based on the specified property type
and the appropriate constants. To set the initial temperature, choose one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA14,TEMP,NOMI,Value
You can choose to treat this temperature as an absolute or a relative temperature. If it is a relative
temperature, the difference between the relative and the absolute temperature is the offset from absolute
zero set by one of the following:
Command(s): TOFFST,Value
Either way, FLOTRAN initializes the absolute nominal temperature as the sum of the values set by the
FLDATA,TEMP,NOMI and TOFFST commands or their equivalent menu paths.
Unless otherwise specified through boundary or initial condition commands, the initial relative pressure
is zero. In the absence of gravity and rotation the absolute pressure is the sum of the reference and
relative pressures. Therefore, the initial absolute pressure is the reference pressure.
For specific heat, density, surface tension coefficient, and thermal conductivity, the ANSYS program
uses initial values of absolute nominal temperature and absolute pressure to calculate the initial properties. However, for non-Newtonian viscosity, you specify initial properties using either the command
FLDATA12,PROP,IVISC,Value (Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid Properties). If
you specify a value less than or equal to zero, the NOMI coefficient described in the previous section
is used to initialize the viscosity.
126
Modifying the Fluid Property Database
9.2.1. Activating Variable Properties

Once the analysis begins, the properties will vary only between global iterations as the temperature
and pressure change if the property variations are activated. This is accomplished with the
FLDATA13,VARY,Label,Value command with the labels SPHT, DENS, VISC, SFTS, and COND. Allowable
Values are TRUE and FALSE (T or F). The VARY setting has no effect if the property type are set to
CONSTANT or COF1 is zero for a GAS or LIQUID.
9.3. Modifying the Fluid Property Database

Choices other than CGAS, CMIX, TABLE, USER, GAS, LIQUID, CONSTANT or AIR for density, thermal conductivity, viscosity, and specific heat imply that all the properties will be obtained from the information
in the floprp.ans file (a text file), where the data for AIR resides. This file is provided with ANSYS,
and you should make a local copy if you plan additions to it. You can make the copy at the system
level with a text editor. The procedure for making additions requires you to:
1. Choose a property name.
2. Specify functional form and constants.
id Integer equation identifier (two digit number)
n Number of coefficients
Ci Equation coefficients
You can access the following forms through the property database by specifying the appropriate ID.
The variable "y" refers to the value of the property of interest, T is the absolute temperature, and P is
the absolute pressure.
Polynomial ID: 01
y = C1 + C2T + C3T2 + ... + CnTn-1
Inverse Polynomial ID: 02
= 1 + 2 + 3 +
+ n
n 1
2
Exponential Polynomial ID: 03
In(y) = C1 + C2T + C3T2 + ... + CnTn-1
Exponential Inverse Polynomial ID: 04
= + + +
+
Power Law ID: 05

y = C1TC2
Ideal Gas Law ID: 11
127
Sutherland's Formula ID: 12
3
+ 2
Pressure based variation ID: 15
C
+
=
C6
4+ 5
Non-Newtonian Power Law ID: 16 (applies to viscosity only)
= ( )
>
= ( )
where
, I is the second invariant of the strain rate tensor.

2
Non-Newtonian Bingham Model ID: 17 (applies to viscosity only)
= +
<
Carreau Model ID: 18 (applies to viscosity only)
= +

User-programmable subroutine: 19
y = y (C1, C2, C3, C4)
Because you can use the subroutine to describe property variations, you can use the four coefficients
in any way within the subroutine.
128
Using Reference Properties

The format of the property database file floprp.ans is provided in the table below:
Table 9.5: Property Database Format
Line
Description
Fluid Name [A8] and optional comments
nLines [I6]
nLines
Proplab, tProp, nProp

(PropCF(i)=1,nProp)
[A4, 1x, 2I6, 5E12.5/6E 12.5]
Fluid Name=Fluid property type
nLines=Number of properties to be read
Proplab=Property label (one of the following):
SPHT - Specific heat
DENS - Density
VISC - Viscosity
COND - Conductivity
GAMM - Gamma
tProp - Equation identifier for property
nProp - Number of coefficients for property
PropCF - Coefficients for property calculation
9.4. Using Reference Properties

The following properties are part of the flow environment:
The ratio of specific heats, Cp/Cv, known as gamma, is a reference property that applies only to
compressible problems. Currently it is a constant. Specify this property using one of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA17,GAMM,COMP,VALUE
File:
Edit the file floprp.ans and set the value of GAMM.
The pressures FLOTRAN calculates are relative pressures. A reference pressure is added to the relative
pressure to calculate the absolute pressure. Rotational and gravitational terms also are added as
needed. For more information, see FLOTRAN Special Features (p. 133).
To specify the reference pressure, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA15,PRES,REFE,Value
You can use a relative temperature (for example, degrees Fahrenheit rather than degrees Rankine).
In this case, an offset temperature is set so that property calculations include absolute temperatures.
This is necessary, for instance, for calculating densities from the ideal gas law. ANSYS automatically
adds the offset temperature to all of the boundary condition temperatures applied.
129

To set the offset temperature, use one of the following
Command(s): TOFFST,Value
The nominal temperature is that at which the properties initialize. It may be a relative temperature
if you use the TOFFST command or an equivalent menu path. If the viscosity is not stored in the
results file (the default condition) and is now allowed to vary, ANSYS, Inc. recalculates it when the
analysis continues at the nominal temperature.
To specify the nominal temperature, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA14,TEMP,NOMI,Value
You can specify gravitational accelerations using one of the following:
Command(s): ACEL,ACELX,ACELY,ACELZ
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Gravity
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Gravity
The sign convention of the gravitational acceleration denotes as positive the direction of the reaction
force.
9.5. Using the ANSYS Non-Newtonian Flow Capabilities

The ANSYS program enables you to specify viscosity for non-Newtonian fluid flows. (You can use this
capability only with FLUID141 and FLUID142 elements.) You can choose among four types of models:
The Power Law model, useful for modeling polymers, blood, rubber solutions, etc.
The Carreau model, which removes some of the deficiencies associated with the Power Law model.
Use this model when fluid has intermediate values of shear rate but remains bounded for zero/infinite
shear rates.
The Bingham model, useful for modeling slurries and pastes.
A user-programmable subroutine UserVisLaw, which gives you greater flexibility in choosing viscosity
models.
Typically, you select one of these models after you have built and meshed the model for your problem
and after you have applied the boundary conditions.
9.5.1. Activating the Power Law Model

To activate the Power Law viscosity model, issue the command or use one of the menu paths shown
below:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,POWL
Choosing any of the above automatically issues other commands which set output and storage controls
and the property variation flag. For details, see the descriptions of the FLDATA commands in the
Command Reference.
130
Using the ANSYS Non-Newtonian Flow Capabilities

To specify the four coefficients associated with the Power Law model, choose either of the menu paths
shown above (and specify the appropriate coefficients), or issue the following commands:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC,Value (specifies nominal viscosity)
FLDATA9,COF1,VISC,Value (specifies the cutoff shear rate)
FLDATA10,COF2,VISC,Value (specifies the consistency coefficient)
FLDATA11,COF3,VISC,Value (specifies the power)
The Mechanical APDL Theory Reference describes these coefficients.
Once you have specified the coefficients, you can issue the SOLVE command or choose menu path
Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN.
9.5.2. Activating the Carreau Model

To activate the Carreau viscosity model, issue the command or use one of the menu paths shown below:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,CARR
Choosing one of the above automatically issues commands which set output and storage controls and
the property variation flag. For more information about the FLDATA commands, see the Command
Reference.
You need to specify the four coefficients associated with the Carreau model, using either of the menu
paths shown above or the following commands:
Command(s):
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC,Value (specifies the zero shear viscosity)
FLDATA9,COF1,VISC,Value (specifies the infinite shear viscosity)
FLDATA10,COF2,VISC,Value (specifies the time constant)
FLDATA11,COF3,VISC,Value (specifies the power)
The Mechanical APDL Theory Reference describes these coefficients. Once you have specified them, you
can issue the SOLVE command or choose menu path Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN.
9.5.3. Activating the Bingham Model

To activate the Bingham viscosity model, issue the command or choose one of the menu paths shown
below:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,BING
Choosing one of the items shown above automatically issues commands that set output and storage
controls and the property variation flag.
To set the coefficients associated with the Bingham model, either use one of the menu paths shown
above or issue the following commands:
FLDATA8,NOMI,VISC,Value (specifies the plastic viscosity)
131

FLDATA9,COF1,VISC,Value (specifies the plastic/yield stress)
FLDATA10,COF2,VISC,Value (specifies the Newtonian viscosity)
The Mechanical APDL Theory Reference describes these coefficients.
You can also specify an initial viscosity to accelerate convergence. Typically, you can set this to be the
Newtonian viscosity (that is, COF2) via one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA12,PROP,VISC,Value
9.6. Using User-Programmable Subroutines

User-programmable subroutines are available for specific heat, density, viscosity, surface tension coefficient, and thermal conductivity of fluid regions. Since the procedures are quite similar, only one property
will be described in depth here.
If you wish to use the user-programmable viscosity subroutine, UserVisLaw, you will need to customize
it for the particular model you are analyzing. You compile the subroutine, link it with the ANSYS libraries,
and make an executable copy available. Then, you can resume the model to be analyzed and activate
the viscosity model you have defined. To do so, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,VISC,USRV (or USER)
At this point, you may want to specify that properties are updated every iteration and that you want
viscosity output to go to the results file. To do so, issue the following commands or use the following
menu paths:
Command(s): FLDATA12,PROP,UFRQ,1 and FLDATA5,OUTP,VISC,T
Next, you need to specify the four coefficients associated with the user-defined viscosity model. To do
so, use either of the menu paths shown above or issue the following commands:
Command(s):
FLDATA7,NOMI,VISC,Value (specifies coefficient 1)
FLDATA6,COF1,VISC,Value (specifies coefficient 2)
These coefficients are available within the UserVisLaw subroutine. By default, this subroutine produces
a Power Law viscosity model using the coefficients you define. To see a copy of the subroutine, see the
Guide to User-Programmable Features.
You can also specify an initial viscosity to accelerate convergence, via one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA12,PROP,IVISC,Value
Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Fluid Properties
Once you have specified the coefficients, and, optionally, an initial viscosity, you can solve your model
by issuing the SOLVE command or choosing Main Menu> Solution> Run FLOTRAN.
132
Chapter 10: FLOTRAN Special Features

The following FLOTRAN special features are available:
10.1. Coordinate Systems
10.2. Rotating Frames of Reference
10.3. Swirl
10.4. Distributed Resistance/Source
10.1. Coordinate Systems

You set the coordinate system via one of the following:
Command(s): KEYOPT
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> FLOTRAN Coor Sys
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> FLOTRAN Coor Sys
The table below shows you how to select various coordinate systems and describes the velocities represented by DOFs VX, VY, and VZ in these systems. The default value of the KEYOPT is zero, which selects
Cartesian coordinates.
133
FLOTRAN Special Features

Figure 10.1: Direction of Positive Swirl Velocity VZ for Axisymmetric Models
+VZ
X
Z
+VZ
(a) Y-axis axisymmetric

(VZ positive "into the page")
(b) X-axis axisymmetric

(VZ positive "out of page")
Table 10.1: Coordinate System Specification

Coordinate System
KEYOPT(3)
VX
VY
VZ
Cartesian
2-D - Axisymmetric about Y axis
radial
axial
swirl
2-D - Axisymmetric about X axis
axial
radial
swirl
2-D - Polar Coordinates
radial
theta
N/A
3-D - Cylindrical Coordinates
radial
theta
axial
For axisymmetric problems, the sign convention for the swirl (VZ) component conforms to positive rotation about the axis of symmetry, as defined by the right hand rule. Thus, for a model that is axisymmetric about the Y axis, a nonnegative swirl velocity VZ is considered to be pointing "into the page."
Similarly, for a model that is axisymmetric about the X axis, a nonnegative swirl velocity VZ is considered
to be pointing "out of the page." This should be accounted for when you apply boundary conditions
in rotating coordinates.
Note
Based on the definition of directions for the cylindrical coordinate system, gravity is only
appropriate for the Z direction when KEYOPT(3) is set to 3.
134
Rotating Frames of Reference
10.2. Rotating Frames of Reference

You can choose to solve your problem in a rotating reference frame. In this case, the velocities are calculated and specified with respect to a coordinate system which is rotating at constant angular velocity.
Such an approach is useful for pump blade passage analysis. Figure 10.2: Rotating Flow Problem (p. 135)
shows a schematic of a rotating problem which requires moving coordinate systems. Figure 10.3: Problem
Schematic with Rotating Coordinate (p. 136) shows the problem schematic in the rotating coordinate
system.
The pressures specified by boundary conditions are in terms of the static pressure observable by the
stationary analyst, not in terms of the rotating coordinate system. The transformations necessary to
solve the equations in the rotating coordinate frame are done internally.
You can set rotational speeds using any of the following:
Command(s): CGOMGA
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Rotating Coords
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Rotating Coords
For all but 3-D Cartesian coordinate systems, you must specify the axis of rotation as being about the
Z axis. For 2-D axisymmetric systems, the ANSYS program automatically interprets the specified Z-axis
rotation as actually acting about the correct axis of symmetry (that is, about either the X or Y axis). For
3-D Cartesian geometries, the rotational axis need not be in the same direction as one of the principal
axes of the global coordinate system, and may be offset from the origin of the global coordinate system.
To specify offsets for the axis of rotation, use one of the following:
Command(s): CGLOC
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Rotating Coords
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Flow Environment> Rotating Coords
Figure 10.2: Rotating Flow Problem
Rotating shaft with

angular speed
135

Figure 10.3: Problem Schematic with Rotating Coordinate
System rotates at
v=0
v = R
10.3. Swirl
Swirl applies only to axisymmetric problems and refers to motion perpendicular to the X-Y plane. To
activate swirl, choose one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,SWIRL,TRUE
Either a moving wall (for instance, a rotating shaft) or a component of swirl at an inlet can cause the
motion in the swirl direction (with velocity component VZ).
In a swirl problem, there are no changes in the "theta" direction since it is axisymmetric.
The swirl component is calculated through solution of the momentum equation in the swirl direction.
With no pressure gradient in the swirl direction, nothing contributes to the swirl velocity directly from
the velocity update step in the segregated solution algorithm. It is thus sometimes useful to accelerate
the convergence of swirl problems by solving the momentum in the swirl direction equation with a
relaxation factor of 1.0 for a few global iterations.
10.4. Distributed Resistance/Source

Distributed resistances are macroscopic representations of geometric features not directly concerned
with the region of interest and considered too detailed for exact representation. A typical example is
pipe flow which encounters a screen.
You apply distributed resistance on an element basis through the use of real constants. See the Element
Reference for the formulation and the list and meaning of the real constants.
Since the distributed resistance parameters will describe the known behavior of the flow in the region,
the use of the turbulence model is redundant. You should deactivate it in the distributed resistance
region by setting ENKE to 0.0 and ENDS to 1.0.
To do so, choose one of the following:
Command(s): D
136
Distributed Resistance/Source
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Turbulence> On Nodes
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Turbulence> On Nodes
The distributed resistances referred to above are used to describe losses to the system. You can model
momentum sources in similar fashion. Such sources can be used to represent fans or pumps in a system.
Typical characterization of these components is a "Head-Capacity Curve," representing the pressure rise
as a function of flow for a constant speed pump. The fan or pump model is not intended to describe
the details of the flow in the pump region, but rather to approximate its effects on the rest of the system.
You can use any coordinate system or FLOTRAN element shape, but Cartesian coordinate systems with
hex shaped elements in three dimensions and quadrilateral elements in two dimensions tend to give
more stable results.
The fan model input takes the form of element real constants, and is described in detail in the Element
Reference.
The ANSYS program supports two types of fan model. A "Type Four" fan model acts only along a specific coordinate direction, while a "Type Five" model enables the user to align the fan or pump in an
arbitrary direction. Coefficients are assigned for each coordinate direction.
The equation for the fan model is in terms of a pressure gradient applied in the direction of flow. You
therefore must know over what length the fan model is to be applied in order to achieve the correct
total pressure rise. The relationship defining the momentum source for an arbitrary direction "s" is as
follows:
= 1+ 2
+ 3 2
In the above equation, V is the velocity through the fan. If the given data is in terms of volumetric flow,
you must know the area of the actual pump. The actual velocity at the outlet of the pump as well as
the volumetric flow rate should be preserved. Consistent units must be used, that is, the gravitational
conversion constant must be 1.0. If, for example, the pressure drop is in psi, the velocity units are in/sec.
Generally, you determine the fan or pump coefficients by taking three pairs of pressure-velocity points
on the "fan curve" and solving for the coefficients. If the flow is to be in the negative direction, the
signs of all the coefficients change.
The type 5 model is used for pumps not aligned with one of the coordinate directions. Given V as the
velocity in the S arbitrary direction and the pump constants C1, C2, and C3; the directional coefficients
can be calculated.
If x is the angle between the arbitrary direction S and the x coordinate direction, the directional constants are:
x =
x =
x =
x

Similarly, if y and z are defined as the angles between the fan direction and the y and z coordinate
direction respectively:
137
1y = 1
2y =
2
3
3y =
1z = 1
2z =
3z =
138
2
3
Chapter 11: FLOTRAN CFD Solvers and the Matrix Equation

In the sequential solution algorithm, you have three options for solving equations sets for degrees of
freedom:
1. A fast, approximate solver
This solver, the Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm (TDMA), performs a user-specified number of iterations through the problem domain.
2. "Exact" solvers
The "exact" methods are semi-direct conjugate direction methods that iterate to a specified
convergence criterion.
These methods are:
The Conjugate Residual (CR), Preconditioned Conjugate Residual (PCCR), Preconditioned Generalized
Minimum Residual (PGMR), and Preconditioned BiCGStab (PBCGM) methods for non-symmetric
matrix equations.
The preconditioned conjugate gradient method for the incompressible pressure equation.
3. Sparse Direct solver
This solver uses Gaussian elimination to factorize the matrix and then uses backward/forward
substitution to solve for the unknowns.
You choose the method for each DOF via one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA18,METH,Label,Value (Label = DOF)
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Controls> PRES Solver CFD
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Controls> PRES Solver CFD
Valid choices are: 1 (TDMA), 2 (conjugate residual), 3 (preconditioned conjugate residual or gradient),
4 (preconditioned generalized minimum residual), 5 (sparse direct), or 6 (preconditioned BiCGStab). A
choice of 0 indicates that the equation set is not to be solved. The preconditioned conjugate gradient
method automatically applies to the incompressible pressure equation for choices 2 or 3.
The default solver (TDMA) for the velocities and the turbulence equations is adequate for virtually every
problem encountered. The number of sweeps (iterations) for the velocity is 1. Do not change this value.
Experience has shown that the default number of 10 sweeps for the turbulence equations is most efficient
although you can increase this number to see if better convergence is attained for a particular application.
In general, the solution of the pressure equation must be accurate and conjugate direction methods
are used. However, the TDMA method can be successful for natural convection flows. The sections for
the various types of analyses discuss where to use solvers other than the default choices.
The following FLOTRAN CFD solver topics are available:
11.1.Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm
139
FLOTRAN CFD Solvers and the Matrix Equation

11.2. Semi-Direct Solvers
11.3. Sparse Direct Method
11.1. Tri-Diagonal Matrix Algorithm

You set the number of sweeps for the TDMA solver using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA19,TDMA,Label,Value (Label = DOF)
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Controls> desired DOF solver
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> CFD Solver Controls> desired DOF solver
In the GUI, you do not have access to this command unless the TDMA method has been requested for
that DOF. It is not available in the GUI at all for velocities.
11.2. Semi-Direct Solvers

You can gauge the performance of the semi-direct solvers by the behavior during the solution process
of the inner product of the residuals, referred to as RTR (or ZTR for the incompressible pressure equation.)
RTR should be reduced during the global iteration to a fraction, typically 1.0 x 10-7 of its initial value.
The fraction is the convergence criterion for the semi-direct methods, set with one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA21,CONV,Label,Value
To set the maximum number of iterations allowed during a global iteration, choose one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA22,MAXI,Label,Value
Data concerning how the semi-direct solvers are performing appears in the text file Jobname.DBG for
every DOF for which they are used, generally PRES, TEMP, or both.
The semi-direct algorithms may conclude in three different ways: convergence is achieved, the maximum
number of iterations has been reached without convergence, or the solution has stalled.
If the maximum number has been reached without convergence, more iterations may be required (for
example, in a large or ill-conditioned problem). If so, increase the maximum number of iterations. The
maximum number also may be reached if the convergence criterion has been set to a very small value
(for example, less than 1.0 x 10-15), in which case the convergence criterion should be eased. It may
also, however, mean that the solution is diverging. If so, large values of RTR or ZTR (perhaps above 1.0
x 1020) will appear in the debug file; but increasing the number of iterations will not help.
Stall occurs when the new iteration makes no progress towards the solution but the convergence criterion
has not been achieved. If the rate of change is small enough the solution process stops.
Note
You specify the rate of change which leads to termination of the solver by using one of the
following:
Command(s): FLDATA23,DELT,Label,Value
140
Semi-Direct Solvers
The label refers to the DOF being solved. Stall can occur in the solution of the compressible pressure
equation or in the solution of the temperature equation of some conjugate heat transfer problems. The
value of RTR does not decrease significantly and at the last iteration the value of DelMax is less than
the value you specified. This means that the solution is essentially not changing, and further computational effort is wasted.
You can resolve a stall situation by increasing the number of search directions or using inertial relaxation.
To increase search directions, either use one of the menu paths described above (with the
FLDATA23,DELT command), or issue the following command:
Command(s):
FLDATA20,SRCH,Label,Value
The default value is 2, appropriate for well conditioned problems. The number of search directions required may vary widely among problems. Values of 20 may be required, but be aware that each search
direction specified requires N compute storage locations in memory. (N is the number of finite element
nodes in the problem). The computer storage required for large values of SRCH could exceed the
computational resources available, in which case inertial relaxation should be used.
Figure 11.1: Typical Debug Files (p. 141) shows typical debug files.
Figure 11.1: Typical Debug Files
11.2.1. Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) Solver

The PGMR method uses fill-in when constructing the L and U decomposition matrices. The PGMR
method is a version of the generalized minimum residual method that uses an LU preconditioning to
transform the system of equations into a set easier to solve. As with the PCCR method, the coefficient
matrix is decomposed into an approximate LU product. In the PCCR method, the sparsity pattern of
the original matrix is preserved in the L and U matrices.
Accordingly, when you are using the Preconditioned Generalized Minimum Residual (PGMR) solver, you
need to specify the amount of fill-in. You must also specify the number of search vectors.
The fill-in value represents the number of extra elements allowed in each row of the L and U decomposition matrices. An extra element is defined as being in addition to the number of nonzero elements
in the row of the original matrix.
141

There are two PGMR algorithms available for FLOTRAN. The choice is automatically made by the program.
The difference lies in the "fill-in". It is only required and only available for the PRES and TEMP degrees
of freedom.
To specify the amount of fill-in, use either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA20A,PGMR,Label,Value
The allowable range for fill-in is 1 to 10. The default value is 6. A single fill-in value is input for all applicable DOF.
For some problems, it is unnecessary to obtain an exact solution to the energy equation every global
iteration. To save some time, you can then employ the foregoing command with a Label of MODP. You
use it to specify a number of global iterations performed using the TDMA method between global iterations performed using the PGMR method for the temperature DOF.
The number of search directions required may vary widely among problems. If large values of SRCH
result in the required computer storage exceeding the computational resources, inertial relaxation
should be used. To specify the number of search vectors, use either of these methods:
Command(s): FLDATA20,SRCH,Label,Value
For the PGMR solver, the allowable range of search vectors is 12 to 20. The default value is 12.
The PGMR method is not recommended for velocity DOF.
The output associated with the solver is recorded in the Jobname.OUT file for non-FLOTRAN analyses.
The FLOTRAN iterative solver output is recorded in the jobname.dbg file.
The fact that the PGMR solver is being used is indicated in the Jobname.DBG file. The file shows if
convergence is reached, the maximum number of iterations is reached without convergence, or the
solution is stalled.
The PGMR method output is in the same form as that provided in the jobname.out file for non-FLOTRAN
analyses. The NORM referred to in the Jobname.OUT file is the square root of the convergence criterion
specified in the FLOTRAN input. For example, an EQSLV command solver tolerance value of 1.E-5 corresponds to the FLOTRAN default convergence criterion value of 1.E-10.
The PGMR method can fail for the following reasons:
The problem is ill-conditioned.
The problem is improperly formulated.
The specified convergence criterion is too tight.
An insufficient number of iterations is specified.
If the PGMR method stalls, it may be because the problem is ill-conditioned or improperly formulated.
If the problem is ill-conditioned, you can control several parameters to enhance performance. You can
increase the amount of fill-in or the number of search vectors. You can also use inertial relaxation. If
the problem is improperly formulated, there may be an input error or the boundary conditions may be
142
Semi-Direct Solvers
applied incorrectly. You need to check the input parameters and boundary conditions to ensure that
they are accurate.
FLOTRAN does not allow a convergence criterion less restrictive than the default value. You can enter
a higher value, but FLOTRAN issues a warning message and changes it to the default value.
If the maximum number of iterations has been reached without convergence, it may mean more iterations
are required. This could be the case if you see that the Norm has been lowered, but it is not quite to
the target. If so, you can try increasing the maximum number of iterations.
If the PGMR method converges and the results are questionable, reduce the convergence criterion below
the default value of 1.E-10. A convergence criterion as low as 1.E-20 may be necessary for some problems.
11.2.2. Preconditioned BiCGStab (PBCGM) Solver

The PBCGM method is a version of the generalized bi-conjugate gradient method that uses two sets
of vectors constructed from both the coefficient matrix and its real transpose matrix by making them
orthogonal to each other. At each iteration, a new vector is first generated orthogonal to some userspecified number of previous vectors (search directions) from the basis of the real transpose matrix. A
minimization procedure is then used to stabilize the numerical procedure. Similar to PGMR, the PBCGM
method uses fill-in when constructing the L and U decomposition matrices. This preconditioning procedure transforms the system of equations into a set easier to solve by decomposing the coefficient
into an approximate LU product.
Accordingly, when you are using the Preconditioned BiCGStab (PBCGM) solver, you need to specify the
amount of fill-in. You must also specify the number of search vectors.
The fill-in value represents the number of extra elements allowed in each row of the L and U decomposition matrices. An extra element is defined as being in addition to the number of nonzero elements
in the row of the original matrix.
There are two PBCGM algorithms available for FLOTRAN. The difference lies in the fill-in value. When it
is specified to be zero, the algorithm is parallelized except the LU preconditioning part. For other fill-in
values, the algorithm is not parallelized at all.
To specify the amount of fill-in, use the following command or menu path:
Command(s): FLDATA20B,PBCGM,Label,Value
The allowable range for fill-in is 0 to 10. The default value is 6. A single fill-in value is input for all applicable DOF.
The number of search directions required may vary widely among problems. If large values of SRCH
result in the required computer storage exceeding the computational resources, use inertial relaxation.
In practice, you should usually use a value of 1 or 2 in order to save the memory storage. To specify
the number of search vectors, use the following command or menu path:
Command(s): FLDATA20,SRCH,Label,Value
For the PBCGM solver, the allowable range of search vectors is 1 to 8. The default value is 2.
143
11.3. Sparse Direct Method

The Sparse Direct method is memory intensive and you should only use it if all other methods have
failed. This method produces intermediate files during matrix factorization and it is difficult to predict
the memory required. Ensure enough hard disk space exists for intermediate files.
If you choose the Sparse Direct method for the VX, VY, or VZ DOFs, FLOTRAN will reset the method to
Preconditioned Conjugate Residual (PCCR). The Sparse Direct method is not suitable for the velocity
degrees of freedom.
144
Chapter 12: Coupling Algorithms

FLOTRAN CFD Solvers and the Matrix Equation (p. 139) describes the linear solvers available to solve
each individual equation. To obtain a final solution, you must usually account for the coupling between
the individual equations. In FLOTRAN, this nonlinear coupling is handled in a segregated or decoupled
manner. The coupling algorithms belong to a general class referred to as the Semi-Implicit Method for
Pressure Linked Equations (SIMPLE). For more information on this general class of algorithms, see S.V.
Patankar, D.B. Spalding, ("A calculation procedure for heat, mass and momentum transfer in 3-D parabolic flows," International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer, Vol 15, pp. 1787-1806, 1972).
To handle the coupling between the pressure and momentum equations, there are two segregated
solution algorithms: SIMPLEF and SIMPLEN. For many years, SIMPLEF was the sole pressure-velocity
coupling algorithm. It was developed by R.J. Schnipke and J.G. Rice ("Application of a new finite element
method to convection heat transfer," Fourth International Conference on Numerical Methods in Thermal
Problems, Swansea, U.K., July 1985). The SIMPLEF algorithm has been improved by utilizing some ideas
from the SIMPLEC algorithm developed by J.P. Van Doormaal and G.D. Raithby ("Enhancements of the
SIMPLE method for predicting incompressible fluid flows," Numerical Heat Transfer, Vol. 7, pp. 147-163,
1984). To improve the rate of convergence, the SIMPLEN algorithm has been added to FLOTRAN. It was
developed by G. Wang ("A fast and robust variant of the SIMPLE algorithm for finite-element simulations
of incompressible flows," Computational Fluid and Solid Mechanics, Vol. 2, pp. 1014-1016, Elsevier, 2001).
SIMPLEF is the default algorithm. To activate the SIMPLEN algorithm, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA37
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Algorithm Control
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Algorithm Control
The following coupling algorithm topics are available:
12.1. Algorithm Settings
12.2. Performance
12.1. Algorithm Settings

In general, FLOTRAN automatically set defaults suited for the two segregated algorithms. However, for
some problems, you may need to reset the advection scheme, solver choice, or relaxation factors.
12.1.1. Advection Scheme

You can discretize the advection term using three approaches: Monotone Streamline Upwind (MSU),
Streamline Upwind/Petrov-Galerkin (SUPG), or Collocated Galerkin (COLG). Refer to Advection Discretization Options (p. 161) for information on how to select a proper advection scheme.
Refer to the following table for a list of the defaults.
Table 12.1: Advection Scheme Defaults
Transport Equation
Momentum
SIMPLEF Algorithm
SIMPLEN Algorithm
SUPG
SUPG
145
Coupling Algorithms
Transport Equation
SIMPLEF Algorithm
SIMPLEN Algorithm
Turbulence
SUPG
MSU
Pressure
MSU
MSU
Energy
SUPG
SUPG
Species
SUPG
SUPG
12.1.2. Solver
For the SIMPLEF algorithm, the TDMA solver is the default for the momentum and turbulence equations.
None of the other solvers will improve the overall rate of convergence. Even when exact solutions are
obtained on those individual equations, the overall rate of convergence will not improve. This is due
to weak coupling between the pressure and momentum equations.
For the SIMPLEN algorithm, the overall rate of convergence can be improved considerably when more
exact solutions are obtained for each individual equation. Therefore, when SIMPLEN is activated, FLOTRAN
automatically resets the solver option to the preconditioned BiCGStab method (PBCGM) for the momentum, turbulence and energy equations. Furthermore, it will reset the fill-in parameter for PBCGM
to zero for computational efficiency.
12.1.3. Relaxation Factors

Due to the nonlinear coupling between equations, in order to stabilize the overall solution procedure,
relaxation is usually necessary to moderate changes from one global iteration to the next. Experience
indicates that relaxation factors greater than 0.5 for the velocity and pressure degrees of freedom will
generally cause instability and divergence for the SIMPLEF algorithm. On the other hand, the SIMPLEN
algorithm provides more consistent coupling between the pressure and velocity degrees of freedom.
For incompressible flow problems, SIMPLEN removes the need for relaxation for the pressure equation
and allows a relaxation factor close to 1.0 for the momentum equations. For compressible flow problems,
relaxation is usually needed for the pressure equation in order to obtain a convergent solution. The
default for SIMPLEF is 0.5 for the pressure and velocity degrees of freedom. When SIMPLEN is activated,
FLOTRAN automatically resets the relaxation factor to 1.0 for the incompressible pressure equation, 0.5
for the compressible pressure equation, and 0.8 for the momentum equations.
12.2. Performance
Table 12.2: SIMPLEF and SIMPLEN Performance Results (p. 146) presents results for laminar flow in a 2-D
square cavity. The Reynolds number is 100 based on the length of the cavity side and the velocity at
the top. The uniform grid consists of 322 = 1024 elements.
Table 12.2: SIMPLEF and SIMPLEN Performance Results
SIMPLEF
SIMPLEN
RELX
0.5
0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 0.99
Iter.
No.
325
153 81 66
CPU
(sec)
12.9
7.2 4.0 3.3 5.7 8.9
146
114 176
Performance
For the SIMPLEN algorithm , the total number of global iterations and the computational time decrease
as the relaxation factor (RELX) increases from 0.8 to 0.95. As RELX increases above 0.95, the iteration
number and computational time increase. The optimal RELX value is 0.95. At this value, the SIMPLEN
convergence rate is about 4 times faster than SIMPLEF. The SIMPLEN computational time is about 1/4
of the SIMPLEF computational time.
Results for a finer mesh of 1282 = 16,384 elements show an even better SIMPLEN performance. At an
optimal RELX value of 0.99, the SIMPLEN computational time is about 1/40 of the SIMPLEF computational
time.
SIMPLEN significantly improves the rate of convergence if pressure-velocity coupling dominates the
convergence. If other factors affect the overall rate of convergence, SIMPLEN will not increase the rate
of convergence as significantly. However, for those problems, SIMPLEN will generally be more robust
than SIMPLEF, and it will usually give a better convergence behavior. For more comparisons, see Wang
G., "A fast and robust variant of the SIMPLE algorithm for finite-element simulations of incompressible
flows," Computational Fluid and Solid Mechanics, vol. 2, pp. 1014-1016, Elsevier, 2001.
Below is the command input listing used to perform this analysis. All text preceded by an exclamation
point (!) is a comment.
/title, Lid driven cavity flow analysis using SIMPLEF/SIMPLEN algorithms
NDL = 32
! Number of line divisions
MU
= 0.010
! Fluid viscosity
RHO = 1.0
L
= 1.0
sL
= 1.0e-8
Vel = 1.000
niter = 10000
/PREP7
et,1,141
esha,2
rect,,L,,L
lesi,all,,,NDL
amesh,1
alls
! Apply Boundary Conditions
nsel,s,ext
d,all,vx
d,all,vy
nsel,r,loc,y,L-sL,L+sL
d,all,vx,vel
d,all,vy
d,all,enke,-1
alls
d,1,PRES
fini
save
/SOLU
flda,iter,exec,niter
flda,nomi,visc,MU
flda,nomi,dens,RHO
flda,term,pres,1.e-6
solve
fini
/delete,,rfl
! 2-D XY system
! Quad elements
! Wall boundary conditions
!top
! SIMPLEF algorithm
! No. of global iterations
/SOLU
flda,algr,segr,simplen
solve
fini
/delete,,rfl
! SIMPLEN algorithm
/SOLU
flda,relx,vx,0.9
147
Coupling Algorithms
flda,relx,vy,0.9
solve
fini
/delete,,rfl
/SOLU
flda,relx,vx,0.95
flda,relx,vy,0.95
solve
fini
/delete,,rfl
/SOLU
flda,relx,vx,0.98
flda,relx,vy,0.98
solve
fini
/delete,,rfl
/SOLU
flda,relx,vx,0.99
flda,relx,vy,0.99
solve
fini
148
Chapter 13: Multiple Species Transport

The multiple species transport capability enables you to track several different fluids at once, subject
to the limitation that a single momentum equation is solved for the flow field. Transport equations are
solved for each species. The properties used in the momentum equation can be those of a "main" fluid,
a "bulk" fluid (dilute mixture analysis), or a combination of component fluids. Momentum effects such
as advection and diffusion cause the fluid transport.
The following restrictions apply to this type of analysis:
Currently, no reactions are modeled among the species.
Solid model boundary /initial conditions are not supported for species mass fractions.
Also, you must postprocess multiple species results by issuing commands instead of via the GUI.
The following multiple species transport topics are available:
13.1. Mixture Types
13.2. Doing a Multiple Species Analysis
13.3. Doing a Heat Exchanger Analysis Using Two Species
13.4. Example Analysis Mixing Three Gases
13.1. Mixture Types

In terms of property variations, the strategies for solving multiple species problems parallel those for
thermal problems. The key issue is determining how large a mass fraction of the overall flow field the
species to be traced represents. You can choose among three mixture types for analysis: dilute mixture,
composite mixture, and composite gas. For each mixture type, the properties may be a function of
temperature.
13.1.1. Dilute Mixture Analysis

In a dilute mixture analysis, small mass fractions of species fluids are tracked in a flow field, and the
species properties do not significantly influence the flow field. The fluid properties are set and the bulk
fluid analysis proceeds as in any other FLOTRAN analysis. You solve the transport equations for species
using the bulk density and the velocities from the bulk fluid analysis.
If the analysis problem is isothermal or the properties are assumed not to vary with temperature, you
can converge the flow field completely before the species transport option is activated. The number of
species to be solved is a feature of the element and is controlled via a key option on the element. The
appropriate KEYOPT setting must be defined during the PREP7 phase of the analysis. Once the element
type and number of species has been set, the multiple species input commands (e.g., MSSPEC) can be
issued from either PREP7 or SOLUTION phases. However, the multiple species menus are accessible only
from PREP7.
To activate multiple species transport, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,SPEC,T
149
Multiple Species Transport

13.1.2. Composite Mixture Analysis

A composite mixture analysis calculates the properties used in the solution from a linear combination
of the species, weighted by mass fraction as a function of space. The solution of the momentum
equation depends on the species distribution, so the momentum and transport equations are strongly
coupled.
You initialize the species mass fractions using either the MSNOMF command (which has no GUI menu
equivalent) or (typically for a transient analysis) one of the following:
Command(s): IC,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Analysis Type> Analysis Options
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Initial Condit'n> Define
The mass fractions specified must add up to 1.0. To activate the composite mixture option for an individual property, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,Label,CMIX
13.1.3. Composite Gas Analysis

In a composite gas analysis, at each node the fluid density is calculated as a function of the mass fractions
and molecular weights of the gases:
i =1
i
i
In the equation above:

R is the Universal Gas constant. You can set it using one of the following:
Command(s): MSDATA
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Multiple Species
Mi is the molecular weight of the ith species. You set this weight using one of the following:
Command(s): MSSPEC
N is the total number of species defined.
P is pressure degree of freedom (PRES).
T is the absolute temperature (TEMP).
To invoke the composite gas option for the bulk fluid, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA7,PROT,DENS,CGAS
150
Doing a Multiple Species Analysis
13.2. Doing a Multiple Species Analysis

The procedure for a multiple species analysis has six steps:
1. Establish the number of species to model and assign species names.
2. Designate an algebraic species.
3. Adjust output format if desired.
4. Set properties.
5. Specify boundary conditions and nominal mass fractions.
6. Set relaxation and solution parameters for the solution of the transport equations (if necessary).
13.2.1. Establish the Species

To set the number of species, use one of these methods:
Command(s): KEYOPT,1,1,n (n = number of species (at least 2, but no more than 6))
To name each species, use the menu paths shown above or the following command:
Command(s):
MSSPEC
FLOTRAN uses these names for assigning boundary conditions and in postprocessing listings and plots.
The default names for species are SP01, SP02, and so on.
13.2.2. Choose an Algebraic Species

The transport equations solve for the mass fractions of each species. You must choose one as the algebraic species, using the value set by the ALGEB argument or one of the following:
Command(s): MSDATA
The transport equation for the algebraic species is not solved, but its concentration as a function of
space is calculated by ensuring that the mass fractions of all the species add up to 1.0 everywhere.
Note
The MSDATA command also sets the universal gas constant. Every issuance of the command
sets both numbers.
13.2.3. Adjust Output Format

You can set the format of the convergence monitors on the file Jobname.PFL to list columns of values
for all the degrees of freedom for a single iteration. (This also affects the ANSYS output file.) To adjust
output, use one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA6
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Additional Out> Print Controls
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Additional Out> Print Controls
151
13.2.4. Set Properties

For a dilute mixture analysis, set the bulk property type as appropriate (CONSTANT, Liquid, etc.).
If the bulk properties are to be a linear combination of the species properties, set the bulk property
type to CMIX. For example, you would use the following command:
Command(s):
FLDATA7,PROT,Label,Type
In the preceding command, Label can be DENS, VISC, COND, or SPHT, and Type is CMIX. If Label =
DENSE, Type may be CGAS. Using CGAS requires you to enter a molecular weight for the gas via the
MSSPEC command or its equivalent GUI path.
You handle individual species property variations the same way, and with the same options as, the bulk
fluid. The CONSTANT, LIQUID, and GAS fluid types are available. Specify them, along with coefficients,
using one of the following:
Command(s): MSPROP
For all analyses, you must enter the mass diffusion coefficient data for each species. For a dilute mixture,
the density is the only other relevant property because the bulk or main fluid properties govern the
solution of the momentum equation. For the CMIX and CGAS options, you need to specify density and
viscosity using MSPROP or an equivalent menu path. Also specify conductivity if the energy equation
is to be solved.
The form of the diffusion term is:
mi i
The value Dmi is the diffusion coefficient, and Yi is the mass fraction being solved.
Sometimes, the available data is expressed as a Schmidt number. The following equality enables expression of the diffusion portion of transport in terms of laminar viscosity , the density , and the Schmidt
number:
=
Note
The input must be in terms of the mass diffusion coefficient, not the Schmidt number. The
Schmidt number relating the diffusion coefficient to the density and viscosity differs from
the turbulent Schmidt number discussed below.
In addition, the flow field may be turbulent. Another representation of the diffusion term, this time including the effect of the turbulent viscosity , is:

+ t

T
152
Doing a Heat Exchanger Analysis Using Two Species

The quantity SCTi is the turbulent Schmidt number, which you specify via one of the following:
Command(s): MSSPEC
The normal default value of 1.0 is sufficient unless you want to regulate explicitly the effect of turbulence
on the transport.
13.2.5. Specify Boundary Conditions

The default boundary condition is zero gradient of the mass fraction at the boundaries. You can specify
the mass fraction at a boundary, such as the inlet, by entering the species name in the LAB field of one
of the following:
Command(s): D
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Displacement> On
Nodes
Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid/CFD> Displacement> On Nodes
Initialize the mass fractions for every species, including the algebraic species. The fractions must sum
to 1.0.
13.2.6. Set Relaxation and Solution Parameters

Relaxation factors for the property calculations and the mass fraction update default to 0.5. To change
the factors, use one of the following:
Command(s): MSRELAX
You can set modified inertial relaxation factors for multiple species. To do so, use one of the following:
Command(s): MSMIR,SPNUM,Value
A larger modified inertial relaxation factor gives a more robust scheme, but it may yield a slower convergence. The recommended range is 0.1 to 1.0.
You can change parameters for the algebraic solvers for the transport equation and choose a solver by
using one of the following commands or menu paths:
Command(s): MSSOLU, MSMETH
Activating mass fraction capping is recommended to prevent intermediate calculations from producing
unrealistic results. Use either of the following for each species:
Command(s): MSCAP
Finally, you activate the multiple species option using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA1,SOLU,Spec,T
Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Solution Options
13.3. Doing a Heat Exchanger Analysis Using Two Species

Although FLOTRAN permits only one fluid region to correspond to material number 1 (using the command MAT,1 or an equivalent GUI path), you can simulate multiple fluids within this restriction. To do
153

so, you set all fluid property types to CMIX, then set the appropriate species mass fraction to 1.0 in a
particular region. These settings enable all properties in that region to correspond to that of species
with mass fraction 1.0. For such multiple fluid simulations, the mass fractions must remain constant
throughout the analysis; that is, the analysis should not turn on the species solution.
A typical heat exchanger analysis consists of two fluids flowing in opposite directions, separated by a
wall as shown in Figure 13.1: Environment for a Typical Heat Exchanger Analysis (p. 154):
Figure 13.1: Environment for a Typical Heat Exchanger Analysis
LX
Fluid region 2 (MAT,1)
(Mass fraction: species 1 = 0.0,
species 2 = 1.0)
Pressure
LY3 specified
on outlet
Solid region (MAT,2)
LY2
Pressure
LY1 and
temperature Y
specified on
inlet
YOFFSET
Fluid region 1 (MAT,1)

(Mass fraction: species 1 = 1.0,
species 2 = 0.0)
Pressure
and
temperature
specified on
inlet
Pressure
specified
on outlet
X
Symmetry surface
V = 0,
=0
The sample command stream that follows shows you how to set up the model shown in Figure 13.1: Environment for a Typical Heat Exchanger Analysis (p. 154), apply boundary conditions, set up appropriate
properties, etc. It is important to note that, although two species are defined, the species transport has
not been activated. In addition, all fluid properties must be declared variable so that the initial value
(the same in regions 1 and 2) is reset based on the mass fraction.
/BATCH,LIST
/tit,heat exchanger problem
!two different fluids separated by a solid wall
!cartesian geometry, pressure-driven flow
!solve by 2 species
LX
= 10
! Length in X direction
NDX
= 10
! Number of X divisions
LY1
= 2
! fluid 1 width
LY2
= 0.1
! solid width
LY3
= 1.0
! fluid 2 width
NDY1 = 10
NDY2 = 3
NDY3 = 10
YOFFSET = 0
!offset from X-axis
/prep7 $smrt,off
et,1,141
! 2-D XY system
!species
keyopt,1,1,2
! 2 species
!axisymm
!keyopt,1,3,2
!use for axisymm RY system only
esha,2
!Quad elements
rect,,LX,YOFFSET,YOFFSET+LY1
!fluid 1 area
rect,,LX,YOFFSET+LY1,YOFFSET+LY1+LY2
!solid area
rect,,LX,YOFFSET+LY1+LY2,YOFFSET+LY1+LY2+LY3` !fluid 2 area
nummrg,all
numcmp,all
154
Doing a Heat Exchanger Analysis Using Two Species

lsel,s,,,3,9,3
lsel,a,,,1
lesi,all,,,NDX,
lsel,s,,,2,4,2
lesi,all,,,NDY1,-5.0
lsel,s,,,5,7,2
lsel,s,,,8,10,2
allsel
mat,1
!for fluids material must be 1
amesh,1
!mesh fluid 1 region
amesh,3
!mesh fluid 2 region
mat,2
!for solid set material to 2
amesh,2
!mesh solid region
!inner region 1
!bc inlet
lsel,s,,,4
nsll,s,1
d,all,pres,10
!inlet pressure & temp specified for fluid 1
d,all,temp,100
!bc outlet
lsel,s,,,2
nsll,s,1
d,all,pres,0.
!outlet pressure specified for fluid 1
!symm
lsel,s,,,1
nsll,s,1
d,all,vy,0
!symmetry surface for fluid 1 only
!region 2
!bc inlet
lsel,s,,,8
nsll,s,1
d,all,pres,10.
!inlet pressure & temp specified for fluid 2
d,all,temp,400
!bc outlet
lsel,s,,,10
nsll,s,1
d,all,pres,0.
!outlet pressure specified for fluid 2
!top wall
lsel,s,,,9
nsll,s,1
d,all,vx,0
!wall boundary conditions
d,all,vy,0
allsel
!solid properties
mp,dens,2,5.
!specify solid region 3 properties
mp,kxx,2,100
mp,c,2,13
/SOLU
!ic for species
nsel,s,loc,x,,lx
!select nodes for fluid 1
nsel,s,loc,y,o,ly1
ic,all,sp01,1.0
!set mass fraction for fluid 1
ic,all,sp02,0.0
nsel,s,loc,x,,lx
nsel,s,loc,y,ly1+ly2,ly1+ly2+ly3 !select nodes for fluid 2
ic,all,sp01,0.0
!set mass fraction for fluid 2
ic,all,sp02,1.0
allsel
FLDA,ITER,EXEC,200
FLDA,PROT,DENS,CMIX
! Fluid density
FLDA,PROT,VISC,CMIX
! Fluid viscosity
FLDA,PROT,COND,CMIX
! Fluid conductivity
FLDA,PROT,SPHT,CMIX
! Fluid specific heat
flda,vary,dens,t
!all properties MUST be variable
flda,vary,visc,t
flda,vary,cond,t
flda,vary,spht,t
FLDA,NOMI,DENS,1.0
! initial density for all fluid region
FLDA,NOMI,VISC,2.0
! initial viscosity for all fluid region
155

FLDA,NOMI,COND,3.0
FLDA,NOMI,SPHT,4.0
msprop,1,spht,constant,1
msprop,2,spht,constant,2
msprop,1,dens,constant,1
msprop,2,dens,constant,2
msprop,1,visc,constant,1.0
msprop,2,visc,constant,2.0
msprop,1,cond,constant,.1
msprop,2,cond,constant,.2
FLDA,CONV,PRES,1.0E-10
FLDA,TERM,PRES,1.E-09
FLDA,OUTP,SP01,T
FLDA,OUTP,SP02,T
save
SOLVE
FLDA,SOLU,ENRG,T
FLDA,SOLU,FLOW,F
FLDA,METH,ENRG,3
FLDA,ITER,EXEC,50
FLDA,RELX,TEMP,1.
SOLVE
fini
/exit,nosa
! initial conductivity for all fluid region

! initial specific heat for all fluid region
!sp heat for fluid 1
!sp heat for fluid 2
!density for fluid 1
!density for fluid 2
!viscosity for fluid 1
!viscosity for fluid 2
!conductivity for fluid 1
!conductivity for fluid 2
! PCCR convergence criterion
!solve for flow only
!solve for temperature only
13.4. Example Analysis Mixing Three Gases

The following example analysis mixes three gases: oxygen (O2), nitrogen (N2), and hydrogen (H2). The
mass fractions of the gases are set at each inlet along with the velocity. For the three inlets:
Top:
Left:
Bottom:
VX = 0
VX = 0.1
VX = 0
VY = -0.1
VY = 0
VY = 0.1
TEMP = 300
TEMP = 400
TEMP = 300
O2 = 1.0
O2 = 0.0
O2 = 0.0
N2 = 0.0
N2 = 1.0
N2 =0.0
H2 = 0.0
H2 = 0.0
H2 = 1.0
The command stream for the example (shown below) shows all the relevant properties and the solution
strategy.
/batch,list
/filename,spec
/com ** Analysis Types Laminar and Turbulent, Incompressible
/com
2-D - quadrilateral and triangular elements
/com ** Features
Thermal, Multiple Species Transport
/com ** Options
Dilute mixtures, composite property types (CGAS, CMIX)
/com ** Variable laminar properties
/com ** Turbulence
/com ** Construction of geometry
/prep7
!!!!!!! Define some dimensions - SI units are used
lenin=.3
half=lenin/2.
width=.1
hfwid=width/2.
outlen=1.2
!!!!!!! Define inlet and outlet rectangles
rect,-lenin,0,-hfwid,hfwid
156
Example Analysis Mixing Three Gases

rect,.2,.3,.25,.25+lenin
rect,.2,.3,-.25,-.25-lenin
rect,.4,.4+outlen,-.15,.15
!!!!!!! Lines that border the mixing area
l2tan,-3,-8
l2tan,-6,-15
l2tan,-13,-10
l2tan,-12,-1
!!!!!!! Parameters defined for meshing
nlcurv=16
rlcurv=1
nscurv=9
rscurv=1
nispan=8
rispan=-1.5
nospan=13
rospan=-2
nilen=10
rilen=-2
nolen=24
rolen=4
!!!!!!!
!flst,2,2,4,orde,2
!fitem,2,17
!fitem,2,20
lsel,s,,,17,20,3
lesize,all,,,nlcurv,rlcurv
lsel,s,,,18,19
!fitem,2,18
!fitem,2,-19
lesize,19,,,nscurv,rscurv
!flst,2,3,4,orde,3
!fitem,2,2
!fitem,2,5
!fitem,2,11
lsel,s,,,2,5,3
lsel,a,,,11
lesize,all,,,nispan,1
!flst,2,3,4,orde,3
!fitem,2,4
!fitem,2,7
!fitem,2,9
lsel,s,,,4,7,3
lsel,a,,,9
lesize,all,,,nispan,rispan
!flst,2,6,4,orde,6
!fitem,2,1
!fitem,2,3
!fitem,2,6
!fitem,2,8
!fitem,2,10
!fitem,2,12
lsel,s,,,1,3,2
lsel,a,,,6,12,2
lesize,all,,,nilen,rilen
lsel,s,,,13,16
lesize,13,,,nolen,rolen
lesize,15,,,nolen,1./rolen
lesize,16,,,nospan,rospan
lesize,14,,,nospan,rospan
alls
!!!!!!! Define the mixing area...
!flst,2,8,3
!fitem,2,2
!fitem,2,12
!fitem,2,11
!fitem,2,13
!fitem,2,16
!fitem,2,6
!fitem,2,5
!fitem,2,3
a,2,12,11,13,16,6,5,3
157

alls
/com ** CONSTRUCTION OF THE MESH
!!!!!!! Put triangles in the mixing area (5)
asel,s,,,5
et,1,141
mshape,1,2d
amesh,5
!!!!!!! Put a mapped mesh in the rectangles (quads)
asel,s,,,1,4
mshape,0,2d
mshkey,1
amesh,all
/com ** BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
!!!!!!! Wall boundary conditions
lsel,s,,,1,3,2
lsel,a,,,6,12,2
lsel,a,,,13,17,2
lsel,a,,,18,20
nsll,,1
d,all,vx,0
d,all,vy,0
!!!!!!! Define velocities, temperature at top, bottom, left
vtop=.1
vbot=.1
vlef=.1
lsel,s,,,7
nsll
d,all,vx,0
d,all,vy,-vtop
nsll,,1
d,all,temp,300
lsel,s,,,4
nsll
d,all,vx,vlef
d,all,vy,0
nsll,,1
d,all,temp,400
lsel,s,,,9
nsll
d,all,vx,0
d,all,vy,vbot
nsll,,1
d,all,temp,300
lsel,s,,,14
nsll,,1
d,all,pres,0
flda,conv,iter,5
save
finish
alls
/solu
/com ** FLOTRAN INPUT
flda,iter,exec,40
flda,temp,nomi,300
! Initial temperature field is 300K
flda,prot,dens,air-si
! Initial solution will be for AIR
flda,vary,dens,true
flda,prot,visc,air-si
flda,vary,visc,true
flda,prot,cond,air-si
flda,vary,cond,true
flda,prot,spht,air-si
save
solve
! Solve 40 iterations with air at 300K
finish
! Prepare for species transport ...
/prep7
flda,prot,dens,cmix
! Composite mixture for density
flda,prot,visc,cmix
! Composite mixture for viscosity
keyopt,1,1,3
! Specify that there are 3 species
flda,solu,spec,t
msdata,2
!
158
! Turn on solution for multiple species transport

! Specify species 2 (N2) as the algebraic species
Example Analysis Mixing Three Gases

!!!!!!! Species Property Input
msspec,1,o2,31.999
msprop,1,DENS,GAS,1.2998,300,1.01325E+5
msvary,1,dens,t
msnomf,1,.3
msprop,1,VISC,CONSTANT,1.2067E-5
msprop,1,mdif,CONSTANT,2.149E-5
msprop,1,cond,CONSTANT,.02674
mscap,1,1
!
msspec,2,n2,28.018
msprop,2,DENS,GAS,1.1381,300,1.01325E+5
msvary,2,dens,t
msnomf,2,.3
mscap,2,1
!
msspec,3,h2,2.016
msprop,3,DENS,GAS,0.0819,300,1.01325E+5
msvary,3,dens,t
msnomf,3,.4
mscap,3,1
!
msrelx,1,1.0
msrelx,3,1.0
msmeth,1,3
mssolu,1,,,2,1.e-8
msmeth,3,3
mssolu,3,,,2,1.e-8
alls
!!!!!!! Species boundary conditions
lsel,s,,,7
nsll,,1
d,all,o2,1.0
d,all,n2,0.0
d,all,h2,0.0
lsel,s,,,4
nsll,,1
d,all,o2,0.0
d,all,n2,1.0
d,all,h2,0.0
lsel,s,,,9
nsll,,1
d,all,o2,0.0
d,all,n2,0.0
d,all,h2,1.0
alls
!!!!!!! End of species boundary conditions
flda,iter,exec,20
! Ask for 20 global iterations
flda,conv,outp,land
! Adjust convergence monitor output style
save
finish
/solu
solve
! 20 iterations with species activated
!
!Prepare for energy solution
flda,solu,temp,t
! Achieve a constant flow temperature solution
flda,solu,flow,f
! Freeze the flow field
flda,meth,temp,3
! Activate PCCR solver
flda,conv,temp,1.e-10
! Convergence criterion for PCCR
flda,iter,exec,5
! Need only a few iterations for solution...
flda,relx,temp,1.0
! no relaxation on temperature
save
solve
!! Prepare for coupled solution
flda,iter,exec,35
! Achieve a flow and thermal solution
159

flda,solu,flow,t
solve
flda,iter,exec,50
save
solve
160
! Run 50 more iterations to refine solution
Chapter 14: Advection Discretization Options

When momentum, energy, species transport, turbulence or the compressible pressure equations are
solved, the advection term plays a significant role in the solution. When the advection term dominates
over other terms in the governing equations, it can lead to numerical instabilities. Accordingly, you
must be careful with the discretization of this particular term.
You can discretize the advection term using three approaches: monotone streamline upwind (MSU),
streamline upwind/Petrov-Galerkin (SUPG), or collocated Galerkin (COLG). For the momentum, energy,
turbulence or compressible pressure equations, you specify the approach using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA33,ADVM,Label,Value
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Advection
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Advection
For the species transport equation, you specify the approach using one of the following:
Command(s): MSADV,SPNUM,MTHA
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Multiple Species
MSU tends to be first order accurate while SUPG and COLG are second order accurate. MSU produces
diagonally dominant matrices and is generally quite robust. SUPG and COLG provide less diagonal
dominance, but are generally more accurate. COLG provides an exact energy balance for incompressible
flows, even with a coarse mesh. Special techniques may be required to achieve convergence using
SUPG or COLG.
For more information on the approaches, consult the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
The following advection topics are available:
14.1. Using SUPG and COLG
14.2. Strategies for Difficult Solutions
14.1. Using SUPG and COLG

For simple geometries and simple flows, the SUPG or COLG approach provides a convergent solution
in a straight forward fashion.
For laminar flow past obstacles, which generally produce regions of recirculation in the wake, you may
need to turn on modified inertial relaxation in the momentum equation using one of the following:
Command(s): FLDATA34,MIR,MOME,Value
For turbulent problems, FLOTRAN will sometimes display a message stating that the coefficient matrix
has a negative diagonal and the solution is probably divergent. You should then try turning on modified
inertial relaxation in the momentum equation or turbulence equation.
Command(s):
FLDATA34,MIR,MOME,Value or FLDATA34,MIR,TURB,Value
161
Advection Discretization Options

The modified inertial relaxation Value should be between 0.1 and 1.0. A larger Value leads to more
relaxation. To achieve a faster convergence rate, use the smallest Value possible.
For complex geometries with turbulence and complex flow fields, you can employ the following techniques to achieve a convergent solution with SUPG or COLG.
Set the turbulence ratio to a high value of 1 x 106 and the effective viscosity relaxation factor to a
low value of 0.1 using the following commands. These conditions provide the necessary diagonal
dominance until the solution enters the radius of convergence.
Command(s): FLDATA24,TURB,RATI,1.0E6
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence> Turbulence Model
Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence> Turbulence Param
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence Model
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Turbulence Param
Command(s): FLDATA25,RELX,EVIS,0.1
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Prop Relaxation
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Relax/Stab/Cap> Prop Relaxation
Achieve a convergent solution using MSU on all variables. Then, using the following command, perform
a restart employing SUPG or COLG on the momentum variables only. After achieving a convergent
solution, you can perform a restart again employing SUPG or COLG on the turbulence, pressure,
temperature and species variables.
Command(s): FLDATA33,ADVM,MOME,SUPG FLDATA33,ADVM,MOME,COLG
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> FLOTRAN Set Up> Advection
Main Menu> Solution> FLOTRAN Set Up> Advection
Although the foregoing techniques might work on a coarse mesh, both may fail on a fine mesh. In
this case, you may have to resort to a transient algorithm which has the necessary diagonal dominance
due to the inertia term.
14.2. Strategies for Difficult Solutions

Although SUPG and COLG are more accurate than MSU, they may lead to spurious oscillations in the
solution. This may lead to nonphysical solutions or convergence difficulties. You may encounter negative
temperatures in the energy equation solution. In this case, you should refine the mesh in that region.
You may also encounter negative turbulence values. Internally, FLOTRAN tries to reset these values to
some realistic numbers, but this may lead to a situation where the solution stalls. In this situation, you
should try using MSU on turbulence variables while retaining SUPG or COLG on momentum variables.
The solution to the species transport equation must be bounded between 0 and 1.0, and oscillations
in the SUPG or COLG solution may make this difficult to achieve even though capping has been turned
on. If convergence is not achieved, you should then refine the mesh.
A poor mesh, recirculating regions, or a strong swirl might cause the SUPG technique to have strong
oscillations in an axisymmetric analysis. Temperatures (or species concentrations) could be higher or
lower than any applied boundary conditions. The mesh should be refined or another advection discretization method should be used.
162
Part II: Acoustics
Chapter 1: Acoustics
Acoustics is the study of the generation, propagation, absorption, and reflection of sound pressure
waves in a fluid medium. Applications for acoustics include the following:
Sonar - the acoustic counterpart of radar
Design of concert halls, where an even distribution of sound pressure is desired
Noise minimization in machine shops
Noise cancellation in automobiles
Underwater acoustics
Design of speakers, speaker housings, acoustic filters, mufflers, and many other similar devices.
Geophysical exploration
The following acoustics topics are available:
1.1.Types of Acoustic Analysis
1.2. Solving Acoustics Problems
1.3. Building the Model
1.4. Meshing the Model
1.5. Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution
1.6. Reviewing Results
1.7. Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI)
1.8. Sample Applications
1.1. Types of Acoustic Analysis

An acoustic analysis, available in the ANSYS Multiphysics and ANSYS Mechanical programs only, usually
involves modeling the fluid medium and the surrounding structure. Typical quantities of interest are
the pressure distribution in the fluid at different frequencies, pressure gradient, particle velocity, the
sound pressure level, as well as, scattering, diffraction, transmission, radiation, attenuation, and dispersion
of acoustic waves. A coupled acoustic analysis takes the fluid-structure interaction into account. An uncoupled
acoustic analysis models only the fluid and ignores any fluid-structure interaction.
The program assumes that the fluid is compressible, but allows only relatively small pressure changes
with respect to the mean pressure. Also, the fluid is assumed to be non-flowing and inviscid (that is,
viscosity causes no dissipative effects). Uniform mean density and mean pressure are assumed, with
the pressure solution being the deviation from the mean pressure, not the absolute pressure.
1.2. Solving Acoustics Problems

You can solve many acoustics problems by performing a harmonic analysis. The analysis calculates the
pressure distribution in the fluid due to a harmonic (sinusoidally varying) load at the fluid-structure interface. By specifying a frequency range for the load, you can observe the pressure distribution at various
165
Acoustics
frequencies. You can also perform modal and transient acoustic analyses. (See the Structural Analysis
Guide for more information on these types of analyses.)
The procedure for a harmonic acoustic analysis consists of three main steps:
Build the model.
Apply boundary conditions and loads and obtain the solution.
Review the results.
1.3. Building the Model

In this step, you specify the jobname and analysis title and then use the PREP7 preprocessor to define
the element types, element real constants, material properties, and the model geometry. These tasks,
common to most analyses, are described in the Basic Analysis Guide.
1.3.1. Harmonic Acoustic Analysis Guidelines

For a harmonic acoustic analysis, consider the following points:
Element Types - Four element types are specifically designed for acoustic analyses: FLUID29, FLUID30,
FLUID220, and FLUID221. FLUID29 is used to model the fluid portion of 2-D model. FLUID30, FLUID220,
and FLUID221 are used to model the fluid portion of 3-D model. FLUID30 is 3-D 8-Node element. FLUID220 is the higher order 20 node hexahedral element, and FLUID221 is the higher order 10- node tetrahedral element.
FLUID129 and FLUID130, companion elements to FLUID29 and FLUID30, are used to model an infinite
envelope around the FLUID29 and FLUID30 elements. Use these element types to model the fluid portion,
and then use a corresponding structural element (PLANE182, SOLID185, etc.) for the solid. Only FLUID29
and FLUID30 elements can be in contact with structural elements (either on the inside or outside of
the structure); FLUID129 and FLUID130 can contact only the FLUID29 and FLUID30 elements, and not
the structural elements directly.
1.3.1.1. FLUID29, FLUID30, FLUID220, and FLUID221

For acoustic elements that are in contact with the solid, be sure to use KEYOPT(2) = 0, the default setting
that allows for fluid-structure interaction. This results in unsymmetric element matrices with UX, UY,
UZ, and PRES as the degrees of freedom. For all other acoustic elements, set KEYOPT(2) = 1, which results
in symmetric element matrices with the PRES degree of freedom. (See Figure 1.1: Example of a 2-D
Acoustic Model (Fluid Within a Structure) (p. 167).) Symmetric matrices require much less storage and
computer time, so use them wherever possible. For more information on fluid-structure interaction, see
Acoustics Fluid-Structure Coupling in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
In FLUID220 and FLUID221, KEYOPT(4) is used to specify the existence of perfectly matched layers (PML)
to absorb the outgoing sound waves. Refer to Perfectly Matched Layers (PML) in the Mechanical APDL
High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for more information about using PML.
166
Building the Model

Figure 1.1: Example of a 2-D Acoustic Model (Fluid Within a Structure)
Structural elements
Acoustic elements
(FLUID29, FLUID30),
KEYOPT(2) = 0
Acoustic elements
(FLUID29, FLUID30),
KEYOPT(2) = 1
1.3.1.2. FLUID129 and FLUID130

These infinite acoustic elements absorb the pressure waves, simulating the outgoing effects of a domain
that extends to infinity beyond the FLUID29 and FLUID30 elements. FLUID129 and FLUID130 provide
a second-order absorbing boundary condition so that an outgoing pressure wave reaching the
boundary of the model is absorbed with minimal reflections back into the fluid domain.
FLUID129 is used to model the boundary of 2-D fluid regions and as such is a line element. FLUID130
is used to model the boundary of 3-D fluid regions and as such is a plane surface element.
Material Properties - The acoustic elements require density (DENS) and speed of sound (SONC) as material properties (FLUID129 and FLUID130 require only SONC). If sound absorption at the fluid-structure
interface exists, use the label MU to specify boundary admittance (absorption coefficient). Values of
are usually determined from experimental measurements. For the structural elements, specify the
Young's modulus (EX), density (DENS), and Poisson's ratio (PRXY or NUXY).
Real Constants - When using FLUID129 and FLUID130, the boundary of the underlying finite element
mesh must be circular (2-D and axisymmetric) or spherical (3-D), and the radius of the circular or
spherical boundary of the finite domain must be specified as real constant RAD. (See Figure 1.2: Example
of Absorption Element Application (p. 168).) The center of the circle or sphere is also specified using real
constants:
R,3,RAD,X0,Y0!REAL set 3 for FLUID129
R,3,RAD,X0,Y0,Z0!REAL set 3 for FLUID130
If the coordinates (X0, Y0) for the 2-D and axisymmetric cases or (X0, Y0, Z0) for the 3-D case of the
center of the circle or sphere are not specified via real constants, the program assumes the center to
be the origin of the global coordinate system.
167
Acoustics
Figure 1.2: Example of Absorption Element Application
y
x
SOLID42
(vibrating beam)
FLUID29
(surrounding air)
FLUID129
(absorption surface to
simulate infinite extent of air)
REAL set for FLUID129; ,3,RAD,0,0
Figure 1.3: Submerged Cylindrical Shell

w

h
1.4. Meshing the Model

A typical meshing procedure using the 2-D infinite acoustic elements follows. The procedure is the
same with 3-D elements. If you have a structural component as well, the structural elements must lie
next to the FLUID29 elements, and cannot lie next to the infinite fluid elements (FLUID129).
This process automatically adds the FLUID129 elements on the boundary of the finite domain. Here an
annular structural ring is meshed with PLANE182 structural elements. The layer of fluid elements in
touch with PLANE182 elements is modeled using FLUID29 with UX and UY DOFs and with the fluidstructure interface turned on. The outer layers of fluid are modeled using FLUID29 without the UX and
168
Meshing the Model

UY DOFs. The radius for placing FLUID129 is 0.31242 (see Step 2: Generate the Infinite Acoustic Elements (p. 169)) with X0 = Y0 = 0. You define the FLUID129 elements using:
Command(s): ESURF
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Inf Acoustic
1.4.1. Step 1: Mesh the Interior Fluid Domain

Mesh the interior fluid domain that is bounded by a circular or spherical boundary (PLANE182) with
FLUID29 elements.
Figure 1.4: Mesh the Fluid Domain
FLUID29
PLANE42
(structural
component)
circular boundary
1.4.2. Step 2: Generate the Infinite Acoustic Elements

Follow these steps:
1. Select the nodes on the circular or spherical boundary.
Command(s): NSEL
GUI: Utility Menu> Select> Entities
2. Specify FLUID129 as the infinite fluid element type associated with the FLUID29 element.
Command(s): TYPE, REAL
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Meshing> Mesh Attributes> Default Attribs
Main Menu> Preprocessor> Real Constants> Add/Edit/Delete
The infinite elements perform well for low as well as high frequency excitations. Numerical experiments have determined that the placement of the absorbing elements at a distance of approximately 0.2 beyond the region occupied by the structure or source of vibration can produce
accurate solutions. Here = c/f is the dominant wavelength of the pressure waves. c is the
speed of sound (SONC) in the fluid and f is the dominant frequency of the pressure wave. For
example, in the case of a submerged circular or spherical shell of diameter D, the radius of the
enclosing boundary, RAD, should be at least (D/2) + 0.2 . Also, for acoustic analysis in general,
the mesh must be fine enough to resolve the smallest dominant frequency.
169
Acoustics
3. Generate the absorption elements (FLUID129) on the boundary.
Command(s): ESURF
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Modeling> Create> Elements> Inf Acoustic
Figure 1.5: Add the Absorption Element on the Boundary
Select nodes on the

circular oundar
CY,2
rb
NEL,s,loc,x,rb
EURF
1.4.3. Step 3: Specify the Fluid-Structure Interface

Specify the fluid-structure interface:
1. Select all nodes on the interface.
Command(s): NSEL
GUI: Utility Menu> Select Entities
2. Select the fluid elements attached to this set of nodes.
Command(s): ESEL
GUI: Utility Menu> Select> Entities
3. Specify the selected nodes as fluid-structure interface nodes.
Command(s): SF
GUI: Main Menu> Preprocessor> Loads> Define Loads> Apply> Fluid-Struct Intr> On Nodes
Note
Be sure to reselect all nodes before solving your analysis.
170
Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution

Figure 1.6: Specify Fluid-Structure Interface
SOLID42
(type-1)
y
FLUID29
(type-2)
r t
x
Fluid-structure interface
N E,s,x,loc,x,(r t)
E N,s,0
E E,r,type,,2
,all,FSI
1.5. Applying Loads and Obtaining the Solution

In this step, you define the analysis type and options, apply loads, specify load step options, and initiate
the finite element solution. The next few sections explain how to do these tasks.
1.5.1. Step 1: Enter the SOLUTION Processor

Enter the SOLUTION processor by choosing GUI path Main Menu> Solution or by executing the /SOLU
command.
1.5.2. Step 2: Define the Analysis Type

Using either the GUI or a set of commands, define the analysis type and analysis options.
To define the analysis type, use one of the following:
Command(s): ANTYPE,HARMIC
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Type> New Analysis
You must choose New Analysis because restarts are not valid in a harmonic analysis. If you need to
apply additional harmonic loads, do a new analysis each time.
1.5.3. Step 3: Define Analysis Options

To specify the solution method, use one of the following:
Command(s): HROPT
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Analysis Options
Although full and mode superposition methods are options, choose the full method because it alone
can handle unsymmetric matrices.
To define the solution listing format, use one of the following:
Command(s): HROUT
171
Acoustics
This option determines how the program lists the harmonic degree-of-freedom solution in the printed
output (Jobname.OUT).
To specify the equation solver to be used, use one of the following:
Command(s): EQSLV
You can choose the sparse direct solver (default), the Jacobi Conjugate Gradient (JCG) solver, or the
Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient (ICCG) solver. The JCG solver is recommended for most models.
1.5.4. Step 4: Apply Loads on the Model

A harmonic analysis, by definition, assumes that any applied load varies harmonically (sinusoidally) with
time. To completely specify a harmonic load in an acoustic analysis, two pieces of information are usually
required: the amplitude and the forcing frequency. The amplitude is the maximum value of the load,
which you specify using the commands shown in Table 1.2: Commands for Applying Loads in Acoustic
Analysis (p. 173). The forcing frequency is the frequency of the harmonic load (in cycles/time). You specify
it later as a load step option with the HARFRQ command (Main Menu> Solution> Time/Frequenc>
Freq & Substeps). Step 5: Specify Load Step Options (p. 175) describes this task.
Table 1.1: Loads Applicable in an Acoustic Analysis (p. 172) shows all possible loads for a harmonic
acoustic analysis and the commands to define, list, and delete them. Notice that except for inertia loads,
you can define loads either on the solid model (keypoints, lines, and areas) or on the finite element
model (nodes and elements). For a general discussion of solid-model loads versus finite-element loads,
see Loading and Solution in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Table 1.1: Loads Applicable in an Acoustic Analysis
Load Type
Category
Cmd Family
Displacement
(UX,UY,UZ),
Constraints
Main Menu> Preprocessor>

Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Displacement or Potential
Main Menu> Solution> Define
Loads> Apply> Structural>
Displacement
Forces

Define Loads> Apply>
Force/Moment
Loads> Apply> Force/Moment
Surface
Loads
SF

Define Loads> Apply> load
type
Loads> Apply> load type
Inertia Loads
ACEL,
OMEGA,
DOMEGA,
CGLOC,

Define Loads> Apply> load
type
Pressure (PRES)
Force (FX,FX,FZ),
Moment
(MX,MY,MZ),
Flow loading
Pressure (PRES)
Impedance boundary flag (IMPD)
Fluid-structure interaction flag (FSI)
Gravity, Spinning, etc.
172
GUI Path

Load Type
Category
Cmd Family
GUI Path
CGOMGA,
DCGOMG,
IRLF

Loads> Apply> load type
In an analysis, you can apply, remove, operate on, or list loads.
1.5.4.1. Applying Loads Using the GUI

You access all loading operations except List (see below) through a series of cascading menus. From
the Solution menu, you choose the operation (apply, etc.), then the load type (displacement, force, etc.),
and then the object (keypoint, etc.) to which you are applying the load.
For example, to apply a displacement load to a line, follow this GUI path: Main Menu> Solution>
Define Loads> Apply> Displacement> On Lines
To list loads, use this GUI path: Utility Menu> List> Loads> load type
1.5.4.2. Applying Loads Using Commands

Table 1.2: Commands for Applying Loads in Acoustic Analysis (p. 173) lists all the commands you can
use to apply loads in an acoustic analysis.
Table 1.2: Commands for Applying Loads in Acoustic Analysis
Load Type
Solid
Model or
FE
Entity
Displacement,
Pressure
Solid
Model
Keypoints
DK
DKDELE
DKLIST
DTRAN
Solid
Model
Lines
DL
DLDELE
DLLIST
DTRAN
Solid
Model
Areas
DA
DADELE
DALIST
DTRAN
Finite
Elem
Nodes
DDELE
DLIST
DSCALE
Solid
Model
Keypoints
FK
FKDELE
FKLIST
FTRAN
Finite
Elem
Nodes
FDELE
FLIST
FSCALE
FCUM
Solid
Model
Lines
SFL
SFLDELE
SFLLIST
SFTRAN
SFGRAD
Solid
Model
Areas
SFA
SFADELE
SFALIST
SFTRAN
SFGRAD
Finite
Elem
Nodes
SF
SFDELE
SFLIST
SFSCALE
SFCUM ,
SFGRAD
Finite
Elem
Elements
SFE
SFEDELE
SFELIST
SFSCALE
SFBEAM,
SFCUM,
Force, Moment
Pressure, Impedance
boundary flag,
Fluid-Structure
Interaction
Flag
Apply
Delete
List
Operate
Apply
Settings
DCUM
-
173
Acoustics
Load Type
Solid
Model or
FE
Entity
Apply
Delete
List
Operate
Apply
Settings
SFFUN,
SFGRAD
Inertia
ACEL, CGLOC,
CGOMGA,
DCGOMG,
OMEGA,
DOMEGA,
IRLF
1.5.4.3. Load Types

Displacements (UX, UY, UZ) and pressures (PRES)
These are DOF (degree-of-freedom) constraints. For example, you specify zero displacements at a rigid
fluid-structure interface. You may also specify nonzero displacements, but remember that they are assumed to be harmonic. You usually specify zero pressures at free fluid boundaries (where the fluid is
not enclosed, such as at an opening).
Forces (FX, FY, FZ) and moments (MX, MY, MZ)
Usually, you specify these loads on the solid portion of the model to "excite" the fluid.
Flow Load
This is a mass flow rate per unit time (for example, kg/sec/sec in SI units). It represents a pulsating mass
flow rate at a node. Specify it using the FLOW force label:
Command(s): F,,FLOW
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Define Loads> Apply> Structural> Force/Moment> On Nodes
Pressure (PRES)
You can specify surface loads on the solid portion instead of forces and moments.
Impedance boundary flag(IMPD)
These are not really loads but indicate surfaces that absorb sound. Specify the degree of sound absorption
as the material property MU (boundary admittance or absorption coefficient).
Fluid-structure interaction flag (FSI)
This denotes an interface surface between the fluid and structure part of the model.
For problems with fluid-structure interaction on both sides of a structure (e.g., a submerged plate),
mesh the structure with solid elements to provide two distinct fluid-interaction surfaces. For problems
with fluid-structure interaction on only one side of a structure, mesh the structure with shell or solid
elements.
174
1.5.5. Step 5: Specify Load Step Options

You have the following options for a harmonic acoustic analysis:
Table 1.3: Load Step Options for a Harmonic Acoustic Analysis
Option
Command
GUI Path
Dynamics Options
Forcing frequency
range
HARFRQ
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq & Substeps
General Options
Number of harmonic
solutions
NSUBST Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq & Substeps
Stepped or ramped
loads
KBC
Main Menu> Solution> Load Step Opts> Time/Frequenc> Freq & Substeps
Control of printed
output
OUTPR
Main Menu> Solution> Output Ctrls> Solu Printout
Database and results

file output
OUTRES Main Menu> Solution> Output Ctrls> DB/Results File
Extrapolation of results
ERESX
Output Controls
Main Menu> Solution> Output Ctrls> Integration Pt
1.5.5.1. Dynamics Options

The only valid option in this category is the forcing frequency range, which must be defined (in
cycles/time) for a harmonic analysis. Within this range, you then specify the number of solutions to be
calculated. (See "General Options.")
1.5.5.2. General Options

You can request any number of harmonic solutions (via the NSUBST command or its equivalent GUI
path) to be calculated. The solutions (or substeps) will be evenly spaced within the previously specified
frequency range. For example, if you specify 10 solutions in the range 30 to 40 Hz, the program calculates
the response at 31, 32, 33, ..., 39, and 40 Hz. No response is calculated at the lower end of the frequency
range.
The loads may be stepped or ramped (via KBC or its GUI counterpart). By default, they are ramped; that
is, the load value increases gradually with each substep. By stepping the loads, you maintain the same
load value for all substeps in the frequency range.
1.5.5.3. Output Controls

Use OUTPR or its GUI equivalent if you want to include any results data on the printed output file
(Jobname.OUT). OUTRES and its GUI counterpart control the data on the results file (Jobname.RST).
ERESX and its GUI path allow you to review element integration point results by copying them to the
nodes instead of extrapolating them (default).
175
Acoustics
By default, the program writes only the last substep of each load step to the results file. If you want all
substeps (the solution at all frequencies) on the results file, be sure to set the FREQ field on OUTRES
to ALL (or 1).
1.5.6. Step 6: Back Up Your Database

Save a backup copy of the database on a named file using Utility Menu> File> Save as or the SAVE
command. Doing so enables you to retrieve your model should your computer abort during the solution.
(To retrieve a model, reenter the program and then issue the RESUME command or choose Utility
Menu> File> Resume.)
1.5.7. Step 7: Apply Additional Load Steps (Optional)

If you wish to apply additional load steps, repeat steps 5 and 6.
1.5.8. Step 8: Finish the Solution

Solve the analysis and then finish.
Command(s): SOLVE
GUI: Main Menu> Solution> Solve> Current LS
Command(s): FINISH
GUI: Main Menu> Finish
1.6. Reviewing Results

The program writes results from a harmonic acoustic analysis to the structural results file, Jobname.RST.
Results consist of the following data, all of which vary harmonically at each forcing frequency for which
the solution was calculated:
Primary data
Nodal pressures
Nodal displacements
Derived data
Nodal and element pressure gradients
Nodal and element stresses
Element forces
Nodal reaction forces
You can review this information using POST1 or POST26.
1.7. Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI)

The interaction of the fluid and the structure at a mesh interface causes the acoustic pressure to exert
a force applied to the structure and the structural motions produce an effective "fluid load." The governing finite element matrix equations then become:
176
Sample Applications
s
f
+
+
= s +
= f o
[R] is a "coupling" matrix that represents the effective surface area associated with each node on the
fluid-structure interface (FSI). The coupling matrix [R] also takes into account the direction of the normal
vector defined for each pair of coincident fluid and structural element faces that comprises the interface
surface. The positive direction of the normal vector, as the program uses it, is defined to be outward
from the fluid mesh and in towards the structure. Both the structural and fluid load quantities that are
produced at the fluid-structure interface are functions of unknown nodal degrees of freedom. Placing
these unknown "load" quantities on the left hand side of the equations and combining the two equations
into a single equation produces the following:

+

=

The foregoing equation implies that nodes on a fluid-structure interface have both displacement and
pressure degrees of freedom.
1.8. Sample Applications

The three example problems presented here illustrate the application of the acoustic elements. The
first example shows the use of the acoustic absorption elements in modeling far-field problems. The
second example is a near-field problem showing the use of standing wave prediction in an enclosed
space. The third example is a problem with radiation from two waveguides, where perfectly matched
layers (PML) are used to simulate absorption.
1.8.1. Example 1: Fluid-Structure Coupled Acoustic Analysis (Command

Method)
In this problem you will determine the first flexural mode (egg mode) frequency of an annular ring
submerged in water which extends to infinity. You will perform a harmonic analysis using a frequency
sweep between 34 and 38 Hz. The distance from the center of the ring to the infinite elements will at
least be equal to (D/2) + 0.2 where D is the outer diameter of the ring and = c/f is the dominant
wavelength of the pressure waves. Using 0.26035 for the outer radius of the ring, 1460 for the speed
of sound (c), and 36 for the estimated dominant frequency (f ), gives (D/2) + 0.2 = 0.26035 +
(0.2)(1460)/36 = 8.37146. However, this is much greater than the distance required when using the
acoustic infinite element and a distance of 2 times the outer radius of the ring will be used ( 2 x .26035
= .5207), as shown in the command listing.
/BATCH,LIST
/VERIFY,EV129-1S
/PREP7
/TITLE,AMA,EV129-1S,FLUID129,HARMONIC ANALYSIS
ET,1,PLANE182
! structural element
ET,2,FLUID29
! acoustic fluid element with ux & uy
et,3,129
! acoustic infinite line element
r,3,0.5207,0,0
ET,4,FLUID29,,1,0
! acoustic fluid element without ux & uy
! material properties
MP,EX,1,2.068e11
MP,DENS,1,7929
MP,NUXY,1,0
MP,DENS,2,1030
MP,SONC,2,1460
177
Acoustics
! create inner and outer quarter circles
CYL4,0,0,0.254,0,0.26035,90
CYL4,0,0,0.26035,0,0.5207,90
! select, assign attribute to and mesh area 1
ASEL,S,AREA,,1
AATT,1,1,1,0
LESIZE,1,,,16,1
LESIZE,3,,,16,1
LESIZE,2,,,1,1
LESIZE,4,,,1,1
MSHKEY,1
MSHAPE,0,2D
! mapped quad mesh
AMESH,1
! select, assign attribute to and mesh area 2
ASEL,S,AREA,,2
AATT,2,1,2,0
LESIZE,5,,,16,1
LESIZE,7,,,16,1
LESIZE,6,,,5
LESIZE,8,,,5
MSHKEY,0
MSHAPE,0,2D
! mapped quad mesh
AMESH,2
! reflect quarter circle into semicircle about x-axis
nsym,x,1000,all
! offset node number by 1000
esym,,1000,all
! reflect semicircle into full circle about y-axis
nsym,y,2000,all
! offset node number by 2000
esym,,2000,all
NUMMRG,ALL
! merge all quantities
! modify outer 2 layers of el29 into type 4
esel,s,type,,1
nsle,s
esln,s,0
nsle,s
esel,inve
nsle,s
emodif,all,type,4
esel,all
nsel,all
! define el129 line element
csys,1
nsel,s,loc,x,0.5207
type,3
real,3
mat,2
esurf
esel,all
nsel,all
! flag interface as fluid-structure interface
nsel,s,loc,x,0.26035
esel,s,type,,2
sf,all,fsi,1
nsel,all
esel,all
FINISH
! enter solution module
/SOLU
ANTYPE,harmic
! select harmonic analysis
hropt,full
f,19,fx,1000.
f,1019,fx,-1000.
harfrq,34.,38.
nsubst,100
kbc,1
SOLVE
FINISH
! postprocess
/post26
plcplx,0
nsol,2,1,u,x,d1ux
store
178
Sample Applications
conjug,3,2
prod,4,2,3
sqrt,5,4
*get,uxmx,vari,5,extrem,tmax
/COM ------------------------------------------------------------/COM
Expected Result:
/COM
/COM The following "uxmx" should equal 34.52 Hz.
/COM ------------------------------------------------------------*status,uxmx
finish
1.8.2. Example 2: Room Acoustic Analysis (Command Method)

This sample problem demonstrates the use of FLUID30 to predict the acoustic standing wave pattern
of a typical enclosure representing a room. A sound-absorption material is located at the bottom surface
of the enclosure and a vibrating structure with a cylindrical surface is located at the top right hand
corner of the enclosure. This problem will determine the acoustic pressure wave pattern when the
structure vibrates at an excitation frequency of 80 HZ.
/batch,list
/com, Harmonic Analysis - Room Acoustics
/PREP7
/TITLE,Room Acoustic Analysis
ANTYPE,HARM
ET,1,30
! Acoustic elements in contact with walls and vibrating surface
ET,2,30,,1 ! Acoustic elements in interior (not in contact with walls)
! Set parameters for mesh generation
XDIV=29
YDIV=19
ZDIV=1
CDIV=2
!
!
!
!
Number
Number
Number
Number
of
of
of
of
divisions
divisions
divisions
divisions
along
along
along
along
x-axis
y-axis
z-axis
radius
! Dimensions of the room

LEN=27
HGT=20
RAD=0.9
! Mesh generation
K,1
K,2,LEN
K,3,LEN,HGT
K,4,,HGT
K,5,,,-1
K,6,LEN,,-1
K,7,LEN,HGT,-1
K,8,,HGT,-1
L,1,5,1
L,2,6,1
L,3,7,1
L,4,8,1
CIRC,3,RAD,7,2,90,2
ADRAG,5,6,,,,, 3
PIO4=ATAN(1)
LENC=COS(PIO4)
LENC=LENC*RAD
HGTC=HGT-LENC
LENC=LEN-LENC
K,15,,HGTC
K,16,,HGTC,-1
K,17,LENC
K,18,LENC,,-1
L,1 ,17,XDIV
L,10,15,XDIV
179
Acoustics
L,11,4 ,XDIV
L,17,10,YDIV
L,15, 1,YDIV
L,2 ,9 ,YDIV
L,5 ,18,XDIV
L,13,16,XDIV
L,14,8 ,XDIV
L,18,13,YDIV
L,16,5 ,YDIV
L,6 ,12,YDIV
ESIZE,,CDIV
V,1 ,17,10,15, 5,18,13,16
V,15,10,11,4 ,16,13,14,8
V,17,2 ,9 ,10,18,6 ,12,13
VMESH,ALL
! Material properties
MP,DENS,1,2.35E-3
MP,SONC,1,1100.0
MP,MU,1,0.04
MP,DENS,2,2.35E-3
MP,SONC,2,1100.0
MP,MU,2,0.70
!
!
!
!
(Rho) density of air (lb/ft**3)

(C) speed of sound in air (ft/sec)
(Beta) absorption coefficient of the walls
('Beta' should be between 0 - 1)
! (Beta) absorption coefficient of

! the absorbing material on the floor
! ('Beta' should be between 0 -1)
MP,DENS,3,2.35E-3
MP,SONC,3,1100.0
MP,MU,3,0.0
! (Beta) zero absorption coefficient for interior elements
NSEL,S,LOC,Y,0.0
NSEL,R,LOC,X,12,15
ESLN
MAT,2
EMODIF,ALL
! Elements which have the absorbing material on the floor
! Boundary conditions
ALLS
NSEL,S,LOC,X,0.0
NSEL,A,LOC,Y,0.0
NSEL,A,LOC,X,LEN
NSEL,A,LOC,Y,HGT
D,ALL,UX,,,,,UY,UZ! Constrain all displacements to zero at the walls
LOCAL,11,1,27,20
NSEL,A,LOC,X,RAD
ESLN
ESEL,INVE
TYPE,2
MAT,3
EMODIF,ALL
! Interior elements are specified as Type=2 & material=3
ALLS
! Fluid-Structure Interface (FSI)
NSEL,S,LOC,X,RAD
ESLN
SF,ALL,FSI
NROTAT,ALL
D,ALL,UX,.01
D,ALL,UY,,,,,UZ
! Select interface (FSI) surface nodes

! Select elements attached to interface surface
! Specify vibrating surface as Fluid-structure interface
! Radial vibration amplitude of Vibrating surface
! Impedance Surface (IMPD)

CSYS,0
ALLS
NSEL,S,LOC,X,0.0
NSEL,A,LOC,X,LEN
NSEL,A,LOC,Y,0.0
NSEL,A,LOC,Y,HGT
SF,ALL,IMPD,1
! Specify the walls as Impedance Surface flag
! to activate absorption
180
Sample Applications
ALLS
FINISH
/SOLU
! Excitation Frequency for Harmonic Analysis
HARF,80,80
SOLVE
FINISH
! Frequency of excitation = 80 Hz
! Plot the Standing Wave Pattern (f = 80 Hz)

/POST1
/SHOW,ENCL1,GRPH,1
SET,1,1
! plot the real part of pressure response
EPLOT
/EDGE,1
/TITLE,-ROOM ACOUSTICS- * REAL PART OF PRESSURE
PLNS,PRES
SET,1,1,,1
! plot the imag. part of pressure response
/TITLE,-ROOM ACOUSTICS- * IMAG. PART OF PRESSURE
PLNS,PRES
FINISH
1.8.3. Example 2: Radiation From Two Waveguides

This sample problem demonstrates the use of FLUID220 to predict the acoustic standing wave pattern.
A sound-absorption material is located at the surfaces of the enclosure, which is modeled by using PML.
Refer to Perfectly Matched Layers (PML) in the Mechanical APDL High-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide for more information about using PML
/batch
/prep7
! structure dimensions
pi=3.1415926535
k=8*pi
c0=340
freq=k*c0/(2*pi)
! define elements and material
et,11,200,7
et,1,220,,1 ! acoustic
et,2,220,,1,,1 ! pml
mp,dens,1,1.
mp,sonc,1,c0
d=0.1
l=1.
s=0.5
a=2
dpml=0.25
h=d/2
rect,-l,0,s/2,s/2+d
rect,-l,0,-s/2,-s/2-d
rect,0,a,-a/2,a/2
rect,0,a+dpml,-a/2-dpml,a/2+dpml
asba,4,3,,delete,keep
aglue,all
esize,h
type,11
amesh,all
mshape,0
mshkey,0
asel,all
asel,u,,,5
esla
type,1
mat,1
esize,,1
vext,all,,,0,0,d,
asel,s,,,5
type,2,
181
Acoustics
mat,1
esize,,1
vext,all,,,0,0,d,
asel,s,loc,z,0
aclear,all
alls
nummrg,all
! define boundary condition
nsel,s,loc,x,a+dpml
nsel,a,loc,y,-a/2-dpml
nsel,a,loc,y,a/2+dpml
d,all,pres,0.
! hard excitation source
nsel,s,loc,x,-l
d,all,pres,1
alls
fini
! perform solution
/solu
eqslv,sparse
antype,harmic
harfrq,freq
solve
fini
/post26
/out
prcplx,0
nsel,s,loc,x,0
nsel,r,loc,y,s/2+d
*get,A1,node,0,num,max
nsel,s,loc,x,0
nsel,r,loc,y,s/2
*get,A2,node,0,num,max
nsel,s,loc,x,0
nsel,r,loc,y,-s/2-d
*get,B1,node,0,num,max
nsel,s,loc,x,0
nsel,r,loc,y,-s/2
*get,B2,node,0,num,max
nsel,s,loc,x,a
nsel,r,loc,y,a/2
*get,C1,node,0,num,max
nsel,s,loc,x,a
nsel,r,loc,y,-a/2
*get,C2,node,0,num,max
allsel
nsol,2,A1,pres,,Input_A1
nsol,3,A2,pres,,Input_A2
nsol,4,B1,pres,,Input_B1
nsol,5,B2,pres,,Input_B2
nsol,6,C1,pres,,Output_C1
nsol,7,C2,pres,,Output_C2
/com ***************Results****************************
prvar,2,4,
prvar,3,5,
prvar,6,7
/com *******************************************************
fini
182
Part III: Thin Film
Chapter 1: Thin Film Analysis

A thin film is a small gap of fluid between moving surfaces. This thin layer of fluid can alter the structural response of the structure by adding stiffness and/or damping to the system. Movement normal
to the gap produces a squeeze film effect. Movement tangential to the gap produces a slide film effect.
Thin film effects are important in macrostructures, but they are particularly critical in microstructures
where the damping and stiffening effects of thin layers of air can significantly affect the behavior of
devices used in micro-electromechanical systems (MEMS). Squeeze film effects are important in devices
such as accelerometers and micromirrors. Slide film effects are important in devices such as comb drives.
One method for assessing the effect of thin films is to use thin film fluid elements based on the Reynolds
number (which is known from lubrication technology and rarified gas physics) to calculate the stiffening
and damping effects. These effects can then be added to the overall system model. Separate element
types are used to assess squeeze and slide film effects.
The governing Reynolds equation limits the application of thin film analyses to structures with lateral
dimensions much greater than the gap separation. In addition, the pressure change across the gap
must be much smaller than the ambient (i.e., surrounding) pressure, and any viscous heating effects
must be ignored. If these three conditions are not satisfied, then the effects of the thin film cannot be
assessed using thin film elements. For those situations, the Navier Stokes equations must be solved
using FLOTRAN to assess the effect of the fluid.
The following thin film topics are available:
1.1. Elements for Modeling Thin Films
1.2. Squeeze Film Analysis
1.3. Modal Projection Method for Squeeze Film Analysis
1.4. Slide Film Damping
1.1. Elements for Modeling Thin Films

The ANSYS program has three elements for modeling thin film effects. FLUID136 and FLUID138 are
used to model squeeze film effects. FLUID139 is used to model slide film effects.
Table 1.1: Thin Film Fluid Elements
Element
Dimens.
Shape or Characteristic
DOF
FLUID136
3-D
Quadrilateral, 4 or 8-node
PRES
FLUID138
3-D
Line, 2-node
PRES
FLUID139
1-D
Line, 2-node
UX or UY or
UZ
1.2. Squeeze Film Analysis

Squeeze film analysis simulates the effects of fluid in small gaps between fixed surfaces and structures
moving perpendicular to the surfaces. Depending on the operating frequencies, the fluid can add stiffRelease 14.5 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
185
Thin Film Analysis

ening and/or damping to the system. At low frequencies, the fluid can escape before it compresses.
Therefore, the fluid only adds damping to the system. At high frequencies, the fluid compresses before
it can escape. Therefore, the fluid adds both stiffening and damping to the system.
A static analysis is used to determine the damping effects at low frequencies. A harmonic analysis is
used to determine the stiffening and damping effects at high frequencies.
The FLUID136 element is used to model the fluid domain between a fixed surface and a structure
moving normally to that surface. The fluid domain is modeled by overlaying FLUID136 elements on the
moving surface of the structure (i.e., lower surface of the structure adjacent to the fixed wall).
Figure 1.1: Moving Plate above a Fixed Wall
The FLUID138 element is used to model the pressure drop through holes in a moving structure. Microstructures are commonly perforated to reduce the damping effects of the fluid layer. FLUID138 elements
are used in conjunction with FLUID136 elements to obtain a consistent pressure distribution, including
the effects of holes.
Figure 1.2: Perforated Plate Structure
A squeeze film analysis can be performed on structures with known velocities or unknown velocities.
If the velocity profile is known, you can apply it directly to the fluid elements. If the velocity profile is
not known (or is too complicated), it can be determined from the mode-frequency response of the
structure (model projection method). This section deals with directly applying the velocities. Modal
Projection Method for Squeeze Film Analysis (p. 201) covers the modal projection method.
The following squeeze film analysis topics are available:
1.2.1. Static Analysis Overview
1.2.2. Harmonic Analysis Overview
1.2.3.Transient Response Analysis Overview
1.2.4. Flow Regime Considerations
1.2.5. Modeling and Meshing Considerations
1.2.6. Analysis Settings and Options
1.2.7. Loads and Solution
1.2.8. Review Results
1.2.9. Sample Harmonic Analysis
1.2.10. Simplified Transient Analysis
186
Squeeze Film Analysis

1.2.11. Complex Transient Analysis
1.2.1. Static Analysis Overview

Use a static analysis to calculate the pressure distribution for low operating frequencies, where the
compression of the fluid (and thus the stiffening effect) is negligible. The resulting pressure distribution
can then be used to extract a damping coefficient that reflects the damping effect of the fluid.
=
z
F is the total pressure force at the fluid structure interface and vz is the normal velocity component of
the moving structure. A typical pressure distribution on a rectangular plate is shown in Figure 1.3: Pressure
Distribution on a Plate at a Low Driving Frequency (p. 187).
Figure 1.3: Pressure Distribution on a Plate at a Low Driving Frequency
1.2.2. Harmonic Analysis Overview

Use a harmonic analysis to calculate the complex pressure distribution for high operating frequencies.
The complex pressure distribution can be used to extract a damping coefficient and a stiffness coefficient.
The phase shift between the pressure and the velocity is caused by compression of the fluid. The real
pressure component contributes to the damping of the system. The imaginary pressure component
contributes to the stiffening of the system.
=
Re
Im
FRe is the real component of the pressure force. FIm is the imaginary component of the pressure force.
Omega () is the frequency (rad/sec). The damping and stiffness coefficients are frequency-dependent.
Figure 1.4: Damping and Squeeze Stiffness Coefficients vs. Frequency (p. 187) illustrates the frequency
dependency for a typical microsystem application.
Figure 1.4: Damping and Squeeze Stiffness Coefficients vs. Frequency
187
Thin Film Analysis

The DMPEXT command is used to extract frequency-dependent damping parameters for use with the
MDAMP, DMPRAT, ALPHAD, and BETAD command inputs.
1.2.3. Transient Response Analysis Overview

A transient analysis is often necessary (for example, in problems where a moving structure closes the
gap). When there is contact, it is prudent to use a nonlinear analysis to model the contact more accurately.
A linear transient analysis can be performed when the gap between a moving structure and a fixed
surface remains relatively large. For information on the linear and nonlinear Reynolds equatons, refer
to Flow Between Flat Surfaces in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
For transient analysis example problems, see Simplified Transient Analysis (p. 194) and Complex Transient
Analysis (p. 196).
1.2.4. Flow Regime Considerations

The Reynolds squeeze film approach assumes a continuous fluid flow regime. To ensure a continuous
flow regime, the characteristic length (i.e., gap thickness) must be more than one hundred times larger
than the mean free path of the fluid particles.
m 0
0 0
0
Lm(po) is the mean free path of the fluid at the operating pressure P0, and L0 is the mean path at reference
pressure P0. If the fluid is air at atmospheric pressure (1.01325*105), then by definition L0 is approximately
64*10-9 meters (64 m). So, for continuum theory to be directly applicable (without modification) to air
at atmospheric pressure, the gap should be greater than 6.4 m (64*10-9 meters * 100).
The applicability of the continuum theory is generally assessed using the Knudsen number, which is
equal to the mean free fluid path divided by the gap. For continuum theory to be valid, the Knudsen
number should be less than 0.01.
=

For high Knudsen numbers, the continuum theory is not valid. However, the dynamic viscosity can be
adjusted to simulate the high Knudsen number flow regime. The default flow regime for FLUID136 and
FLUID138 is continuum theory (KEYOPT(1) = 0). Set KEYOPT (1) = 1 to specify the high Knudsen number
flow regime. For FLUID136, set KEYOPT(1) = 2 to specify the high Knudsen number flow regime with
surface accommodation factors.
The type of reflection of the gas molecules at the wall interface is specified using accommodation
factors. Squeeze film models assume diffuse reflection of the gas molecules at the wall interface (accommodation factor = 1). This assumption is valid for most metals, but is less accurate for micromachined
surfaces, particularly those fabricated from silicon. Materials such as silicon cause specular reflection.
Typical accommodation factors for silicon are between 0.80 and 0.90. For more information on accommodation factors, see Flow Between Flat Surfaces in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
188
1.2.5. Modeling and Meshing Considerations

The methods used to model and mesh the fluid domain depend on the squeeze film analysis method.
If the velocities are directly applied to the fluid elements, the fluid elements can be independent of the
structure. If the velocities are determined from the mode-frequency response of the structure (modal
projection method), the fluid elements cannot be independent of the structure.
In the modal projection method, the FLUID136 elements must lie on the surface of the structural mesh.
Use the ESURF command to overlay FLUID136 elements on the surface of an existing structural mesh.
FLUID136 supports 4-node and 8-node options, along with degenerative triangles.
The FLUID138 element is used to model the pressure drop in the channels (holes) in a structure as
shown in Figure 1.2: Perforated Plate Structure (p. 186). The element supports a circular hole configuration
and a rectangular hole configuration (KEYOPT(3)). The element works in conjunction with FLUID136 to
correctly compute the pressure distribution on the structure's surface and through the channels. To
correctly model the FLUID138 element:
1.
Use a single FLUID138 element for each hole.
2.
Align the FLUID138 element at the center of the hole. The element should extend through the depth
of the hole and have a length equal to the depth of the hole.
3.
Assume the pressure at the center of the hole (flush with the plate surface in the thin film region) is at
the same pressure as the nodes modeled at the periphery of the hole. Couple the nodes of the FLUID136
element at the whole periphery with the node of the FLUID138 element as shown in Figure 1.5: Coupling
of Nodes at the Hole Periphery with the Center Node of a FLUID138 Element (p. 189).
Figure 1.5: Coupling of Nodes at the Hole Periphery with the Center Node of a FLUID138 Element
FLUID138 element
Coupled nodes of hole periphery

with the first node of the
FLUID138 element
Structural mesh shown. FLUID136

elements lie underneath the
structure on the thin film surface.
1.2.6. Analysis Settings and Options

A thin film analysis using FLUID136 and FLUID138 can be a linear or nonlinear solution for both a static
and a transient analysis. No special analysis options or load step options are required. See the Basic
Analysis Guide for general guidelines on defining the analysis type and analysis options.
Harmonic analysis is a linear analysis. For a harmonic analysis, you must use the full method.
189
Thin Film Analysis
1.2.7. Loads and Solution

The fluid elements support pressure loads at the nodal PRES degrees of freedom and velocity body
loads (FLUE) at the node or element as shown in Table 1.2: Load Options for Thin Film Fluid Elements (p. 190). Pressure loads are applied using the D family of commands. The velocity load is applied
using the BF family of commands. For the velocity load, a positive velocity load will cause a positive
pressure. For a harmonic analysis, a positive velocity load will cause a positive in-phase pressure load.
See Applying Body Loads for details on applying body loads.
Note
Velocity body loads (FLUE) are the velocities of the moving wall in a direction normal to the
wall. They are not in-plane velocities of the fluid.
Table 1.2: Load Options for Thin Film Fluid Elements
Load
Type
ANSYS Label
Pressure
Nodal
DOF
PRES
Normal Velocity
Body
Load
FLUE
The recommended equation solvers for the fluid elements are the Sparse Direct Solver (SPARSE), the
Jacobi Conjugate Gradient Solver (JCG) and the Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient Solver (ICCG).
1.2.8. Review Results

Results from a thin film fluid analysis are stored on the Jobname.RST file. The primary result from the
fluid analysis is the nodal pressures. For a harmonic analysis, the pressures are stored as complex values
(Real and Imaginary components). The General Postprocessor (POST1) discusses reading results into the
database and viewing the nodal degree of freedom (pressure) results.
Each fluid element computes and stores results for the mid-plane fluid velocity (PG) and effective viscosity. Use the element table to retrieve and view these results.
To compute the damping and squeeze stiffness coefficients from the resulting pressure distribution on
the surface of a structure, use the element table tools to compute the force on a per-element basis,
then sum over all elements to compute the coefficients. The following command sequence demonstrates
how to do this task. This example assumes parameters omega and velo exist (frequency and normal
velocity (FLUE loading), respectively).
set,1,1
etable,presR,temp
etable,earea,volu
smult,forR,presR,earea
ssum
*get,Fre,ssum,,item,forR
set,1,1,,1
etable,presI,temp
smult,forI,presI,earea
ssum
*get,Fim,ssum,,item,forI
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
K=abs(Fim*omega/velo)
C=abs(Fre/velo)
! Compute squeeze stiffness coefficient

! Compute damping coefficient
190
store Real solution

extract "Real" pressure
extract element area
compute "Real" force
sum over all elements
get the total "real" force
store Imaginary solution
extract "Imaginary" pressure
compute "Imaginary" force
sum over all elements
get the total "imaginary" force
/com, ** Equivalent squeeze stiffness coefficient **

*stat,K
/com, ** Equivalent damping coefficient **
*stat,C
1.2.9. Sample Harmonic Analysis

Problem Description
A rectangular beam with perforated holes under transverse motion is modeled to compute the effective
damping and squeeze stiffness coefficients. The thin film surface of the structure is modeled with FLUID136 elements. FLUID138 elements are used to model the hole regions. By altering the boundary
condition of the free FLUID138 node, we can simulate different pressure boundary conditions of the
hole region. The purpose of the analysis is to compute the equivalent squeeze stiffness and damping
coefficient for an assumed uniform plate velocity. A harmonic analysis is performed at 150 kHz. A previous modal analysis indicated that the pertinent eigenfrequency was 150 kHz. Since the analysis is
linear, the magnitude of the velocity can be arbitrary for computing the coefficients.
Three cases were considered:
1. Holes modeled with no resistance (pressure = 0 at hole location, no FLUID138 elements ).
2. Holes modeled with finite resistance (FLUID138 elements modeled, pressure set to zero on fluid node
at top of plate).
3. Holes modeled with infinite resistance (no pressure specification at hole location, no FLUID138 elements).
Case 1 is typical for large diameter holes compared to the hole depth. Case 3 is typical for very high
flow resistance, which happens in the case of narrow and long holes. Case 2 is the most accurate case
where the fluid pressure drop is taken into account by the FLUID138 elements.
Results
Table 1.3: Beam Model Results Considering Perforated Holes (p. 191) lists the damping and squeeze
coefficient results. Figure 1.6: Pressure Distribution (Real Component) (p. 192) and Figure 1.7: Pressure
Distribution (Imaginary Component) (p. 192) illustrate the real and imaginary pressure distribution. The
input file for case 2 is listed.
Table 1.3: Beam Model Results Considering Perforated Holes
Frequency
(kHz.)
Hole option
Damping Coefficient
Squeeze stiffness coefficient
150
Infinite resistance
2.016e-5
1.201
150
Finite resistance
1.325e-5
.5465
150
No resistance
1.165e-5
.4607
191
Thin Film Analysis

Figure 1.6: Pressure Distribution (Real Component)
Figure 1.7: Pressure Distribution (Imaginary Component)
Command Listing
The input file for this example is shown below for the finite-resistance Case 2
/batch,list
/PREP7
/title, Damping and Squeeze film stiffness calculations for a rigid
/com,
plate with holes
/com
uMKS units
ET, 1,136,1
ET, 2,138,1
! 4-node option, High Knudsen Number

! Circular hole option, Hugh Knudsen Number
s_l=100
s_l1=60
s_w=20
s_t=1
c_r=3
d_el=2
pamb=.1
visc=18.3e-12
velo=2000
freq=150000
pi=3.14159
omega=2*pi*freq
pref=.1
mfp=64e-3
Knud=mfp/d_el
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Half Plate length (um)

Plate hole location
Plate width
Plate thickness
Hole radius
Gap
ambient pressure (MPa)
viscosity kg/(um)(s)
arbitrary velocity (um/s)
Frequency (Hz.)
!
!
!
!
Frequency (rad/sec)
Reference pressure (MPa)
mean free path (um)
Knudsen number
mp,visc,1,visc
mp,visc,2,visc
! Dynamic viscosity gap

! Dynamic viscosity holes
192

r,1,d_el,,,pamb
rmore,pref,mfp
! Real constants - gap
r,2,c_r,,,pamb
rmore,pref,mfp
! Real constants - hole
! Build the model

rectng,-s_l,s_l,-s_w,s_w
pcirc,c_r
agen,3,2,,,-s_l1/3
agen,3,2,,,s_l1/3
ASBA, 1, all
TYPE, 1
MAT, 1
smrtsize,4
AMESH, all
! Mesh plate domain
! Begin Hole generation

*do,i,1,5
nsel,all
*GET, numb, node, , num, max
N, numb+1,-s_l1+i*s_l1/3,,
N, numb+2,-s_l1+i*s_l1/3,, s_t
TYPE,2
MAT, 2
REAL,2
NSEL, all
E, numb+1, numb+2
ESEL, s, type,,1
NSLE,s,1
local,11,1,-s_l1+i*s_l1/3
csys,11
NSEL,r, loc, x, c_r
NSEL,a, node, ,numb+1
*GET, next, node, , num, min
CP, i, pres, numb+1, next
nsel,u,node, ,numb+1
nsel,u,node, ,next
CP, i, pres,all
csys,0
*enddo
! End hole generation
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
nsel,a,loc,y,-s_w
nsel,a,loc,y,s_w
nsel,r,loc,z,-1e-9,1e-9
d,all,pres
nsel,all
esel,s,type,,2
nsle,s,1
nsel,r,loc,z,s_t
d,all,pres,0
dlist,all
! Plate domain
! Hole domain
! Create nodes for link elements
! Define 2-D link element
! Select all nodes on the hole circumference
!Coupled DOF set for constant pressure
! Fix pressure at outer plate boundary
! P=0 at top of plate
allsel
bfe,all,flue,,velo
fini
finish
/solu
antyp,harm
harfrq,freq
solve
finish
/post1
! Apply arbitrary velocity
! Full Harmonic analysis
193
Thin Film Analysis

esel,s,type,,1
set,1,1
etable,presR,pres
etable,earea,volu
smult,forR,presR,earea
ssum
*get,Fre,ssum,,item,forR
set,1,1,,1
etable,presI,pres
smult,forI,presI,earea
ssum
*get,Fim,ssum,,item,forI
! extract "Real" pressure

! compute "Real" force
! extract "Imaginary" pressure

! compute "Imaginary" pressure
K=abs(Fim*omega/velo)
C=abs(Fre/velo)
! Compute equivalent stiffness

! Compute equivalent damping
/com, ******* Equivalent stiffness ************************

*stat,K
/com, ******* Equivalent damping **************************
*stat,C
finish
1.2.10. Simplified Transient Analysis

Problem Description
A simplified transient analysis is performed for a rectangular plate fixed at two ends with a hole in the
center. A stepped pressure load is applied to the top surface of the plate. SOLID185 elements model
the structure. FLUID136 elements model the thin film surface and a FLUID138 element models the hole
region. Displacement and pressure time history results are determined at the bottom of the plate on
the circumference of the hole.
Command Listing
The input file for this example is shown below.
/PREP7
/title, Simplified Transient Analysis
/com
uMKS units
ET, 1,136,1
keyop,1,3,2
et,2,138,1
ET,3,185,,3
!
!
!
!
4-node option, High Knudsen Number

PRES + UZ + UY + UZ DOFs, implicit treatment
Hole
Structural element
s_l=20
s_w=20
s_t=10
c_r=6
d_el=2
pamb=.1
visc=18.3e-12
pref=.1
mfp=64e-3
Knud=mfp/d_el
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

Plate width
Plate thickness
Hole radius
Gap
Ambient pressure (MPa)
Mean free path (um)
Knudsen number
mp,visc,1,visc
mp,visc,2,visc
mp,ex,3,79e3
mp,dens,3,19300e-18
mp,nuxy,3,.1

! Dynamic viscosity hole
! Gold
r,1,d_el,,,pamb
rmore,pref,mfp
! Real constants - FLUID136
r,2,c_r,,,pamb
! Real constants - FLUID138
194

rmore,pref,mfp
block,-s_l,s_l,-s_w,s_w,0,s_t
cyl4,0,0,c_r,,c_r,,s_t
vsbv,1,2
numcmp,all
type,3
mat,3
real,3
mshape,1,3d
esize,,3
vmesh,1
! SOLID185 mesh
nsel,s,loc,z,0
esln,s
TYPE, 1
MAT, 1
real,1
esurf
allsel
! FLUID136 mesh
!make the nodes/elem for 138

*get,numb,node,,num,max
n,numb+1,0,0,0
n,numb+2,0,0,s_t
type,2
mat,2
real,2
e,numb+1,numb+2
! FLUID138 mesh
!couple hole pres eq

esel,s,type,,1
nsle,s,1
local,11,1,0,0,0
csys,11
nsel,r,loc,x,c_r
nsel,a,node,,numb+1
cp,1,pres,all
csys,0
allsel
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
nsel,a,loc,y,-s_w
nsel,a,loc,y,s_w
nsel,a,node,,numb+2
d,all,pres
nsel,all
dlist
!esel,s,type,,1
!nsle,s,1
!nsel,u,cp,,1
!cm,FLUN,node
!allsel
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
d,all,ux
d,all,uy
d,all,uz
allsel
! Fix two ends of SOLID185 elements
nsel,s,loc,z,s_t
sf,all,pres,1.e+1
allsel
! Apply pressure loading on SOLID185 top surface
fini
/solu
antype,trans
195
Thin Film Analysis

kbc,1
nropt,full
time,180e-6
!time,6e-6
deltim,2e-6
outres,all,none
outres,nsol,all
outres,esol,all
cnvtol,pres,,1.e-6
cnvtol,u
,,1.e-6
save
solve
fini
! Specify a stepped loading
! Specify time step size
! Specify convergence values
/post26
nl=node(c_r,0,0)
nsol,2,nl,uz
nsol,3,nl,pres
prvar,2,3
fini
/post1
set,last
esel,s,type,,1
etable,_gap,nmisc,2
pretab,_gap
fini
! Print time history results
! Retrieve results at last substep

! FLUID136
! Print GAP value
1.2.11. Complex Transient Analysis

Problem Description
A complex transient analysis is performed for a rectangular top plate fixed at two ends with a hole in
the center. A voltage is applied to the bottom surface of the top plate for a specified time and the
voltage is then set to a release value. The top plate does not make contact with the bottom plate.
SOLID185 elements model the top plate. TRANS126 transducer elements are created between the plates.
FLUID136 elements model the thin film surface and a FLUID138 element models the hole region. The
applied voltage is shown in Figure 1.8: Applied Voltage (p. 197). Displacement and pressure results at
the bottom of the top plate on the circumference of the hole are shown in Figure 1.9: Displacement
Time History (p. 197) and Figure 1.10: Pressure Time History (p. 198).
196
Results
Figure 1.8: Applied Voltage
Figure 1.9: Displacement Time History
197
Thin Film Analysis

Figure 1.10: Pressure Time History
Command Listing
/batch,list
/title, Complex Transient Analysis
!/nerr,,,-1
/PREP7
/title, Complex Transient Analysis
/com
uMKS units
ET, 1,136,1
keyop,1,3,2
keyop,1,4,0
keyop,1,5,2
keyop,1,6,1
et,2,185
ET,3,185

!implicit
!compressible
!fluid gap option
!mech gap option
s_l=100
s_w=20
s_t=1
d_el=2
pamb=.1
visc=18.3e-12
pref=.1
mfp=64e-3
Knud=mfp/d_el
mingapf=1e-2
mech_mingapf=1e-2
app_volt=23.281
app_pres=0
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
mp,visc,1,visc
mp,ex,3,79e+3
mp,dens,3,19300e-18
mp,nuxy,3,.1

! Gold
! Structural element
Plate width
Plate thickness
Gap
ambient pressure (MPa)
mean free path (um)
Knudsen number
Minimum gap for real constanst on element 136
Mechanical minumum gap for real constant on element 136
Applied voltage
Applied pressure at boundaries
r,1,d_el,,,pamb
rmore,pref,mfp,0,0,1,mech_mingapf
rmore,mingapf,1.e+18,0.e-2,-4.e+0,-0.e-2,1.e-0
!
mingapf,penpar,deadpres,deadspr,deaddam,deadeps
198
!top plate
block,-s_l,s_l,-s_w,s_w,0,s_t
lsel,s,line,,4,5,1
lsel,a,line,,2,7,5
lesize,all,,,19,-.1
lsel,s,line,,1,8,7
lsel,a,line,,3,6,3
lesize,all,,,11,-.1
lsel,s,line,,9,12,1
lesize,all,,,2
type,3
mat,3
real,3
!mshape,1,3d
mshape,1,3d
cyl4,0,0,s_w/50,,,,s_t+1
vsbv,1,2
numcmp,volu
vmesh,1
!hole
n,10000,0,0,0
n,10001,0,0,s_t
et,6,138,1,,0
r,10,s_w/200,,,pamb,
rmore,pref,mfp
type,6
real,10
mat,1
e,10000,10001
lsel,s,line,,13,16
nsll,s,1
nsel,a,node,,10000
cp,next,pres,all
d,10001,pres,0
allsel
!INSTALL TOP PLATE

!Set element depth
!Mesh top plate with Gold material
!Create a hole in top plate
!Specify nodes for hole element (138)

!Define hole shape
!Define hole diameter and pressures
!Tie top plate hole edge to hole element.
!else emtgen computes INCORRECT areas

nsel,s,loc,z,0
cm,trun,node
allsel
emtgen,'TRUN',,,'uz',-d_el,mingapf*d_el,1.e-18
!Create transducer elements 126 using emtgen
!apply gap information
!fluid
nsel,s,loc,z,0
!Define Fluid region
esln,s
TYPE, 1
MAT, 1
real,1
esurf
!Surface the solid top plate with 136 squeeze film elements
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
nsel,a,loc,y,-s_w
nsel,a,loc,y,s_w
d,all,pres
nsel,all
!Fix pressure at outer plate boundary
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
d,all,ux
d,all,uy
d,all,uz
allsel
nsel,s,loc,z,s_t
sf,all,pres,app_pres
allsel
!Apply pressure at boundary
199
Thin Film Analysis

!fix bottom node voltage/disp
nsel,s,loc,z,-d_el
d,all,ux
d,all,uy
d,all,uz
d,all,volt
allsel
!fix top node voltage
cmsel,s,trun
d,all,volt,app_volt
allsel
!Set voltage/displacement at bottom plate

!V(bottom)=0V
!displacement(bottom)=(0,0,0)
!Set voltage on top side to applied voltage value

!for pulldown
fini
/solu
antype,trans
kbc,1
time,11.e-5
!autots,on
deltim,1.e-5,
nsubst,10,1000,2
outres,all,none
outres,nsol,2
outres,rsol,2
outres,esol,2
cnvtol,pres,,5.e-6
cnvtol,u
,,5.e-6
nropt,full
neqit,500
save
solve
time,20e-5
nropt,full
neqit,100
outres,all,none
outres,nsol,2
outres,rsol,2
outres,esol,2
cnvtol,pres,,5.e-6
cnvtol,u
,,5.e-6
solve
cmsel,s,trun
d,all,volt,1.5
allsel
time,20.4e-5
outres,all,none
outres,nsol,20
outres,rsol,20
outres,esol,20
cnvtol,pres,,5.e-6
cnvtol,u
,,5.e-6
cnvtol,pres,,1.e-4
cnvtol,u
,,1.e-4
autots,on
deltim,.005e-5,0.001e-5,1e-5
solve
time,30e-5
autots,on
deltim,.5e-5,0.02e-5,1e-5
solve
fini
!Pulldown stage
!enforce regular timesteps
!Reduce number of equilibrium iterations to save time.
!Setup release time

!Set release voltage across
!only limited time here
!Long grinding period here, reduce result steps so we don't go
!over 1000 results.
!Let Autotimestep run here

!to better capture the overshoot movement on release
!After initial snapback,
!increase timestep as overshoot decays.
/POST1
allsel
GG=node(0,-0.4,0)
SET,LIST,999
SET,,, ,,, ,30
!*
!*
PLESOL, NMISC,13, 0,1.0
presol,nmisc,13
200
Modal Projection Method for Squeeze Film Analysis

/out,
fini
!*list,closes,lis1
!*list,closes,lis2
/post26
NUMVAR,200
SOLU,191,NCMIT
STORE,MERGE
FILLDATA,191,,,,1,1
REALVAR,191,191
NSOL,2,GG,U,Z,UZ_2
NSOL,3,GG,PRES,,PRES_3
NSOL,4,GG,VOLT,,VOLT_4
plvar,2
plvar,3
plvar,4
fini
1.3. Modal Projection Method for Squeeze Film Analysis

Modal projection techniques provide an efficient method for computing damping parameters for flexible
bodies. The Modal Projection Technique is the process of calculating the squeeze stiffness and damping
coefficients of the fluid using the eigenvectors of the structure. In the modal projection method, the
velocity profiles are determined from the mode-frequency response of the structure.
The following modal projection method topics are available:
1.3.1. Modal Projection Method Overview
1.3.2. Steps in Computing the Damping Parameter Using the Modal Projection Technique
1.3.3. Example Problem Using the Modal Projection Method
1.3.4. Damping Extraction for Large Signal Cases
1.3.1. Modal Projection Method Overview

For a structure undergoing flexible body dynamics, the displacement and velocity vary along the
structure. For a thin-film fluid adjacent to the structure, there is a true dependency between the structural velocity and the fluid pressure. A modal analysis of a structure provides information on the fundamental eigenfrequencies and mode shapes (eigenvectors). For each mode, i, we can impress the distributed eigenvector values as velocity loads and compute the resulting pressure distribution and hence
the fluid force acting on mode j. Therefore, we can compute a matrix of modal squeeze stiffness coefficients, Kij, and modal damping coefficients, Cij. The diagonal terms of these matrices are the coefficients
of each mode, the off-diagonal terms represent the "cross-talk" coefficients between modes. Figure 1.11: Modal Projection Technique for Damping Characterization (p. 202) illustrates the modal projection
technique.
201
Thin Film Analysis

Figure 1.11: Modal Projection Technique for Damping Characterization
From the modal squeeze and stiffness coefficients for the main diagonal terms (source mode = target
mode), other useful damping parameters can be calculated. For example, the modal damping ratio,
, and the modal squeeze to stiffness ratio, kri, can be computed by:
i = ii
i i
2
i = ii i
Where mi is the modal mass and i the eigenfrequency. The damping ratio can be used to compute
ALPHAD and BETAD parameters for Rayleigh damping (see ABEXTRACT command), or to specify constant
and modal damping by means of the DMPRAT or MDAMP commands.
The squeeze to stiffness ratio represents the relative stiffening of the mechanical system due to fluid
compression and resonance shift. If the squeeze-to-stiffness ratio is small (e.g., <.02), then the squeeze
stiffness affects the structural stiffness by less than 2%, which may be negligible. At higher frequencies,
the ratio can be much larger, indicating a significant stiffening of the structure.
The stiffness and damping coefficients may be strongly frequency-dependent. Figure 1.12: Damping
and Squeeze Stiffness Parameters for a Rectangular Plate (p. 202) shows a typical frequency dependency
of the squeeze and damping forces on a flat plate, and the resulting stiffness and damping constant.
The frequency where the forces intersect is known as the cut-off frequency. Below this frequency,
structures may be accurately characterized by a constant damping coefficient, and stiffness effects can
be ignored. Structures which operate far above the cut-off can be described by a constant stiffness
coefficient, and damping effects can be ignored.
Figure 1.12: Damping and Squeeze Stiffness Parameters for a Rectangular Plate
1.3.2. Steps in Computing the Damping Parameter Using the Modal Projection
Technique
The basic steps in performing the analysis are as follows:
202

1.
Build a structural and thin-film fluid model and mesh.
2.
Perform a modal analysis on the structure.
3.
Extract the desired mode eigenvectors.
4.
Select the desired modes for damping parameter calculations.
5.
Perform a harmonic analysis on the thin-film elements.
6.
Compute the modal squeeze stiffness and damping parameters.
7.
Compute modal damping ratio and squeeze stiffness coefficient.
8.
Display the results.
Steps 4-7 have been automated using the DMPEXT command macro. Step 8 is available through the
MDPLOT command macro.
1.3.2.1. Modeling and Meshing

Model preparation for the modal projection method for damping parameter extraction follows very
closely to the method outlined in Modeling and Meshing Considerations (p. 189). Both the structural
model and the thin-film fluid model need to be defined simultaneously. Group the fluid nodes on the
structure surface into a node component named "FLUN". This component should only include nodes
attached to FLUID136 elements. This component defines the nodes for which the eigenvector values
will be extracted from the mode-frequency analysis.
1.3.2.2. Perform Modal Analysis

A modal analysis of the structure is required to obtain the eigenvectors of the desired modes. The
modal analysis should be set up with the following options:
1. Use the Block Lanczos, Supernode, or PCG Lanczos (if applicable) method (MODOPT command).
2. Extract the eigenmodes of interest (MODOPT command).
3. Expand the eigenmodes of interest (MXPAND command).
The expanded eigenmodes will compute the necessary eigenvectors required for the modal projection
technique. Note: The thin-film fluid elements may be left active in the model when performing the
modal analysis. These elements will not contribute to the modal solution.
1.3.2.3. Extracting Eigenvectors

The eigenvectors from the modal analysis must be retrieved and stored in a format appropriate for use
by the thin-film fluid elements for a subsequent harmonic fluid analysis. Use the RMFLVEC command
in POST1 to retrieve the eigenvectors. The data is stored in the file Jobname.EFL.
1.3.2.4. Performing a Harmonic Analysis and Extracting Damping Parameters

The command macro DMPEXT performs a harmonic analysis with the thin-film fluid elements using
the eigenvector information for the desired mode(s). The macro also extracts damping parameter information for use in subsequent dynamic structural analysis. Damping parameters extracted include
203
Thin Film Analysis

the modal damping coefficient, modal squeeze stiffness coefficient, damping ratio, and the squeeze-tostiffness ratio.
DMPEXT requires a "source" mode number and a "target" mode number. The source mode is the mode
for which the eigenvectors are used to impart a velocity field on the fluid elements. The target mode
is the mode which is acted on by the pressure solution (fluid forces). For transverse oscillations and a
uniform gap, there is little mode interaction and hence only diagonal terms are required (source mode
(i) = target mode (j)). For transverse motion with nonuniform gaps, or asymmetric plate motion, mode
interaction effects (cross-talk) can be significant and should be computed (source mode .ne. target
mode). Typical cross-talk scenarios are shown in Figure 1.13: Fluidic Cross-Talk between Transverse and
Rotational Motion (p. 204).
Figure 1.13: Fluidic Cross-Talk between Transverse and Rotational Motion
Damping parameter extraction can be selected over a desired frequency range or at the eigenfrequencies
of the structure. Damping results are computed and stored in an array parameter.
Computed damping ratios may be used in subsequent dynamic structural analyses. A constant damping
ratio can be applied using DMPRAT for a subsequent harmonic or mode-superposition transient analysis. Mode damping ratios may be applied using the MDAMP command for use in mode-superposition
harmonic and transient analyses. Note: Subsequent structural analysis using these damping parameters
do not require the thin-film fluid elements in the model.
The command macro ABEXTRACT (like DMPEXT) extracts alpha and beta damping parameters for use
in the ALPHAD and BETAD commands. These commands define Rayleigh damping and can be used
in time-transient structural analysis to model damping effects. The damping parameters are computed
from two modes defined by the user.
The command macro MDPLOT may be used to display the frequency-dependent damping parameters.
1.3.3. Example Problem Using the Modal Projection Method

A rectangular beam with perforated holes is modeled to compute the effective damping coefficient,
stiffness coefficient, and damping ratio. The surface of the structure is modeled with FLUID136 elements
to represent the thin film. The structure is modeled with SOLID185 elements. This example computes
the Rayleigh damping coefficients ( and ) and modal damping ratios i for use in a transient dynamic
analysis.
The problem is defined as an extension to the earlier squeeze film example. After modeling the fluid
domain, the structure of the beam is modeled and meshed with SOLID185 elements. A modal analysis
is performed on the structure and the first two eigenvalues and eigenvectors are computed. RMFLVEC
is used to extract the eigenvectors for use in the modal projection method to compute the thin-film
damping parameters. The command macro ABEXTRACT is used to compute the Rayleigh parameters
204

from the lowest two eigenmodes . Modal damping ratios are also provided by the ABEXTRACT macro
for the two eigenmodes.
Table 1.4: Modal Damping Parameters for First Two Eigenfrequencies (p. 205) lists the results from the
damping parameter extraction. Computed Rayleigh parameters are: ALPHAD=65212, BETAD=1.829e-8.
Table 1.4: Modal Damping Parameters for First Two Eigenfrequencies
Frequency
(Hz.)
Modal Damping
Coefficient
Modal Squeeze Stiffness Damping

Coefficient
Ratio
Stiffness
Ratio
55294
67419
.2758e9
.9703e-1
.2285e-2
157497
83123
.3568e10
.4200e-1
.3644e-2

/batch,list
/PREP7
/title, Damping Ratio and Rayleigh Damping Calculations for a Perforated Plate
/com
uMKS units
ET, 1,136,1
ET, 2,138,1
ET,3,185,,3

! Circular hole option, Hugh Knudsen Number
s_l=100
s_l1=60
s_w=20
s_t=1
c_r=3
d_el=2
pamb=.1
visc=18.3e-12
pref=.1
mfp=64e-3
Knud=mfp/d_el
!
!
!
!
!
!

Plate hole location
Plate width
Plate thickness
Hole radius
Gap
! ambient pressure (MPa)
! viscosity kg/(um)(s)
! Reference pressure (MPa)
! mean free path (um)
! Knudsen number
mp,visc,1,visc
mp,visc,2,visc
! Dynamic viscosity holes
mp,ex,3,79e3
! Gold
mp,dens,3,19300e-18
mp,nuxy,3,.1
r,1,d_el,,,pamb
rmore,pref,mfp
r,2,c_r,,,pamb
rmore,pref,mfp
! Real constants - hole
! Build the model

pcirc,c_r
agen,3,2,,,-s_l1/3
agen,3,2,,,s_l1/3
ASBA, 1, all
TYPE, 1
MAT, 1
smrtsize,4
AMESH, all
! Plate domain
! Hole domain
! Mesh plate domain
! Begin Hole generation

*do,i,1,5
nsel,all
205
Thin Film Analysis

*GET, numb, node, , num, max
! Create nodes for link elements
N, numb+1,-s_l1+i*s_l1/3,,
N, numb+2,-s_l1+i*s_l1/3,, s_t
TYPE,2
MAT, 2
REAL,2
NSEL, all
E, numb+1, numb+2
! Define 2-D link element
ESEL, s, type,,1
NSLE,s,1
local,11,1,-s_l1+i*s_l1/3
csys,11
NSEL,r, loc, x, c_r
! Select all nodes on the hole circumference
NSEL,a, node, ,numb+1
*GET, next, node, , num, min
CP, i, pres, numb+1, next
nsel,u,node, ,numb+1
nsel,u,node, ,next
CP, i, pres,all !Coupled DOF set for constant pressure
csys,0
*enddo
! End hole generation
esize,,2
type,3
mat,3
real,3
vext,all,,,,,s_t
! Extrude structural domain
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
nsel,a,loc,y,-s_w
nsel,a,loc,y,s_w
d,all,pres
nsel,all
esel,s,type,,2
nsle,s,1
nsel,r,loc,z,s_t
d,all,pres,0
dlist,all
! P=0 at top of plate
esel,s,type,,1
nsle,s,1
nsel,u,cp,,1,5
cm,FLUN,node
allsel
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
d,all,ux
d,all,uy
d,all,uz
allsel
fini
/solu
antype,modal
modopt,lanb,2
eqslv,sparse
mxpand,2
solve
fini
/post1
RMFLVEC
fini
206
! Modal analysis
! Extract lowest two eigenmodes
! Expand lowest two eigenmodes
! Extract eigenvectors
/solu
abextract,1,2
finish
! Extract damping ratios and Rayleigh constants
A transient dynamic analysis on the switch can be performed using the extracted damping parameters.
The following input illustrates a coupled electrostatic-structural time-transient solution. The electrostatic
field is assumed to be normal to the plate in the gap, and fringing effects are ignored. TRANS126 elements
are used to model the coupled electrostatic-structural interaction with the switch. The EMTGEN command
is used to generate the transducer elements. A step voltage pulse is applied over a short duration (65
micro-seconds) then released. Rayleigh damping parameters, when used, are applied to the global mass
(ALPHAD parameter) and stiffness (BETAD parameter) matrices. We want to apply these only to the
mass and stiffness matrix of the SOLID185 elements, and not the TRANS126 elements, because doing
so may overdamp the system. The TRANS126 elements produce a damping matrix and a stiffness matrix
only. Hence, we can use the ALPHAD parameter for the global mass matrix since there is no contribution
from the TRANS126 elements. To isolate the SOLID185 elements for beta damping, we can apply the
beta damping via a material damping option (MP,BETD). Figure 1.14: Time-Transient Response from
Voltage Pulse (p. 208) illustrates the displacement of a node near the center of the plate over time. The
maximum amplitude of displacement (0.11 microns) is small enough to ignore large deflection damping
effects.
/batch,list
/PREP7
/title, Damped Transient Dynamic Response of an RF MEMS switch
/com
uMKS units
/com,
Small deflection assumption
et,1,200,6
ET,3,185,,3
s_l=100
s_l1=60
s_w=20
s_t=1
c_r=3
d_el=2
pamb=.1
visc=18.3e-12
pref=.1
mfp=64e-3
Knud=mfp/d_el
!
!
!
!
!
!
Plate length (um)

Plate hole location
Plate width
Plate thickness
Hole radius
Gap
! ambient pressure (MPa)
! viscosity kg/(um)(s)
! Reference pressure (MPa)
! mean free path (um)
! Knudsen number
mp,ex,3,79e3
mp,dens,3,19300e-18
mp,nuxy,3,.1
mp,betd,1,1.829e-8
! Build the model
! Gold
! Material damping (from squeeze film results)
pcirc,c_r
agen,3,2,,,-s_l1/3
agen,3,2,,,s_l1/3
ASBA, 1, all
! Plate domain
! Hole domain
TYPE, 1
MAT, 1
smrtsize,4
AMESH, all
! Mesh plate domain
esize,,2
type,3
mat,3
real,3
vext,all,,,,,s_t
! Extrude structural domain
nsel,s,loc,x,-s_l
nsel,a,loc,x,s_l
207
Thin Film Analysis

d,all,ux
d,all,uy
d,all,uz
allsel
aclear,all
save
nsel,s,loc,z
cm,base,nodes
emtgen,'base',,,'uz',-d_el
! generate Transducer elements
allsel,all
nsel,s,loc,z,-d_el
d,all,uz,0
d,all,volt,0
cmsel,s,base
d,all,volt,10
allsel,all
fini
/solu
antyp,trans
alphad,65211
! alpha damping computed from Squeeze-film theory
kbc,1
time,.000065
deltime,2.0e-6
outres,all,none
outres,nsol,all
solve
time,.0002
cmsel,s,base
d,all,volt,0
allsel,all
solve
fini
n1=node(0,2,0)
/post26
nsol,2,n1,uz
prvar,2
plvar,2
finish
Figure 1.14: Time-Transient Response from Voltage Pulse
1.3.4. Damping Extraction for Large Signal Cases

If a structure does not undergo significant deformation, the gap between the structure and the fixed
wall may be assumed to be constant (small signal case). If the structural deformation in the gap is significant, the change in the gap may effect the damping of the structure (large signal case). The gap is
defined as a real constant in the thin-film fluid elements. Use SETFGAP to automatically define and/or
update the gap real constants for the thin-film FLUID136 elements. The command can be used to:
208
Slide Film Damping

Create real constant table entries for every selected FLUID136 element (large signal case).
Update an existing real constant table according to structural displacements for every FLUID136 element
(large signal case).
This option allows you to check the dependence of the damping parameters over the deflection range
of the structure.
1.4. Slide Film Damping

Slide film damping occurs if two surfaces separated by a thin fluid film move tangentially with respect
to each other, because energy is dissipated due to viscous flow. Typical applications are damping
between the fingers of comb drives and horizontally-moving seismic masses.
FLUID139 is used to model slide film damping. FLUID139 can model Couette and Stokes flow (Figure 1.15: Slide Film Damping at Low and High Frequencies (p. 210)). Couette flow assumes a constant
velocity gradient across the fluid gap. Tangentially moving surfaces at low frequencies produce a nearly
constant velocity gradient in the fluid, so Couette flow is applicable to low frequencies.
Stokes flow assumes that the velocity gradient is not constant across the fluid gap. Tangentially moving
surfaces at high frequencies do not produce a constant velocity gradient, so the Stokes flow is applicable
to high frequencies. The transition from Couette to Stokes flow occurs near the cut-off frequency.
c =
where is the fluid density, the dynamic viscosity and d the gap separation.
Couette flow does not occur at high frequencies, because inertial effects are important and viscous
friction is only able to accelerate a thin fluid layer near the moving surface. The penetration depth is
given by
=
209
Thin Film Analysis

Figure 1.15: Slide Film Damping at Low and High Frequencies
Low frequencies:
M vg Wall
Plat vl
ty
C tt l
A
FD =
p
d
Hi h frequencies:
M vg Wall
Plat vl
ty
St k l
FD ( ) =
2
2
+ ( )
(
)

2

2
( ) - ( )

FLUID139 models the effect of viscous flow in the thin film with a series of mass-damper elements, as
shown in Figure 1.16: Viscous Slide Film Element FLUID139 (p. 211). Couette flow is modeled using a
two-node option. Stokes flow is modeled using a 32-node option. In the 32-node option, the end nodes
(node 1 and 32) are connected to the structural portion of the model with structural degrees of freedom,
and the series of mass-damper elements are contained within "auxiliary" nodes (nodes 2-31).
The gap separation distance (GAP) and the overlap area of the surfaces (AREA) are specified as real
constants for FLUID139. If the overlap area changes during the analysis, the area change rate (DADU)
must also be specified as a real constant. A changing overlap area is typical in lateral comb drives.
= +

AREA is the initial overlap area, DADU is the change in the overlap area with respect to the surface
displacement, and un and ui are the location of the interface nodes (1 and 32). Note: For a constant
surface area, DADU is the width of the overlap surface.
FLUID139 may be used for a prestress static analysis in conjunction with a prestress harmonic analysis,
as well as a full transient analysis. Prestress analysis is required if the plate area changes due to the
structural displacement. A typical command sequence for a prestress harmonic analysis would include
the following:
/solu
antyp,static
pstress,on
.
210
Slide Film Damping

.
solve
fini
/solu
antyp,harmonic
pstress,on
.
.
solve
finish
KEYOPT(3) specifies the continuous flow options. For a no-slip assumption at the wall, use the continuum
theory (KEYOPT(3) = 0). For slip flow where the Knudsen number is much less or much greater than
1.0, use the first order slip flow condition (KEYOPT(3) = 1). For slip flow with a Knudsen number of approximately 1.0, use the extended slip flow option (KEYOPT(3) = 2).
Figure 1.16: Viscous Slide Film Element FLUID139
KEYOPT(2)=0 and KEYOPT(3)=0
Second wall
First wall
TK
Node I
Node J

Second wall
First wall
TK
I+1
I+2
I+3
I+29
I+30
I+31
Node I
I+32
Node J
I+32 = J

Second wall
First wall
Lm
TK
I
I+1
I+2
I+3
I+29
I+30
I+31
Node I
I+32
Node J
1.4.1. Slide Film Damping Example

Comb drive resonators are a common application for slide film damping. Figure 1.17: Comb Drive Resonator (p. 212) illustrates a typical comb drive assembly consisting of fixed and moving comb drives,
springs, and a central mass.
211
Thin Film Analysis

Figure 1.17: Comb Drive Resonator
Details on the comb drive geometry are given in the input file listed below. The electrostatic behavior
of the moving comb drives are represented by two TRANS126 transducer elements with prescribed
Stroke vs. Capacitance data obtained from finite element runs. The structural behavior of the crab legs
is modeled by a spring element. The inertial effects of the central mass are modeled with a mass element.
Damping occurs between the comb teeth (lateral dimension), and between the comb teeth and the
substrate (vertical dimension). Four FLUID139 elements are used to model the lateral and vertical
damping (two per comb drive). The cut-off frequency is well below the frequency range for the analysis;
therefore, Couette flow is assumed. Since the comb drive effective surface area changes with displacement, the DADU real constant is used (equal to the width of the plate area).
A static prestress analysis is run using a DC bias voltage on the input and output fixed comb drives. A
harmonic analysis sweep is then performed using a small AC voltage. The displacement (magnitude
and phase angle) of the central mass is shown in Figure 1.18: Displacement of Central Mass (p. 212).
Figure 1.19: Real and Imaginary Current (p. 213) shows the current.
Figure 1.18: Displacement of Central Mass
212
Slide Film Damping

Figure 1.19: Real and Imaginary Current
/prep7
/title Comb drive resonator with FLUID139 Couette damping
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
DRIVE COMB
|
|
CRAB LEG SPRING --- CENTRAL MASS --- CRAB LEG SPRING
|
|
PICK-UP COMB
! Reference:
! "Microelectromechanical Filters for Signal Processing",
! Lin, L., Howe, R.T., J. Microelectromechanical Systems,
! VOL 7, No. 3, Sept 1998
! beam parameters (uMKS units)
E = 190e3
d = 2.33e-15
hb = 2
wb = 2
Lb = 100
k = 5.699
!Young modulus
! density
! beam thickness
! beam width
! beam length
! mechanical stiffness
! comb parameter
n= 9
np=n*2
x0= 10
L0= 26
L=20
gi= L0-x0
w= 4
h= hb
gp=3
g= 3
Mr = 1.96563e-11
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
number of finger
number of finger pairs
initial finger overlap
finger length (stator comb)
finger length (moving comb)
initial gap
finger width
finger thickness
finger gap (lateral)
comb gap (vertical)
mass
! Lateral gap area

areal=np*h*x0
! Vertical gap area
areav=n*w*x0
! Stroke vs. Capacitance data
x1
cx1
x2
cx2
x3
cx3
x4
cx4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
14
0.97857e-2
15
0.96669e-2
16
0.95445e-2
17
0.94185e-2
213
Thin Film Analysis

x5 = 18
cx5 = 0.93384e-2
! Voltage conditions
Vi = 40
Vo = 60
Vac = 10
! input dc bias
! output dc bias
! input ac bias
! Damping parmeters
nu=18.3e-12
! dynamic viscosity
po=0.1
! reference pressure
dens=1.17e-18
! density
fc=nu/(2*3.14159*dens*(g**2))
! cutoff frequency
daduv=w*n
! change in plate area - vertical
dadul=h*np
! change in plate area - lateral
! Model
n,1,0
n,2,0
n,3,0
n,4,0
et,1,126,,0,1
!Trans126, UX-Volt DOF
r,1,,,gi,,
rmore,x1,cx1,x2,cx2,x3,cx3
rmore,x4,cx4,x5,cx5
e,1,2
e,2,3
et,2,21,,,4
r,2,Mr
type,2
real,2
e,2
! Mass element
et,3,14,,1
r,3,k
type,3
real,3
e,2,4
! linear spring, UX DOF
! Lateral dampers
et,4,139
! Slide-film damper, Couette flow, Continuum theory
mp,visc,4,nu
mp,dens,4,dens
r,4,g,areal,-dadul,po
type,4
mat,4
real,4
e,1,2
e,2,3
! Vertical dampers
r,5,g,areav,-daduv,po
real,5
e,1,2
e,2,3
d,1,ux,0
d,3,ux,0
d,4,ux,0
d,2,uy,0
d,2,volt,0
! Prestress static analysis
/solu
214
Slide Film Damping

d,1,volt,Vi
d,3,volt,Vo
pstres,on
solve
fini
! Harmonic Frequency Sweep
fr0=60000
fr1=120000
/solu
antyp,harm
d,1,volt,Vac
d,3,volt,0
pstres,on
harfrq,fr0,fr1
nsubs,60
outres,all,all
kbc,1
solve
! AC voltage component on capacitor

! prestress
/post26
nsol,2,2,u,x,ux2
esol,3,2,,nmisc,24,ir
esol,4,2,,nmisc,25,ii
/axlab,x,Frequency (Hz)
! label of x axis
plcplx,0
/axlab,y, Displacement (um)
plvar,2
! plot displacement versus time (frequency)
plcplx,1
/axlab,y, Phase angle
plvar,2
plcplx,2
/axlab,y, Current (pA)
plvar,3,4
fini
215
216
Index
A
acceleration, 129
ACEL command, 45, 129
acoustic analysis, 165
load step options, 175
loads for, 172
reviewing results from, 176
acoustics, 165
absolute pressure, 165
absorbing boundary condition, 167
amplitude, 172
applications of, 165
axisymmetric cases, 167
boundary admittance, 167
circular or spherical boundary (RAD), 167
compressible fluid, 165
coupled acoustic analysis, 165
coupling matrix, 176
definition of, 165
density, 167
far-field problems, 177
fluid load, 176
fluid-structure interaction, 165, 176
fluid-structure interface, 170
forcing frequency, 172
harmonic acoustic analysis, 166
infinite acoustic elements, 167
inviscid fluid, 165
mean pressure, 165
meshing the model, 168
modal analysis, 165
outgoing pressure wave, 167
particle velocity, 165
pressure changes, 165
pressure gradient, 165
sample fluid-structure acoustic analysis (batch), 177
sample room acoustic analysis, 179
solving acoustics problems, 165
sound-absorption material, 179
speed of sound (SONC), 167
standing wave pattern, 179
transient acoustic analysis, 165
uncoupled acoustic analysis, 165
unsymmetric matrices, 171
wavelength, 169
adiabatic boundaries, 42
advection limit, 62
advection term, 161
ambient radiation, 42
amplitude, 172
analysis options
acoustics, 171
analysis type
acoustics, 165
Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian analysis, 79
boundary conditions, 81
mesh updating, 83
remeshing, 84
arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian analysis
example problems, 87
artificial viscosity, 105
axis of rotation, 135
B
backward time integration method, 61
Bingham viscosity model, 119, 123, 131
FLOTRAN analysis, 12
laminar and turbulent flow, 33
thermal analysis, 42
transient analysis, 64
bulk temperature, 44
buoyancy, 45
C
Carreau viscosity model, 119, 123, 131
CGLOC command, 135
CGOMEGA command, 135
collocated Galerkin approach, 48, 161
compressible flow analysis, 4, 23, 103
compressible fluid, 165
conduction limit, 62
conductivity matrix algorithm, 46
conjugate heat transfer, 4, 46
convergence, 62, 140
coordinate systems, 133
Couette flow, 209
coupled acoustic analysis, 165
coupling algorithms, 145
cross-talk, 203
D
D command, 33, 81, 136, 153
DA command, 33, 81
database
backing up, 176
density, 41, 119
displacements, 174
distributed resistance, 136
divergence, 105
DL command, 33, 81
217
Index
drag, 38
E
effective viscosity, 24
elements
FLOTRAN, 7
example problems
arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian analysis, 87
compressible flow, 106
incompressible flow, 38
modal projection method, 204
multiple species, 153
slide film, 211
squeeze film, 191
thermal analysis, 49
volume of fluid analysis, 70
F
files
Jobname.RST, 176
FLDATA1 command, 25, 41, 61
FLDATA10 command, 121
FLDATA12 command, 126, 131
FLDATA14 command, 44, 103, 126
FLDATA20 command, 140-141
FLDATA24 command, 25, 33, 37, 161
FLDATA4A command, 61-62
FLDATA7 command, 117, 119, 130, 150
FLOCHECK command, 64
FLOTRAN analysis
applications, 3
artificial viscosity, 16
218
characterizing flow, 25
compressible flow, 4, 103
compressible flow analysis, 11
convergence, 14, 18
convergence and stability tools, 15
coordinate systems, 7
divergence, 21
DOF capping, 16
domain file, 14
element characteristics, 7
element limitations, 8
evaluating, 20
examining results, 12
files, 12
flow regime, 11
fluid properties, 117
free surface, 4
global iterations, 18
graphical solution tracking, 18
incompressible flow, 4
inertial relaxation, 16
laminar flow, 4
meshing, 11
modified inertial relaxation, 16
multiple species transport, 4
nodal residuals file file, 14
non-Newtonian fluid flow, 4
overview, 10
overwrite frequency option, 13
print file, 13
problem domain, 10
quadrature order, 17
relaxation factors, 15
residuals, 14
restart file, 14
restarting, 15
results file, 13
setting parameters, 12
solvers, 139
solving, 12
special features, 133
stopping, 20
thermal analysis, 4, 41
turbulence model, 11, 18
turbulent flow, 4
types, 3
verifying results, 21
flow regime
thin film, 188
fluid analyses
acoustics (see acoustics)

slide film, 209
squeeze film, 185
thin film, 185
fluid properties
initializing and varying, 126
specifying, 117
tables, 120
user-defined file, 118, 127
user-programmable subroutines, 118, 132
fluid property types, 117
fluid-structure interaction, 165, 174, 176
fluid-structure interface, 170
forced convection, 4, 45
forces, 174
forcing frequency, 172
free convection, 45
free surface analysis, 4
FSI, 176
G
generalized symmetry boundary conditions, 33, 81
global iterations, 62, 140
gravitational acceleration, 129
H
harmonic acoustic analysis, 166
harmonic acoustic analysis guidelines, 166
heat balance, 48-49
heat fluxes, 42
heat transfer (film) coefficients, 42
hydraulic diameter, 24
I
IC command, 150
ICE command, 66
ICVFRC command, 66
impedance, 174
incompressible flow analysis, 4, 23
difficult problems, 37
example problem, 38
meshing requirements, 32
inertial relaxation, 106
infinite acoustic elements, 167
inlet parameters, 25
inlet values, 33
intersections, 33
INTSRF command, 38
K
KEYOPT command, 133, 151
Knudsen number, 188
L
laminar flow, 4, 23, 25
large signal cases, 208
lift, 38
load step options
acoustics, 175
loads, 42, 171
M
mass imbalances, 33
mass types, 61
material model interface, 5
meshing, 32, 41
FLOTRAN analysis, 11
mixture types, 149
modified inertial relaxation, 153
moments, 174
monotone Streamline Upwind approach, 48
monotone streamline upwind approach, 161
moving wall, 33
MP command, 41, 117
MSADV command, 161
MSCAP command, 153
MSDATA command, 150-151
MSMETH command, 153
MSNOMF command, 150
MSPROP command, 152
MSRELAX command, 153
MSSOLU command, 153
MSSPEC command, 149-150, 152
multiple species transport, 4, 149
N
natural convection, 4
Newmark time integration method, 61
non-fluid properties, 41, 117
non-Newtonian fluid flow analysis, 4, 130
non-Newtonian viscosity models, 119, 123
P
particle velocity, 165
PERI command, 33
periodic boundaries, 33
/PICE command, 66
PLVFRC command, 69
power law viscosity model, 119, 123, 130
preconditioned bicgstab solver, 143
preconditioned generalized minimum residual solver,
141
219
Index
pressure gradient, 165
pressure surface loads, 174
pressure wave limit, 62
property calculations, 103
property types, 117, 121
R
radiosity solver method, 49
ratio of specific heats, 103, 129
reference pressure, 129
reference properties, 129
relaxation factors, 45, 153
reviewing results
acoustics, 176
Reynolds number, 24
rotating reference frames, 135
rotational speeds, 135
S
sample acoustic analysis
batch method, 177
search directions, 140
semi-direct solvers, 140
SFE command, 66
SFL command, 66
SIMPLEF algorithm, 145
SIMPLEN algorithm, 145
slide film, 185, 209
solution, 171
Solvers, 139, 171
sparse direct solver, 144, 171
species mass fractions, 150
specific heat, 41, 103, 118, 124
specified flow, 33
specified pressure, 33
squeeze film, 185
squeeze film analysis
harmonic analysis, 187
static analysis, 187
squeeze stiffness effect, 185
stationary wall, 33
stepped or ramped loads, 175
Stokes flow, 209
streamline upwind/Petrov-Galerkin approach, 48, 161
surface tension coefficient, 65, 117, 119, 125
surface-to-surface radiation, 42, 49
Sutherland's law, 123
swirl, 136
symmetry boundary, 33
220
T
temperature equation, 41
temperature field algorithm, 46
temperature load, 42
temperature offset, 126
thermal analysis, 4
loads and boundary conditions, 42
property specifications, 41
thermal boundary conditions, 42
thermal conductivity, 41, 119, 125
thin film analysis, 185
Couette vs. Stokes flow, 209
cross-talk, 203
flow regime, 188
large signal cases, 208
slide film, 209
squeeze film, 185
time steps, 62
TOFFST command, 126, 129
total temperature, 103
settings, 62
terminating, 63
tri-diagonal matrix algorithm, 140
turbulence model, 24-25
turbulence ratio, 25, 37
turbulent flow, 4, 23
turbulent kinetic energy, 25, 33
U
uncoupled acoustic analysis, 165
units, 117
unspecified boundary, 33
V
variable density option, 45
velocity capping, 37
viscosity, 41
Bingham model, 119, 123, 131
Carreau model, 119, 123, 131
effective, 24
power law model, 119, 123, 130
viscous heating, 45
volume of fluid analysis, 65
input settings, 67
loads, 66
postprocessing, 69
W
wall roughness, 33
wall static contact angle, 117, 119, 126
221
222

Ans Flu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ans Flu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fluids Analysis Guide

Copyright and Trademark Information

U.S. Government Rights

Fluids Analysis Guide

Fluids Analysis Guide

Fluids Analysis Guide

Fluids Analysis Guide

Fluids Analysis Guide

Fluids Analysis Guide

Chapter 1: Overview of FLOTRAN CFD Analyses

1.1. Types of FLOTRAN Analyses

Overview of FLOTRAN CFD Analyses

1.1.1. Laminar Flow Analysis

1.1.2. Turbulent Flow Analysis

1.1.3. Thermal Analysis

1.1.4. Compressible Flow Analysis

1.1.5. Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow Analysis

1.1.6. Multiple Species Transport Analysis

1.1.7. Free Surface Analysis

About GUI Paths and Command Syntax

1.2. About GUI Paths and Command Syntax

Chapter 2: The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

2.1. Characteristics of the FLOTRAN Elements

Quadrilateral, four nodes or triangle,

Fluid velocity, pressure, temperature,

Hexahedral, eight nodes or tetrahedral, four nodes or wedge, six nodes

Fluid velocity, pressure, temperature,

2.1.1. Other Element Features

The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

2.2. Considerations and Restrictions for Using the FLOTRAN Elements

2.2.1. Limitations on FLOTRAN Element Use

Considerations and Restrictions for Using the FLOTRAN Elements

The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

2.3. Overview of a FLOTRAN Analysis

2.3.1. Determining the Problem Domain

Overview of a FLOTRAN Analysis

2.3.2. Determining the Flow Regime

2.3.3. Creating the Finite Element Mesh

The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

2.3.4. Applying Boundary Conditions

2.3.5. Setting FLOTRAN Analysis Parameters

2.3.6. Solving the Problem

2.3.7. Examining the Results

2.4. Files the FLOTRAN Elements Create

Files the FLOTRAN Elements Create

2.4.1. The Results File

2.4.2. The Print File (Jobname.PFL)

The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

2.4.3. The Nodal Residuals File

2.4.4. The Restart File

2.4.5. The Domain File

Convergence and Stability Tools

2.4.6. Restarting a FLOTRAN Analysis

2.5. Convergence and Stability Tools

The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis

2.5.2. Inertial Relaxation

2.5.3. Modified Inertial Relaxation

2.5.4. Artificial Viscosity

2.5.5. DOF Capping

What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis

2.5.6. The Quadrature Order

2.6. What to Watch For During a FLOTRAN Analysis

The Basics of FLOTRAN Analysis